Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Ledcor Construction Inc; 2010-05-13; PWS10-31UTIL Part 3 of 5
Exploration Trenches Logs for T-3 an T-4 (Leighton, 2001) LOG OF TRENCH: Project Name- Oillis/Carlsbad PWC Logger! hy: SW Projpr.t Niimhftr- 040448-001 Elevation- ^fifi' Equipment- r!/VmOPRar.lrhn« T .riRatipn/Orid' Sffi Oftrrf''"'-hn''>-a' Map GEOLOGIC ATTITUDES DATE: 5/25/01 DESCRIPTION: ARTIFICIAL FILL-nonstructural A @ 0'-4.5 ' : Clayey silty medium to coarse SAND with few fine gravels, cobbles and boulders: light to dark brown and gray, moist, medium dense TOPSOIL/COLLUVIUM B @ 4.5'-6': SAND/SILT: dark gray-brown, moist, loose; with scattered organic debris (odor) and few rounded gravel C @6'-6.3': Silty SAND: chocolate brown, moist, loose; few organic debris; micaceous @ 6.3 '-7': Sandy CLAY: gray/brown, moist, firm to stiflf LUSARDI FORMATION E @ 7'-8': Medium to coarse SANDSTONE CONGLOMERATE, weathered granitic gravel, cobbles and boulders in a medium to coarse sandstone matrix: light brown, gray-brown and brown, orange/red, damp, very dense GEOLOGIC UNIT Am Topsoil/ Qcol Kl ENGINEERING PROPERTIES uses SM- SC SM7 ML SM sc GP Sample No. 3 @7-8' Moisture Density (pcf) GRAPHICAL REPRESENTATION: SCALE: 1"=5' SURFACE SLOPE: 5° to E TREND: N25W } ^1 _£] V-i V-^ D ^., jg—^ , 'o-. - • 1 .-••__; — ' . o . __ t> — — • - ,0 . . Ifc^ • • • • .' • . \ V ^.'£1 „ —V .B .,e — .'".T'-T1- JS • ^^^^^^^ .Tijrr 'o '• -• _ • • — ^^^"^ ^*^*r* ^^ ri_-^/ Is Total Depth = 8 Feet No Ground Water Encountered Backfilled: 5/25/01 (uncompacted) LOG OF TRENCH: T-4 Project Name: fiillis/rarlshad PWC T.offe-edhv: SW Project Numbe Equipment: GEOLOGIC ATTITUDES r n4.fU4R.nm F.levntinn- 1S9.' PAf 1\<VP RarHiOft T.nr.atifM1/f~JrM- S«* frpnfv.linir.al Map DATE: 5/25/01 DESCRIPTION: ARTIFICIAL FDLL-nonstrucrural A @ 0'-2.5': Clayey silty medium to coarse SAND with scattered gravel and cobble: brown to light gray-brown, moist, medium dense TOPSOIL/COLLUVIUM B @2.5'-3': Silty medium to coarse SAND: dark gray, damp, loose; scattered organic debris (odors) C @3'-4': Silty medium to coarse SAND: chocolate brown, damp, loose: micaceous rare; organic debris LUSARDI FORMATION D @ 4'-5' : Medium to coarse SANDSTONE CONGLOMERATE, weathered granitic gravel, cobbles and boulders in a medium to coarse sandstone matrix: light brown, gray-brown and brown, orange/red, damp, very dense GEOLOGIC UNIT Afn Topsoil/ Qcol Kl ENGINEERING PROPERTIES uses SM- SC SM SM Gp Sample No. 4 4-5' Moisture (%) Density (pcf) GRAPHICAL REPRESENTATION: SCALE: 1=2' SURFACE SLOPE: 0° TREND: N10E tf"\ B"H • o ' • ' ^_ — • , ' _ O j' ~ / «-*-^ ^\j 0 '- ° _i s •- — - A,-L: •• "" V • * k a 0 ^-__ — r" -~ ' — ~y~_ ~ ~ '-T^.-^l • * 0 ••' c •s- D^- . _—T- 1 * * — , 0 I—' • O 'I • _ . • . _ ,_ _. / -°>^ %r -s-/ "^7•/ 7 Total Depth = 5 Feet No Ground Water Encountered Backfilled: 5/25/01 (uncompacted) 602256-001 APPENDIX C Laboratory Testing Procedures and Test Results Direct Shear Test: A direct shear test was performed on a selected remolded sample which was soaked for a minimum of 24 hours under a surcharge equal to the applied normal force during testing. After transfer of the sample to the shear box and reloading of the sample, the pore pressures set up in the sample (due to the transfer) were allowed to dissipate for a period of approximately 1 hour prior to application of shearing force. The sample was tested under various normal loads utilizing a motor-driven, strain-controlled, direct-shear testing apparatus at a strain rate of 0.05 inches per minute. After a shear strain of 0.2 inches, the motor was stopped and the sample was allowed to "relax" for approximately 15 minutes. The stress drop during the relaxation period was recorded. It is anticipated that, hi a majority of samples tested, the 15 minutes relaxing of the samples is sufficient to allow dissipation of pore pressures that may have set up in the samples due to shearing. The drained peak strength was estimated by deducting the shear force reduction during the relaxation period from the peak shear values. The shear values at the end of shearing are considered to be ultimate values and are shown in parenthesis. Sample Location B-4, @ 0-5 Feet Sample Description Brown Clayey to Silty Sand Test Type Remolded to 90% Friction Angle (degrees) 27 (27) Apparent Cohesion (psf) 300(150) Maximum Density Tests: The maximum dry density and optimum moisture content of typical materials were determined in accordance with ASTM Test Method D1557. The results of these tests are presented in the attached data. Sample Location B-4, @ 0-5 Feet B-9, @ 0-5 Feet Sample Description Brown Clayey to Silty Sand (SC - SM) Yellowish Brown Sand w/Clay (SP-SC) Maximum Dry Density (pcf) 131.0 133.5 Optimum Moisture Content (%) 8.0 7.5 C-l 602256-001 APPENDIX C (Continued) Minimum Resistivity and pH Tests: Minimum resistivity and pH tests were performed in general accordance with Caltrans Test Method CT643 for Steel or CT532 for concrete and standard geochemical methods. The results are presented in the table below: Sample Location B-3 @ 0 - 5 Feet Sample Description Brown Silty Sand (SM) PH 7.39 Minimum Resistivity (ohms-cm) 6,000 Chloride Content: Chloride content was tested in accordance with Caltrans Test Method CT422. The results are presented below: Sample Location B-3 @ 0 - 5 Feet Chloride Content, ppm 84 Chloride Attack Potential* Threshold *per City of San Diego Program Guidelines for Design Consultant, 1992. Soluble Sulfates: The soluble sulfate contents of selected samples were determined by standard geochemical methods (Caltrans Test Method CT417). The test results are presented in the table below: Sample Location B-3 @ 0 - 5 Feet Sample Description Brown Silty Sand (SM) Sulfate Content (%) 0.018 Potential Degree of Sulfate Attack* Negligible Based on the 1997 edition of the Uniform Building Code, Table No. 19-A-4, prepared by the International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO, 1997). Moisture and Density Determination Tests: Moisture content and dry density determinations were performed on relatively undisturbed samples obtained from the test borings. The results of these tests are presented in the boring logs. Where applicable, only moisture content was determined from "undisturbed" or disturbed samples. C-2 602256-001 APPENDIX C (Continued) Hydraulic Conductivity (ASTM D5Q84): Hydraulic conductivity tests are performed on selected undisturbed and remolded samples collected from the exploratory borings. These tests are performed in general accordance with the ASTM Test Method D5084. The samples are placed in the triaxial testing device and tested with a Falling Head Method. The table below reports the average hydraulic conductivity values for the samples. Sample Location B-9, (remolded - 90% RC) Sand w/clay(SP-SC) Average Hydraulic Conductivity (cm/sec) 0.000021 C-3 Seismic Refraction Survey (Leighton, 2001) 215 So. Highway 101. Suite 203 P.O. Box 1152 Solana Beach. CA 92075 Telephone: (858) 481-8949 Facsimile: (858) 481-8998 Website: subsurfacesurveys.com August 29, 2001 Leighton and Associates 3934 Murphy Canyon Road, Suite B-205 San Diego, CA 92123 Project / Invoice Number: 01-335 Attn: Mike Jensen Re: Seismic Refraction Survey, Carlsbad, California Introduction - This report presents the findings of a seismic refraction survey conducted over the gravel lot on the northeast corner and the baseball diamond on the southeast corner of Orion Way and Orion Street in Carlsbad, California (Fig. 1) on August 10th, 2001. The purpose of this survey was to evaluate the thickness of fill, alluvium/colluvium, and depth to bedrock. Instrumentation and Field Procedure - A total of 1816 lineal feet of data was collected along 8 survey lines. The seismic line locations were marked in the field with paint and were detailed on a topographic map supplied by the clients representative (Fig. 2). The spread layouts were determined at the site, and were critically located to maximize useable information. Seismic waves were initiated at the ends of each spread by striking an aluminum plate with a 20-pound sledge (Fig 3). Seismic arrivals were detected by a series of twenty-four geophones, and recorded with a Bison 9024 24 channel seismic system with DIFP, digital instantaneous floating point, capability. This automatically sets gains, balances channels, and sets other shooting parameters, in real time. The materials at the site provide good transmission of seismic energy, and the records produced are of good quality. Methodology - The refraction method uses first-arrival times of refracted seismic waves to determine the thicknesses and seismic velocities of subsurface materials. Seismic waves generated at the surface are reflected and refracted from boundaries separating materials of contrasting velocities, and are detected by a series of surface geophones. The travel times of the seismic waves are used in conjunction with the shot-geophone distances to obtain thickness and velocity information, in this case geophone spacing varied between five, ten, and twelve feet (line length depended on access and desired coverage) and shot points were conducted at either five or ten feet off each end of the line and between geophones 6 and 7,12 and 13, and 18 and 19. The line lengths varied between 120 and 276 feet in length and allowed for an approximate depth of investigation of approximately one third of the overall line length. -rg—^-'-••-.IM---. ,.. ... , ,__—„ '/-> . :' The seismic refraction technique requires that velocities increase with depth, which is usually the case. A layer having a velocity lower than that of the layer above will not be detectable by seismic refraction, and will lead to errors in the depth computations to any subsequent layers. The processing of the acquired data is computationally intense. A ray tracing computer program, SIPT2, is used to iteratively honor all detector information to determine dip and irregularities in the refracting surfaces, and to be able to consider a large number of layers, where they are developed. A picking program, with such features as zoom, filtering, time stretching, and separation of traces, is also used. Rock Rippabilitv Classification - In order to group the materials to be excavated in terms of difficulty of excavation, Caterpillar has adopted a three-fold classification scheme, the independent variable being seismic velocity. This classification is based on experience with similar rocks in various locals, and assumes multi or single shank D9N or equivalent equipment. The rocks are classified as follows: Seismic Velocity ° MelC's Per Second > 1000 L. D9N Ripper Performance • Multi or Single Shank No. 9 Ripper Estimated by Seismic Wave Velocities I J 3 I . I i L Rippers Feel Per Second r 1000 0 1 10 II I? I!) M TOPSOIL CLAY GLACIAL TILL IGNEOUS ROCKS GRANITE BASALT TRAP ROCK SEDIMENTARY ROCKS SHALE SANDSTONE SILTSTONE CLAVSTONE CONGLOMERATE BRECCIA CALICHE LIMESTONE METAMORPHIC ROCKS SCHIST SLATE MINERALS & ORES COAL IRON ORE MARGINAL I NONRIPPABLE G5SSSS3 Marginal ripping refers to rocks in which it becomes difficult to achieve tooth penetration, sharply reducing ripping production. Local blasting may be necessary in order to maintain a desired ripping production rate. Non-rippable refers to rocks in which the use of fieavy machinery is likely to cease being a cost-effective method of excavation, necessitating the use of explosives to maintain a desired excavation rate. We emphasize that the cutoffs in this classification scheme are approximate and that rock characteristics, such as fracture spacing and orientation, play a major role in determining rock rippability. Findings - Example monitor records from Line 3 are presented in figure 4 to illustrate data quality for a typical forward, mid(X 3), and reverse shot sequence. The data recorded is displayed in time-distance plot format in order to complete layer assignments. The curves for the forward, mid(X 3), reverse, shots from Line 3 are displayed on the same graph (Fig. 5). After layers are identified, the redundant data provided over each spread, are input into the iterative, ray tracing modeling program. The resulting geologic structure sections for the eight lines are illustrated on Figures 6 through 13. Lines 1 through 3 of the seismic lines collected illustrate a three-layer case. These layers are interpreted to represent fill material overlying alluvium/colluvium/soil overlying bedrock. The velocities of the layers are also well defined: Layer Velocity (ft/sec) Material 1 1690-2149 Fill material 2 2826-4177 Alluvium/Colluvium/Soil 3 4585-5807 Bedrock Lines 4 through 8 of the seismic lines collected illustrate a two-layer case. These layers are interpreted to represent fill material overlying bedrock. The velocities of the layers are also well defined: Velocity (ft/sec) Material 1 1690-2149 Fill material 3 4585-5807 Bedrock Note: The measured seismic velocities represent average velocities of the subsurface materials, and significant local variations may be present at any level. Conclusions - The interpretation for the seismic lines collected agree well with the results of the geotechnical trenching logs provided by the client with respect to lateral limits determined for the fill and alluviurn/colluvium. An exception to this was found for the baseball field portion of the survey area where geotechnical logs indicate a thin layer of alluviurn/colluvium underlying engineered fill (suggesting a three layer case). Seismic data for this portion of the survey area suggests a two- layer case. This may be due to a lack of significant thickness and/or velocity contrast between the fill and alluviurn/colluvium. It should also be noted that undulations for refractors presented in cross sectional view may be the result of lateral changes in velocity and are exaggerated due to choice of an expanded depth scale relative to the horizontal scale. All data acquired in these surveys are in confidential file in this office, and are available for review by your staff, or by us at your request, at any time. We appreciate the opportunity to participate in this project. Please call, if there are questions. Patrick F. Lehrmann Gary W. Crosby, Ph.D., GP 960 Staff Geol/Geophysicist Senior Geol/Geophysicist Cltirnw4I^J7.-W5Mi,'S;-,yiirf'!WjWkW.*^S«BjiiIfffenjfjJS'SS^iCte't*;^m*m>sM ^^>;»i:-.','TH10a.-"''IZ t ;M ': M OOQJWi\£;K*:"PfiP# ::"i; ^*}i ^ '«• -ooc _ri i I i i i i i i i i i I i i i i i i i i 1O 12 14 16 (DISTANCE IN FEET) i i i r i i i i i i i i I r i' i i i r i~i 11111111:1111 i i i i i i i i i i i i VERTICAL SCALE 0 15ft HORIZONTAL SCALE JLOO .ISO (DISTANCE IN FEET) 5615 ft/s VERTICAL SCALE 0 15ft HORIZONTAL SCALE 0 40ft 31O " i l I i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i ii .1 i i i i. .i i j i i i i i 1.1 i i i i O 5O HDD ISO 2OO (DISTANCE IN FEET) VERTICAL SCALE 0 15ft HORIZONTAL SCALE 0 50ft JL50 2OO 23O (DISTANCE IN FEET) 380 FIGURE 8 N 37O - UlIL -360 Ula 350 34O 111 II I I t i FT 1 I i FT I I I ) ( 1 Fill n F"F~F'I r F~I ) TTprr LINE 4 '57O3 VERTICAL SCALE 0 10ft HORIZONTAL SCALE 20ft i I I I i I i i i i i I I I I I I I I I I l I I I i I i i i I i I I I-i-i I-1 i i I i I i i i i i i i i i I i i i i i i i | I I i 11 O 2O 40 6O 8O (DISTANCE IN FEET) 1OO 12O ft FIGURE 9 1 flI I w 38O 37Q 3GOinwu.z 35O 0.UlD 34O 330 i i i ] i i i i M i i I I i I i i rn i i I i r i i i i I 'i i | i i i i i i i r i I i i i i i i i i i LINES •1593 VERTICAL SCALE 0 15ft HORIZONTAL SCALE 0 50ft 1 i i I. i i. .1 i i i_J ill i.. i i i I i i i. i J i i i i ICO ISO (DISTANCE IN FEET) 2 Ofl 230 sw VERTTCAL SCALE 0 1Stt HORIZONTAL SCALE 0 50ft 330 11 ,,i i, .i—i—i. i i i—i i i 1.1 i t i i (DISTANCE IN FEET) FIGURE 11 Jj ? I| I I I i i W E3TO 11 i i | i i i i i i i i i | i i i i i—i i i i |—i i i i i i i i i | i i i i i i "i i i | i i i i i i i—i ryr UI UIU. Z o. Ufa LINE 7 VERTICAL SCALE 0 15ft HORIZONTAL SCALE 0 50ft I (DISTANCE IN FEET) FIGURE 12 N uiUlu. uiQ 1 ' ' ' I ,,,,,,,,., , . . , I ' ' ' VERTKXaiL SCALE 0 15ft HORIZONTAL SCALE 0 50ft 32O I ' ' ' I ' i ' i ' ' ' ' ' I ' ' ' '• i i ' ' ' I ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' i I ' i ' ' i i i ' ! I '. '• i ' ' ' ' ' ' I ""o so too i5O aoo 250 (DISTANCE IN FEET) FIGURE 13 Leighton Consulting, Inc. GENERAL EARTHWORK AND GRADING SPECIFICATIONS Page 1 of 6 LEIGHTON CONSULTING, INC. GENERAL EARTHWORK AND GRADING SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROUGH GRADING 1.0 General 1.1 Intent: These General Earthwork and Grading Specifications are for the grading and earthwork shown on the approved grading plan(s) and/or indicated in the geotechnical report(s). These Specifications are a part of the recommendations contained in the geotechnical report(s). In case of conflict, the specific recommendations in the geotechnical report shall supersede these more general Specifications. Observations of the earthwork by the project Geotechnical Consultant during the course of grading may result in new or revised recommendations that could supersede these specifications or the recommendations in the geotechnical report(s). 1.2 The Geotechnical Consultant of Record: Prior to commencement of work, the owner shall employ the Geotechnical Consultant of Record (Geotechnical Consultant). The Geotechnical Consultants shall be responsible for reviewing the approved geotechnical report(s) and accepting the adequacy of the preliminary geotechnical findings, conclusions, and recommendations prior to the commencement of the grading. Prior to commencement of grading, the Geotechnical Consultant shall review the "work plan" prepared by the Earthwork Contractor (Contractor) and schedule sufficient personnel to perform the appropriate level of observation, mapping, and compaction testing. During the grading and earthwork operations, the Geotechnical Consultant shall observe, map, and document the subsurface exposures to verify the geotechnical design assumptions. If the observed conditions are found to be significantly different than the interpreted assumptions during the design phase, the Geotechnical Consultant shall inform the owner, recommend appropriate changes in design to accommodate the observed conditions, and notify the review agency where required. Subsurface areas to be geotechnically observed, mapped, elevations recorded, and/or tested include natural ground after it has been cleared for receiving fill but before fill is placed, bottoms of all "remedial removal" areas, all key bottoms, and benches made on sloping ground to receive fill. The Geotechnical Consultant shall observe the moisture-conditioning and processing of the subgrade and fill materials and perform relative compaction testing of fill to determine the attained level of compaction. The Geotechnical Consultant shall provide the test results to the owner and the Contractor on a routine and frequent basis. 3030.1094 Leighton Consulting, Inc. GENERAL EARTHWORK AND GRADING SPECIFICATIONS Page 2 of 6 1.3 The Earthwork Contractor: The Earthwork Contractor (Contractor) shall be qualified, experienced, and knowledgeable in earthwork logistics, preparation and processing of ground to receive fill, moisture-conditioning and processing of fill, and compacting fill. The Contractor shall review and accept the plans, geotechnical report(s), and these Specifications prior to commencement of grading. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for performing the grading in accordance with the plans and specifications. The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the owner and the Geotechnical Consultant a work plan that indicates the sequence of earthwork grading, the number of "spreads" of work and the estimated quantities of daily earthwork contemplated for the site prior to commencement of grading. The Contractor shall inform the owner and the Geotechnical Consultant of changes in work schedules and updates to the work plan at least 24 hours in advance of such changes so that appropriate observations and tests can be planned and accomplished. The Contractor shall not assume that the Geotechnical Consultant is aware of all grading operations. The Contractor shall have the sole responsibility to provide adequate equipment and methods to accomplish the earthwork in accordance with the applicable grading codes and agency ordinances, these Specifications, and the recommendations in the approved geotechnical report(s) and grading plan(s). If, in the opinion of the Geotechnical Consultant, unsatisfactory conditions, such as unsuitable soil, improper moisture condition, inadequate compaction, insufficient buttress key size, adverse weather, etc., are resulting in a quality of work less than required in these specifications, the Geotechnical Consultant shall reject the work and may recommend to the owner that construction be stopped until the conditions are rectified. 2.0 Preparation of Areas to be Filled 2.1 Clearing and Grubbing: Vegetation, such as brush, grass, roots, and other deleterious material shall be sufficiently removed and properly disposed of in a method acceptable to the owner, governing agencies, and the Geotechnical Consultant. The Geotechnical Consultant shall evaluate the extent of these removals depending on specific site conditions. Earth fill material shall not contain more than 1 percent of organic materials (by volume). No fill lift shall contain more than 5 percent of organic matter. Nesting of the organic materials shall not be allowed. If potentially hazardous materials are encountered, the Contractor shall stop work in the affected area, and a hazardous material specialist shall be informed immediately for proper evaluation and handling of these materials prior to continuing to work in that area. As presently defined by the State of California, most refined petroleum products (gasoline, diesel fuel, motor oil, grease, coolant, etc.) have chemical constituents that are considered to be hazardous waste. As such, the indiscriminate dumping or spillage of these fluids onto the ground may constitute a misdemeanor, punishable by fines and/or imprisonment, and shall not be allowed. 3030.1094 Leighton Consulting, Inc. GENERAL EARTHWORK AND GRADING SPECIRCATIONS Page 3 of 6 2.2 Processing: Existing ground that has been declared satisfactory for support of fill by the Geotechnical Consultant shall be scarified to a minimum depth of 6 inches. Existing ground that is not satisfactory shall be overexcavated as specified in the following section. Scarification shall continue until soils are broken down and free of large clay lumps or clods and the working surface is reasonably uniform, flat, and free of uneven features that would inhibit uniform compaction. 2.3 Overexcavation: In addition to removals and overexcavations recommended in the approved geotechnical report(s) and the grading plan, soft, loose, dry, saturated, spongy, organic-rich, highly fractured or otherwise unsuitable ground shall be overexcavated to competent ground as evaluated by the Geotechnical Consultant during grading. 2.4 Benching: Where fills are to be placed on ground with slopes steeper than 5:1 (horizontal to vertical units), the ground shall be stepped or benched. Please see the Standard Details for a graphic illustration. The lowest bench or key shall be a minimum of 15 feet wide and at least 2 feet deep, into competent material as evaluated by the Geotechnical Consultant. Other benches shall be excavated a minimum height of 4 feet into competent material or as otherwise recommended by the Geotechnical Consultant. Fill placed on ground sloping flatter than 5:1 shall also be benched or otherwise overexcavated to provide a flat subgrade for the fill. 2.5 Evaluation/Acceptance of Fill Areas: All areas to receive fill, including removal and processed areas, key bottoms, and benches, shall be observed, mapped, elevations recorded, and/or tested prior to being accepted by the Geotechnical Consultant as suitable to receive fill. The Contractor shall obtain a written acceptance from the Geotechnical Consultant prior to fill placement. A licensed surveyor shall provide the survey control for determining elevations of processed areas, keys, and benches. 3.0 Fill Material 3.1 General: Material to be used as fill shall be essentially free of organic matter and other deleterious substances evaluated and accepted by the Geotechnical Consultant prior to placement. Soils of poor quality, such as those with unacceptable gradation, high expansion potential, or low strength shall be placed in areas acceptable to the Geotechnical Consultant or mixed with other soils to achieve satisfactory fill material. 3.2 Oversize: Oversize material defined as rock, or other irreducible material with a maximum dimension greater than 8 inches, shall not be buried or placed in fill unless location, materials, and placement methods are specifically accepted by the Geotechnical Consultant. Placement operations shall be such that nesting of oversized material does not occur and such that oversize material is completely surrounded by compacted or densified fill. Oversize material shall not be placed within 10 vertical feet of finish grade or within 2 feet of future utilities or underground construction. 3030.1094 Leighton Consulting, Inc. GENERAL EARTHWORK AND GRADING SPECIFICATIONS Page 4 of 6 3.3 Import: If importing of fill material is required for grading, proposed import material shall meet the requirements of Section 3.1. The potential import source shall be given to the Geotechnical Consultant at least 48 hours (2 working days) before importing begins so that its suitability can be determined and appropriate tests performed. 4.0 Fill Placement and Compaction 4.1 Fill Layers: Approved fill material shall be placed in areas prepared to receive fill (per Section 3.0) in near-horizontal layers not exceeding 8 inches in loose thickness. The Geotechnical Consultant may accept thicker layers if testing indicates the grading procedures can adequately compact the thicker layers. Each layer shall be spread evenly and mixed thoroughly to attain relative uniformity of material and moisture throughout. 4.2 Fill Moisture Conditioning: Fill soils shall be watered, dried back, blended, and/or mixed, as necessary to attain a relatively uniform moisture content at or slightly over optimum. Maximum density and optimum soil moisture content tests shall be performed in accordance with the American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM Test Method Dl 557-07). 4.3 Compaction of Fill: After each layer has been moisture-conditioned, mixed, and evenly spread, it shall be uniformly compacted to not less than 90 percent of maximum dry density (ASTM Test Method D1557-07). Compaction equipment shall be adequately sized and be either specifically designed for soil compaction or of proven reliability to efficiently achieve the specified level of compaction with uniformity. 4.4 Compaction of Fill Slopes: In addition to normal compaction procedures specified above, compaction of slopes shall be accomplished by backrolling of slopes with sheepsfoot rollers at increments of 3 to 4 feet in fill elevation, or by other methods producing satisfactory results acceptable to the Geotechnical Consultant. Upon completion of grading, relative compaction of the fill, out to the slope face, shall be at least 90 percent of maximum density per ASTM Test Method D1557-07. 4.5 Compaction Testing: Field tests for moisture content and relative compaction of the fill soils shall be performed by the Geotechnical Consultant. Location and frequency of tests shall be at the Consultant's discretion based on field conditions encountered. Compaction test locations will not necessarily be selected on a random basis. Test locations shall be selected to verify adequacy of compaction levels in areas that are judged to be prone to inadequate compaction (such as close to slope faces and at the fill/bedrock benches). 4.6 Frequency of Compaction Testing: Tests shall be taken at intervals not exceeding 2 feet in vertical rise and/or 1,000 cubic yards of compacted fill soils embankment. In addition, as a guideline, at least one test shall be taken on slope faces for each 5,000 square feet of slope face and/or each 10 feet of vertical height of slope. The Contractor shall assure that fill construction is such that the testing schedule can be accomplished by the Geotechnical Consultant. The Contractor shall stop or slow down the earthwork construction if these minimum standards are not met. 3030.1094 Leighton Consulting, Inc. GENERAL EARTHWORK AND GRADING SPECIFICATIONS Page 5 of 6 4.7 Compaction Test Locations: The Geotechnical Consultant shall document the approximate elevation and horizontal coordinates of each test location. The Contractor shall coordinate with the project surveyor to assure that sufficient grade stakes are established so that the Geotechnical Consultant can determine the test locations with sufficient accuracy. At a minimum, two grade stakes within a horizontal distance of 100 feet and vertically less than 5 feet apart from potential test locations shall be provided. 5.0 Subdrain Installation Subdrain systems shall be installed in accordance with the approved geotechnical report(s), the grading plan, and the Standard Details. The Geotechnical Consultant may recommend additional subdrains and/or changes in subdrain extent, location, grade, or material depending on conditions encountered during grading. All subdrains shall be surveyed by a land surveyor/civil engineer for line and grade after installation and prior to burial. Sufficient time should be allowed by the Contractor for these surveys. 6.0 Excavation Excavations, as well as over-excavation for remedial purposes, shall be evaluated by the Geotechnical Consultant during grading. Remedial removal depths shown on geotechnical plans are estimates only. The actual extent of removal shall be determined by the Geotechnical Consultant based on the field evaluation of exposed conditions during grading. Where fill-over-cut slopes are to be graded, the cut portion of the slope shall be made, evaluated, and accepted by the Geotechnical Consultant prior to placement of materials for construction of the fill portion of the slope, unless otherwise recommended by the Geotechnical Consultant. 3030.1094 Leighton Consulting, Inc. GENERAL EARTHWORK AND GRADING SPECIFICATIONS Page 6 of 6 7.0 Trench Backfills 7.1 The Contractor shall follow all OHSA and Cal/OSHA requirements for safety of trench excavations. 7.2 All bedding and backfill of utility trenches shall be done in accordance with the applicable provisions of Standard Specifications of Public Works Construction. Bedding material shall have a Sand Equivalent greater than 30 (SE>30). The bedding shall be placed to 1 foot over the top of the conduit and densified by jetting. Backfill shall be placed and densified to a minimum of 90 percent of maximum from 1 foot above the top of the conduit to the surface. 7.3 The jetting of the bedding around the conduits shall be observed by the Geotechnical Consultant. 7.4 The Geotechnical Consultant shall test the trench backfill for relative compaction. At least one test should be made for every 300 feet of trench and 2 feet of fill. 7.5 Lift thickness of trench backfill shall not exceed those allowed in the Standard Specifications of Public Works Construction unless the Contractor can demonstrate to the Geotechnical Consultant that the fill lift can be compacted to the minimum relative compaction by his alternative equipment and method. 3030.1094 FILL SLOPE PROJECTED PLANE 1 TO 1 MAXIMUM FROM TOE OF SLOPE TO APPROVED GROUND EXISTING GROUND SURFACE REMOVE UNSUITABLE MATERIAL 2' MIN.—' KEY DEPTH LOWEST BENCH (KEY) FILL-OVER-CUT SLOPE EXISTING GROUND SURFACE BENCH HEIGHT (4' TYPICAL) REMOVE UNSUITABLE MATERIAL CUT-OVER-FILL SLOPE -CUT FACE SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED PRIOR TO FILL PLACEMENT TO ASSURE ADEQUATE GEOLOGIC CONDITIONS EXISTING- GROUND SURFACE OVERBUILD AND TRIM BACK PROJECTED PLANE 1 TO 1 MAXIMUM FROM TOE OF SLOPE TO APPROVED GROUND 2' MIN KEY DEPTH UT FACE SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED PRIOR TO FILL PLACEMENT REMOVE UNSUITABLE MATERIAL BENCH HEIGHT (4' TYPICAL) FOR SUBDRAINS SEE STANDARD DETAIL C LOWEST BENCH (KEY) BENCHING SHALL BE DONE WHEN SLOPE'S ANGLE IS EQUAL TO OR GREATER THAN 5:1. MINIMUM BENCH HEIGHT SHALL BE 4 FEET AND MINIMUM FILL WIDTH SHALL BE 9 FEET. KEYING AND BENCHING GENERAL EARTHWORK AND GRADING SPECIFICATIONS STANDARD DETAILS A FINISH GRADE SLOPE FACE * OVERSIZE' ROCK IS LARGER THAN 8 INCHES IN LARGEST DIMENSION. * EXCAVATE A TRENCH IN THE COMPACTED FILL DEEP ENOUGH TO BURY ALL THE ROCK. * BACKFILL WITH GRANULAR SOIL JETTED OR FLOODED IN PLACE TO FILL ALL THE VOIDS. * DO NOT BURY ROCK WITHIN 10 FEET OF FINISH GRADE. * WINDROW OF BURIED ROCK SHALL BE PARALLEL TO THE FINISHED SLOPE. GRANULAR MATERIAL TO BE' DENSIFIED IN PLACE BY FLOODING OR JETTING. "-JETTED OR FLOODED GRANULAR MATERIAL TYPICAL PROFILE ALONG WINDROW OVERSIZE ROCK DISPOSAL GENERAL EARTHWORK AND GRADING SPECIFICATIONS STANDARD DETAILS B -EXISTING GROUND SURFACE BENCHING . stT-~-~-' REMOVE UNSUITABLE MATERIAL SUBDRAIN TRENCH SEE DETAIL BELOW CALTRANS CLASS 2 PERMEABLE OR #2 ROCK (9FT~3/FT) WRAPPED IN FILTER FABRIC FILTER FABRIC (MIRAFI 140N OR APPROVED <L EQUIVALENT)* 6" MIN. COVER =-^£ie5y 4" MIN. BEDDING COLLECTOR PIPE SHALL BE MINIMUM 6" DIAMETER SCHEDULE 40 PVC PERFORATED PIPE. SEE STANDARD DETAIL D FOR PIPE SPECIFICATIONS SUBDRAIN DETAIL DESIGN FINISH GRADE NONPERFORATED 6"0 MIN. PERFORATED 6" 0MIN. PIPE ILTER FABRIC (MIRAFI 140N OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT) CALTRANS CLASS 2 PERMEABLE OR #2 ROCK (9FT~3/FT) WRAPPED IN FILTER FABRIC DETAIL OF CANYON SUBDRAIN OUTLET CANYON SUBDRAINS GENERAL EARTHWORK AND GRADING SPECIFICATIONS STANDARD DETAILS C 15' MIN. OUTLET PIPES 4" 0 NONPERFORATED PIPE. 100' MAX. O.C. HORIZONTALLY, 30' MAX O.C. VERTICALLY BACK CUT 1:1 OR FLATTER •SEE SUBDRAIN TRENCH DETAIL LOWEST SUBDRAIN SHOULD BE SITUATED AS LOW AS POSSIBLE TO ALLOW SUITABLE OUTLET -KEY DEPTH (2' MIN.) KEY WIDTH AS NOTED ON GRADING PLANS (15' MIN.)12" MIN. OVERLAP — FROM THE TOP HOG RING TIED EVERY 6 FEET CALTRANS CLASS II PERMEABLE OR #2 ROCK (3 FT"3/FT) WRAPPED IN FILTER FABRIC -4" 0 NON-PERFORATED OUTLET PIPE PROVIDE POSITIVE SEAL AT THE JOINT T-CONNECTION FOR COLLECTOR PIPE TO OUTLET PIPE 6" MIN. COVER m | PERFORATED. *" \ PIPE FILTER FABRIC ENVELOPE (MIRAFI 140 OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT) -4" MIN. BEDDING SUBDRAIN TRENCH DETAIL SUBDRAIN INSTALLATION - subdroin collector pipe shall be installed with perforation down or, unless otherwise designated by the geotechnical consultant. Outlet pipes shall be non-perforated pipe. The subdrain pipe shall have at least 8 perforations uniformly spaced per foot. Perforation shall be 1/4" to 1/2" if drill holes are used. All subdrain pipes shall have a gradient of at least 2% towards the outlet. SUBDRAIN PIPE - Subdrain pipe shall be ASTM 02751, SDR 23.5 or ASTM D1527. Schedule 40, or ASTM D3034, SDR 23.5. Schedule 40 Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic (PVC) pipe. All outlet pipe shall be placed in a trench no wide than twice the subdrain pipe. Pipe shall be in soil of SE >/=30 jetted or flooded in place except for the outside 5 feet which shall be native soil backfill. BUTTRESS OR REPLACEMENT FILL SUBDRAINS GENERAL EARTHWORK AND GRADING SPECIFICATIONS STANDARD DETAILS D SOIL BACKFILL. COMPACTED TO 90 PERCENT RELATIVE COMPACTION BASED ON ASTM D1557 RETAINING WALL-^^ VALL WATERPROOFING -— ^^ '£R ARCHITECT'S ^~~^\ SPECIFICATIONS \ FINISH GRADE — -^ } -:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-COMPACTED FILL"---:-:-:-:-:-:- X m^mmm rr-~rn 6" MIN. ' OVERLAP 0 ' °' ' ' o01 MIN. ~0 ' °- -°^Jo . •• •'• *Y AYr(JA^ -:-:-: a 2 -^? _ — _ _ W^ W^ ^^L__ TYP .:-:-:-;-:-- FILTER FABRIC ENVELOPE "^"(MIRAFI 140N OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT)" T /A" Tn 1 1 /9" PI FAW PR A ^—4" (MIN.) DIAMETER PERFORM PVC PIPE (SCHEDULE 40 OR EQUIVALENT) WITH PERFORA1 ORIENTED DOWN AS DEPICTE MINIMUM 1 PERCENT GRADIEf- TO SUITABLE OUTLET — 3" MIN. WALL FOOTING COMPETENT BEDROCK OR MATERIAL AS EVALUATED BY THE GEOTECHNICAL CONSULTANT NOTE: UPON REVIEW BY THE GEOTECHNICAL CONSULTANT. COMPOSITE DRAINAGE PRODUCTS SUCH AS MIRADRAIN OR J-DRAIN MAY BE USED AS AN ALTERNATIVE TO GRAVEL OR CLASS 2 PERMEABLE MATERIAL. INSTALLATION SHOULD BE PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS. RETAINING WALL DRAINAGE DETAIL GENERAL EARTHWORK AND GRADING SPECIFICATIONS STANDARD DETAILS E WORpiFORCE AND COMPANY DATA { SYSTEMS DIVISION ) (RIVERSIDE OFFICE)ALSO OFFICESIFTBURBANK, TUSTJN.SAN DIEGO SAN FRANCISCO, RENO AND MOST MAJOR CITIES m uzak [AUDIO - VIDEO - STAGE LIGHTING - SYSTEM INTEGRATION - NETWORK INFRASTRUCTURE Rh/ERSfDE 1608 PALMYRJTAAVE. RIVERSJDE, CA 92507 800-331-3340 x26090 SO. CALIFORNIA (SYSTEMS) MANAGEMENT TEAM SYSTEM DIVISION MANAGER DARYU BALLOU ELECTRtCAL CONTRACTORS LICENSEE C-10 AMX ACE CERTIFJED - SYSTEM CONTROL- INTEGRATION MEDIA MATRIX; SOUND WEB CERTIFIED CADP2 / EASE COMPUTER MODELING AUTOCAD IT NETWORKS SENIOR PROJECT MANAGER CHUCK HERRQK YEARS IN AUDIOWIDEO/CONTROL BUSINESS AMX CERTIFIED MEDIA NfATRJX / SOUNDWEB IT NETWORKS PROJECT DESfGN AND PROGRAMMING MARK HERRON YEARS fW AUDIOA/IDEO/CONTROL BUSINESS MEDIA MATRIX / SOUND WES CERTIFIED AMX AND CRESTRON CERTIFIED JT NETWORKS PROJECT TECHNICIAN SILL NINE A/V SYSTEMS CERTIFIED IT NETWORKS LOGISTICS MANAGER LAURA TYAU OFFICE MANAGER YRS 35 /SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA INSTALLATION AND SERVICE DEPARTMENT NUMBER OF EMPLOYEES (SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA) NUMBER OF SERVICE TECHNICIANS LOCALLY FULLY EQUIPPED SERVICE TRUCKS RESPONSE TIME DAY NIGHT EMERGENCY 84 RIVERSIDE 24 28 2 HOURS NEXT MORNING ASAP 12 CERTIFIED DEALERS FOR 19 AMX FSR CROWN TAMNOY MEYER SOUND EXTRON SHURE TANDBERG DEMON BSS-SOUNO WEB MEDIA MATRIX YAMAHA AUDIO TECHNICA EAW DrGJTAL PROJECTION CHRISTIE PROJECTION AUTO PATCH ETC UGHTING LEPRECON SENNHEFSER BOSE LAB GRUPPEN MACKIE MIDAS PROGRAMMING USER SUPPORT BACKUP EQUIPMENT 37 CRESTRON JBL EXTRON SOUNDCRAFT PANASONIC QSC TANNOY DALITE AflARTIN LtGHT VARI-LITE L ACOUSTfCS JVC ANPMOSTPROFESSiONAL BRANDS MOST DSP AND CONTROL SYSTEM PLATFORMS Extron CERTIFiED»— ALL TECHNICIANS. ON THE NEXTEL OR BLACKBERRY SYSTEM IN STOCK CONTACT US AT 1-800-350-0551 EXT, 26090 1-800-331-3340 1-951-453-1607 CELL CONTRACTORS LfC # C-10 - C-7 771051 10 NOTE: WE HAVE ADDITIONAL TRAINED PERSONNEL WTTH THB ABOVE QUALIFICATIONS IN OFFICES NATION WIDE Citv of Carlsbad Public Works - Contract Administration March 1,2010 ADDENDUM NO. 1 RE: JOINT FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY, PWS10-31UTIL Please include this addendum in the Request for Bid package you have for the above project. This page—receipt acknowledged—must be attached to your bid when it is submitted. :EVIN L/TJAVIS Sr. Contract Administrator I ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF ADDENDUM NO. 1 Signature 1635 Faraday Avenue • Carlsbad, CA 92008-7314 • (760) 6O2-4677 • FAX (760) 6O2-8562 ADDENDUM NO. 1 CARLSBAD JOINT FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY CONTRACT NO. 3686 PRE-BID MEETING A pre-bid meeting was held on February 18, 2010. A copy of the sign-in sheets is attached. SPECIFICATIONS 1. Page 26. GUIDE FOR COMPLETING THE "DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTORS" FORM. In the second paragraph titled "CAUTIONS" delete the third sentence containing the following words: "Any bid that proposes performance of more than 50 percent of the work by subcontractors or otherwise to be performed by forces other than the Bidder's own organization will be rejected as non- responsive." 2. Page 36. CONTRACT PUBLIC WORKS, "9. Insurance". Add the following to Part (A) Coverages And Limits: "d. Course of Construction/Builder's Risk Insurance: The insurance shall cover the completed value of the project covering all risks of loss and with no coinsurance penalty provisions. It is the contractor's responsibility to make sure the coverage is adequate. The Course of Construction/Builder's Risk policy shall contain, or be endorsed to contain the following: • The City of Carlsbad shall be named as loss payee. • The insurer shall waive all rights of subrogation against the City of Carlsbad." 3. Page 58. GENERAL PROVISIONS. Section 2-3.2 Additional Responsibility. Delete all wording in Section 2-3.2 Additional Responsibility and insert the following: "2-3.2 Additional Responsibility. The Contractor shall give personal attention to the fulfillment of the Contract and shall keep the Work under its control. The Contractor shall perform, with its own organization, Contract work amounting to at least 25 percent of the Contract Price except that any designated "Specialty Items" may be performed by subcontract, and the amount of any such "Specialty Items" so performed may be deducted from the Contract Price before computing the amount required to be performed by the Contractor with its own organization. "Specialty Items" will be identified by the Agency in the Bid or Proposal. Where an entire item is subcontracted, the value of work subcontracted will be based on the Contract Unit Price. When a portion of an item is subcontracted, the value of work subcontracted will be based on the estimated percentage of the Contract Unit Price. This will be determined from information submitted by the Contractor, and subject to approval by the Engineer. For the purposes of this contract, the City of Carlsbad designates the following items as "specialty items": grading, drainage, erosion control, utilities, landscaping, irrigation system, fencing of any kind, concrete work of any kind, foundations, waterproofing, structural steel and wood manufacture and erection, rough and finish carpentry and plastics, masonry, roofing, mechanical/electrical/plumbing systems and equipment, signage, interior and exterior rough-in and finishes, doors and windows, lighting, appliance manufacture and installation, furnishing and installation of carpet and wall treatments, shooting range equipment, electrical panel fire simulator, smoke distribution system, and concrete paving. Before the work of any Subcontractor is started, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval a written statement showing the work to be subcontracted giving the name and business of each Subcontractor and description and value of each portion of the work to be so subcontracted. 4. Page 98. GENERAL PROVISIONS. Section 7-9 PROTECTION AND RESTORATION OF EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS. Add the following: FENCING Contractor shall provide 6'-0" foot (2.438 m) high fence around construction site; equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates with locks. SECURITY Contractor shall provide security and facilities to protect Work, and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. 5. Page 95. GENERAL PROVISIONS. Section 7-5 PERMITS. The Building Permit for buildings have already been reviewed and approved through the City's Building Department. There is no cost for the Building Permit; however, the Contractor will need to obtain a City of Carlsbad Business License, and provide proof of workers compensation insurance to obtain the building permit. The Building Permit will be issued to the Contractor who is awarded the contract for the Carlsbad Joint First Responder Training Facility. There are no permit costs for night work, overload, blasting, and demolition. 6. Page 108. GENERAL PROVISIONS. Section 8-1 GENERAL. There are no offsite plant facility Class A field offices required for the project. 7. Section 01210 ALLOWANCE FOR BLASTING. In Part 1.03A ALLOWANCES SCHEDULE after the words "...the lump sum amount", delete the words "Bid Item No. A-10" and insert the words "Bid Item No. A-14". The allowance for blasting in the amount of $25,000 shall be included in Bid Item No. A-14. 8. Section 02372. STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION. After Part 1.4C add the following: "Part 1.4 D. ALLOWANCES FOR COMPLYING WITH CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES STORM WATER GENERAL PERMIT. A. On July 1, 2010, the State Water Resources Control Board's "General Construction Permit" takes effect. A construction activity resulting in a land disturbance of one acre or more must obtain a Construction Activities Storm Water General Permit (2009-0009-DWQ Permit). A construction activity includes clearing, grading, excavation, stockpiling, and reconstruction of existing facilities involving removal and replacement. After July 1, 2010 all SWPPPs and SWPPP updates entered into the SMARTS system must be certified by an individual holding one of the certifications/registrations listed in Section VII of the 2009-0009-DWQ Permit. Effective two years after the permit adoption (September 2, 2011), the QSD must have also attended the State Water Resources Control Board sponsored or approved QSD Training Course. The Joint First Responder Training Facility, after July 1, 2010, will be a Risk Level 1 in accordance with 2009-0009-DWQ Permit; however, the State Water Resources Control Board can change the risk level. At a minimum Risk Level 1 requires the Contractor to perform the following: • Cover stockpiled materials not actively being used • Store all chemicals under cover (watertight) • Cover waste containers at the end of each day and before rain • Make concrete washouts watertight • BMP's must prevent trackout • Discontinue application of any erodible landscape material within 2 days before a forecasted rain • Street washing is effectively prohibited • Soil cover required for inactive areas (14 days) • Sediment basins must be designed to CASQA standards. • Contractor shall evaluate the quantity and quality of run-on and runoff through observation and sampling. • Contractor shall effectively manage all run-on, all runoff within the site, and all runoff that discharges off the site. • Run-on from all off-site areas shall be directed away from all disturbed areas or shall collectively be in compliance with the effluent limitations in the 2009-0009-DWQ Permit. • All inspection and repair must be done by a QSP, each formally documented. • The site shall be Inspected weekly (using a checklist), and also perform before and after inspections during rain events • Contractor has 72 hours to effect repairs • Non-storm water inspection reports are required Quarterly. The Contractor shall comply with all requirements in the 2009-0009-DWQ Permit effective July 1, 2010. B. Cash Allowances a. Contractor Responsibilities: i. Arrange for and process permits, applications, SWPPP's and SWPPP updates, and drawings as required, ii. Include within the lump sum of Bid Item No. A-9 an allowance in the amount of thirty thousand dollars ($30,000) to cover costs for compliance with requirements in 2009- 0009-DWQ Permit. 9. Section 02835. GATE OPERATORS A. Section 2.03 has been renamed "Electronic Gate Controller System" and a new section of information has been added to call out the appropriate entrance system and all supporting equipment. This has subsequently changed all other items to be the next number in their numerical sequence (i.e. 2.03 is now 2.04, 2.04 is now 2.05, etc.). 10. Section 04085. MASONRY ANCHORS AND ACCESSORIES This section has been added to the specifications. 11 .Section 05120. STRUCTURAL STEEL. Reference is made to Subsection 1.4A QUALIFICATIONS. Revise the second sentence to read as follows: "The City of Carlsbad shall approve the Structural Steel Fabricator." The City of Carlsbad recognizes Licensed Fabricators approved by other cities. Typically we accept City of San Diego's certified list or City of Los Angeles certified list. 12. Section 05505. METAL FABRICATIONS The title of Section 05505 has been renamed "Range Metal Fabrications". 13.Section 08110. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES Item #4 was added to section 2.03.A and it calls for a weather-tight top, 16 gauge steel channel, flush with the top of the door the full width of the door. 14.Section 09305. MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING AT TILE INSTALLATION LOCATIONS This section has been added to the specifications. 15. Section 10400. IDENTIFICATION DEVICES Section 2.01.D.1.2 has been updated to reference that the 24" high lettering for the building should be "5750" and not "2560". 16. Section 11890. SHOOTING RANGE EQUIPMENT A. The following manufacturers are acceptable manufacturers of the specified shooting range products: • Bullet Traps 1. Range Systems 2. Action Target 3. Super Trap • Baffle System 1. Range Systems 2. Action Target 3. Super Trap • Target Systems 1. Action Target 2. Meggitt Training Systems B. The acceptance of the listed manufacturer does not assume acceptance of a particular competitive product, nor increase or decrease the standard of quality and performance set forth in the project specifications. The Basis of Design and performance of applicable range equipment are specified within the appropriate project specifications, and shall serve as the minimum standard. 17. Section 16710. VOICE/DATA SYSTEMS. Delete Section 16710, VOICE /DATA SYSTEMS from the Technical Specifications. Contractor shall refer to Section 16750 DATA /COMMUNICATION CABLING SYSTEM 18. Section 16721. FIRE ALARM A. Section 1.04.C has been modified to remove the first two (2) sentences of the paragraph. B. Section 2.01 has been renamed "Acceptable Installers" and a new section of information has been added to call out a single source approved installer. This has subsequently changed all other items to be the next number in their numerical sequence (i.e. 2.01 is now 2.02, 2.02 is now 2.03, etc.). 19.Section 16725. CAMPUS SECURITY SYSTEM A. Section 1.02.A has been updated to reference that the single source approved installer must propose any substitutions. B. Section 1.02.C has removed qualification items #1 and #2. Previous item #3 is now referred to as item #1. C. Section 2.01 .A has been updated to reference that the single source approved installer must propose any substitutions. CONSTRUCTION PLANS 1. Sheet C-6 A. In accordance with attached exhibit AD01-C-1, extend the retaining wall footprint to allow for electrical equipment on concrete pad area. This added an additional 150 sq. ft. of masonry retaining wall and 150 sq. ft. of 4" P.C.C. pad. B. Attached Exhibits AD01-C-2 and AD01-C-3 are for reference to show the necessary clearance for the electrical conduit underneath the retaining wall. There are no changes to the plans regarding these exhibits. C. The site contains an existing irrigation system, chain link fencing, and backstop for baseball, metal bleachers and dugout benches. The City will remove the metal bleachers and dugout benches prior to start of work. The Contractor shall be responsible for removal and disposal of all other existing site improvements. 2. Sheet A-1.1 A. Revise plans in accordance with attached exhibit AD01-A-01, the retaining wall surrounding the backflow preventers and electrical transformer was enlarged to include the main electrical switch gear equipment and all necessary clearances. 3. Sheet A-S-2.1 A. Revise plans in accordance with attached exhibit AD01-A-02, door #27 has been widened from 3'-0" to 4'-0" in order to provide a proper opening for the installation of the electrical equipment in Room 123. 4. Sheet A-S-2.4 A. Revise plans in accordance with attached exhibit AD01-A-03, the dimension to the centerline of door #27 has been modified to accommodate its' larger size. 5. Sheet A-S-3.1 A. Revise plans in accordance with attached exhibit AD01-A-04, the opening for door #27 was widened to coordinate with the floor plan and dimension plan. 6 Sheet A-S-5.2 A. Revise plans in accordance with attached exhibit AD01-A-05, the address number for the project was changed to "5750" instead of "2560". 7. Sheet A-S-8.1 A. Revise plans in accordance with attached exhibit AD01-A-06, the door schedule has been updated to show that the width of door #27 has been enlarged from 3'-0" to 4'-0". 8. Sheet E-0.7 A. AD01-E-01: Revised MSB-1 and MSB-6 feeder's load designation from "FA" to "AB" and "HVAC1" to "MCC", respectively. B. AD01-E-02: Revised power panel designation from "FA" to "AB"; added disconnect switch for Transformer "T3" and reflect power connection for Panel "C" via UPS. 9. Sheet E-0.21 A. AD01-E-03: Revised panel "RECEP" schedule to reflect changes for branch circuits 2/4 and 37/39/41 loads and breaker ratings. B. AD01-E04: Added panel "C" schedule. 1Q.SheetE-1.2 A. AD01-E-05: Relocated main switchboard "MSB" outside to meet SDG&E requirements. B. AD01-E06: Revised key notes to conform with feeder re-routing due to "MSB" relocation. 11. Sheet E-S-3.1 A. AD01-E-07: Revised tele/data room #107 receptacles and "FC/S1-1" branch circuit connections and homeruns to panel. B. AD01-E08: Revised electrical room #123 equipment layout to reflect deletion of "MSB", addition of "T3" disconnect switch and relocation of main FACP and terminal cabinet. 12. Sheets E-S-4.1 and E-S-4.3. Add data ports and wireless AP at the locations shown on attached sketches SK-1 and SK-2. 13. Sheet E-S-6.1 A. AD01-E-09:. Revised "CU/S1-1" homerun, disconnect switch rating and related power supply connection to "FC/S1-1". 14. Sheet M-0.2 A. AD01-M-01: Revised the Split System Schedule. Changed the Mitsubishi 1 ton unit to a 2 ton unit. 15. Sheet M-S-2.1 A. AD01-M-02: Dimension of Fan Coil FC-S1-1 was increased. 16. Sheet M-S-4.1 A. AD01-M-03: Dimension of Condensing Unit CU-S1-1 was increased as well as platform. 17. Sheet M-6.1 A. AD01-M-04: Revised Fan Coil Unit Control Wiring Diagram 3. Voltage of unit was changed from 115V to 208V. 18.SheetL-1.2 A. Revise plans in accordance with exhibit AD01-L-01, the irrigation layout around the CMU block wall has been revised. The contractor shall shift the planting accordingly to adjust for revised location of CMU block wall. Trees in this area shall be located to match revised locations of tree bubbles. PRE-BID MEETING FOR JOINT FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY SIGN-IN SHEET NAME FIRM/COMPANY PHONE or EMAIL PRE-BID MEETING FOR JOINT FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY SIGN-IN SHEET NAME FIRM/COMPANY PHONE or EMAIL 760 9 \f 10 1, 6f\ oSxk ^ niq 'ct" 11 f^KJOY A^Oe^ PCL cc>7v5T, 51*7 13 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 ir "' SECTION 02835 GATE OPERATORS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pre-wired gate operator for swing gates, including all attachments and mounting brackets with associated high and low keypad/ card reader/ safety devices and loops. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02820 - Ornamental Steel Gates B. Section 03300 - Cast in place concrete C. Section 16010 - General Electrical Requirement 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide material specifications, manufacturer's installation and maintenance instructions. C. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings showing connections to adjacent construction, range of travel, and all electrical and mechanical connections to the operator. All underground runs of electrical and hydraulic lines shall be indicated on drawings. Drawings shall also show the size and location of the concrete mounting pad. D. Installation instructions: Submit two copies of manufacturer's installation instructions for this specific project. E. Submit manufacturer's completed warranty registration form to Project Manager. F. Project list: Submit list of product installations comparable to the subject job. Include date of product installation, installer, and owner's name and location of the project. G. Test reports: 1. Submit affidavits from the manufacturer demonstrating that the gate mechanism has been tested to 200,000 cycles without breakdown. 2. Each operator shall bear a label indication that the operator mechanism has been tested. Operators are tested for full power and pressure of all hydraulics, full stress tests of all mechanical components and electrical tests of all overload devices. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: A company specializing in the manufacture of security gate operators of the type specified, with a minimum of ten years experience. B. Installer: A minimum of three years experience installing similar equipment, provide proof of attending factory technical training within previous three years, or obtain other significant manufacturer endorsement of technical aptitude, if required, during the submittal process. C. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.05 WARRANTY A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide a five (5) year warranty against all defects in materials or workmanship. Defective materials shall be replaced with comparable materials furnished by the manufacturer, at no cost Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility GATE OPERATORS Specifications 02835 -1 to the owner. Freight, labor and other incidental costs are not covered under the factory warranty, but may be covered by a separate service agreement between installing company and the owner. I. To ensure validation of warranty, return completed warranty registration form (included in Installation and Reference manual) to manufacturer. C. Train Owner in the general maintenance of the gate operator and accessories and provide one copy of 'Operations and Maintenance1 manual for use by the Owner. Manuals will identify parts of the equipment for future procurement. 1.06 CODES AND REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Operators shall be built to UL 325 standards and be listed by a testing laboratory. Complete all electrical work according to local codes and National Electrical code. All fieldwork shall be performed in a neat and professional manner, completed to journeyman standards. B. Current safety standards require gate operators to be designed and labeled for specific usage classes. C. Current safety standards require the use of multiple external sensors to be capable of reversing the gate in either direction upon sensing an obstruction. See also 2.02 E D. Current safety standards require gate operators to be designed and labeled for specific usage classes. HySecurity SwingSmart DC20 models are listed for use in all UL 325 Usage Classes: I, II, III, and IV. 1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Comply with 01600. B. Store products upright in the original shipping containers, covered, ventilated and protected from all weather conditions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. All selected materials listed in this section are based on the products of HySecurity, 6623 S. 228th St., Kent, Washington (800) 321.9947 (www.hysecurity.com). B. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.02 HYDRAULIC GATE OPERATOR A. HySecurity gate operator models SwingSmart DC20 with Smart Touch Controller, or other comparable operator, as approved by the architect. Requests for substitution will include the amount of savings to be passed on to the owner. B. Gates are opened and closed by an articulating arm mechanism. Once prompted via sensor, transmitter or according to pre-programmed commands, the articulating arms physically swings the gate from 0-90 degrees. When closing, the action of the articulating arm causes the gate to be mechanically locked in place without the use of externally operated electric or mechanical locks. Opening and closing cycle times vary from 10-15 seconds, depending on the gate size and weight. (Note: degree of swing is built in at the factory and cannot be changed in the field.) C. Schedule of Capacities: 1. Model: SwingSmart DC20: Gates up to 20' wide each leaf and weight up to 1,300 pounds each leaf and 10-15 seconds to open/close. D. Standard mechanical components shall include as a minimum: 1. 2-piece clam shell operator cover made of molded low density polyethylene and including a locking toggle action latch, a. Color: Fade-resistant gray flame spray finish. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility GATE OPERATORS Specifications 02835 - 2 2. Operator Chassis: a. Constructed of %" thick heavy duty, corrosion resistant welded steel b. Zinc plated finish. c. Include carrying handles and an extra large conduit cutout. 3. Articulating Arm: a. Constructed of %" thick heavy duty, corrosion resistant welded steel b. Zinc plated finish. c. Include cover for pinch protection that is connected to the gate bracket with a forgivable swivel. 4. Electronic circuit boards are conformal coated for moisture resistance. 5. Easily adjustable limit switches travel in either direction. E. Minimum standard electrical components: Industrial grade. 1. Vz hp brushed DC motor with ball bearings. 2. 250 VA dual voltage transformer. 3. Accessory Power: 12 to 24 volts DC + 24 volts AC 4. Outside-accessible reset switch. 5. External photo eye and gate edge sensors. 6. Smart DC Controller Board, with features including: a. 512K memory. b. Inherent entrapment sensor. c. "Warn before operate" system. d. 2-line 32 character LCD display for function monitoring and reporting. e. Built-in timer to close signals the operator to close the gate after a prescribed interval. f. 24 programmable output relay options with easy to use control board programming buttons. g. Anti-tailgate mode. h. Built-in heavy duty power surge protection. i. Microprocessor controlled multi-stage intelligent battery control. j. RS232 and USB port for laptop or other computer peripheral connection and RS485 connection for Master/Slave systems, k. 110 Amp rated solid state switching devices for pulse width modulated motor control. F. Accessories: 1. Safety: a. Hy-5A Vehicle Detector b. Pinch protection arm c. Gate edge sensor d. Photoelectric eye e. Extended battery backup 2. Convenience: a. Radio controls - wireless transmitters b. Ethernet peripheral connection 3. Access: a. Card reader b. Keypad c. Knox switch G. Gate control stanchion design is based off the products of Paragon Metal Products (818) 882.1638 as a standard of quality. Substitutions shall be considered under the provisions of specification Section 01600. 1. High and Low Mounted: Model #S3S41272/35, 72" and 35" high from the top of footing to the centerline of housing. 2. Housing: Model #H-5-5-5-SM-WPC or compatible model to accommodate all operating features. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility GATE OPERATORS Specifications 02835 - 3 2.03 ELECTRONIC GATE CONTROLLER SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: All selected materials listed in this section are based on the products of Elite Access Systems as a standard of quality. Substitutions shall be considered under the provisions of Section 01030. 1. Electronic Access Control: "ICON 26 HT 250" Telephone Entry System. Refer to architectural site plan for locations. a. 10-inch LCD Extreme heat tolerant Display b. Programmable Keypad and telephone interface C. Card Reader Input: Card Reader by others. d. Pass-code capability. e. Remote activation capability f. Capacity: 250 names 2. Knox Box: Series #3200 mounted on pedestal at main entry gate only. 3. Relays: Number and type as recommended by the manufacturer and required for a complete system 4. NEMA Rated Enclosure: Provide weatherproof, watertight, lighted securable cabinet to place and protect all equipment with the exception of the Optical Detector. 2.04 OTHER MATERIALS A. All other materials, anchorages, and controls not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation of fencing, gate and operator systems, as recommended by the manufacturer, subject to the approval of the Architect. 2.05 FACTORY TESTING A. Fully assemble and test, at the factory, each gate operator to assure smooth operation, sequencing and electrical connection integrity. Tested to maximum pressure to simulate physical and electrical loads equal to the fully rated capacity of the operator components. B. Check all mechanical connections for tightness and alignment. Check all welds for completeness and continuity. C. Inspect painted finish for completeness. Touch up any imperfections prior to shipment. D. Check all hydraulic hoses and electrical wires to assure that chafing cannot occur during shipping or operation. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 SITE EXAMINATION A. Inspection 1. Prior to installation of the work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 2. Verify that fencing, gates and operator systems may be installed in accordance with the approved design. B. Discrepancies 1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. C. Locate concrete mounting pad in accordance with approved shop drawings. D. Make sure that supporting posts or pilasters are adequate to support the gate and operator. Do not proceed with installation if supports are inadequate. IMPORTANT: The SwingSmart DC20 operator post assembly provides rotational forces to the swing gate only, and is not intended to provide support against the "tip over" forces Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility GATE OPERATORS Specifications 02835 - 4 imposed by the swinging gate panel. A backing post or structural pilaster is required to assure that the only forces being applied to the operator base are vertical. Typically the backing post will be a 6 5/8" post or larger, set in a substantial foundation or structural element included in a wall or pilaster which is sufficient to resist the rotational loads generated. It is advised that a qualified engineer review the plans prior to commencing. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for installation preparations. Furnish setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorage, such as steel column, welded angle, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, which are to be embedded in concrete construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to the project site. B. Gate operator preparation 1. Verify the gate is plumb and gate leaves move freely. 2. Perform any required maintenance before continuing. 3. Verify the commercial power circuit breaker is isolated and rated for the specific load. Visually ensure the circuit breaker is in the 'off position and maker the breaker used. 4. If any pre-construction wiring has been installed, visually inspect and confirm proper sizing and compliance to code. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Put the completed installation through not less than ten complete operating cycles, and adjust as required to achieve optimum smoothness and efficiency of operation. C. All anchor bolts shall be fully concealed in the finished installation. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operators and leaves for smooth operation. Make necessary adjustments and repeat testing until operators run in a smooth fashion. 3.05 CLEANING A. Upon completion of the work, remove surplus materials, rubbish and debris resulting from the fencing, gates and operator installation. Leave areas in neat, clean and orderly condition. 1. Repair or replace any damaged work. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility GATE OPERATORS Specifications 02835 - 5 SECTION 04085 - MASONRY ANCHORS AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Masonry veneer anchors and ties. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04200 - Concrete Masonry Units. B. Section 04816 - Masonry Veneer. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASCE/ACI 530.1 - Specifications for Masonry Structures; 1995. B. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 1998. C. ASTM A 580/A 580M - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Wire; 1998. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data on each type of product furnished. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Heckmann Building Products Inc., 1501 N. 31st Avenue MelrosePark, IL60160. Tel: (708) 865-2403 Fax: 708-865-2640 Email: info@heckmannanchors.com. Website: www.heckmannanchors.com. B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 APPLICATIONS A. Provide anchoring systems that comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility MASONRY ANCHORS AND ACCESSORIES 04085 -1 B. Masonry Anchors 1. Anchors to Concrete: No. 75: Heckmann "Pos-l-Tie®" Tapcon® Screw. 2. Anchors to Masonry Backup: No. 75: Heckmann "Pos-l-Tie®" Tapcon® Screw. 3. Anchors to Metal Stud Backup: No. 75: Heckmann "Pos-l-Tie®" Self-Drilling Screw. 4. Anchors to Structural Steel: No. 75: Heckmann "Pos-l-Tie®" Dril-lt® Screw. 5. Anchors to Wood Stud Backup: No. 75: Heckmann "Pos-l-Tie®" Tapcon® Screw. C. Masonry Ties 1. Masonry Veneer Seismic Ties: Continuous wire in mortar joint, anchored to Pos- l-Tie® Triangle Tie with welded No. 370 Seismic clip. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Material for Ties in Exterior Walls: Stainless steel, Type 304.. 1. Barrel Materials:Heckmann "No. 75 Pos-l-Tie€>": One-Piece Screw consisting of a 92% Zamac 2 Zinc barrel, washer, flanged head and eye to receive Pos-l-Tie® wire tie; designed to seat barrel directly on structural portion of backup, with flanged head covering fastener hole. Provide barrel shaft length and screws to suit substrate. Wire: 3/16 inch (4.76 mm) diameter ASTM A 580/A 580M. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Pos-l-Tie® Screws 1. Self-Drilling Screw: Use a standard drill with a variable clutch adjustment and a Pos-l-Tie® Chuck Adapter. Place the barrel end of the screw in the chuck adapter, drill through the gypsum board and into the metal stud. 2. Tapcon® Screw: Use a standard hammer drill and a Pos-l-Tie® Sleeve Tool with a Pos-l-Tie Chuck Adapter on the end. Set Drill to Hammer, slide off the chuck adapter sleeve and drill a 2" deep hole into the backup with a 3/16" (4.76 mm) masonry drillbit. Replace the sleeve/chuck adapter, switch the hammer mode off, and place the barrel end of the screw in the chuck adapter. Drill the screw into the hole. 3. Dril-lt® Screw: Use a standard drill with a variable clutch adjustment and a Pos-l- Tie® Chuck Adapter. Place the barrel end of the screw in the chuck adapter, and drill the screw into the structural member. (Some structural steel may require pre- drilling a pilot hole) B. Pos-l-Tie® Wires 1. Configure ties to prevent flow of water to anchor and to transfer lateral loads without excess mechanical play or deformation. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility MASONRY ANCHORS AND ACCESSORIES 04085 - 2 SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Section Includes: Provision of structural steel as indicated on the Contract Drawings. Work includes but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Structural steel framing, including all structural steel shown on the structural drawings and all standard shapes, plates and rods shown on the Architectural, Mechanical and Electrical drawings that connect to the building structure. 2. Elevator rail bracing. 3. Welded stud connectors for composite construction, concrete engagement, and attachment of building components. 4. Anchor rods. 5. Shop painting. 6. Bent plate deck closures. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement 2. Section 03300 - Concrete 3. Section 05310 - Steel Decking 4. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications 5. Section 05510-Metal Stairs 6. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings 7. Section 14210 - Elevators 1.2 REFERENCES A. Requirements of GENERAL CONDITIONS and DIVISION NO. 1 apply to all Work in this Section. B. Published specifications, standards, tests, or recommended methods of trade, industry, or governmental organizations apply to Work of this Section where cited by abbreviations noted below (latest editions apply). 1. California Building Code (CBC), 2007 Edition. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 3. American Institute of Steel Construction: a. "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005" (AISC 360). b. "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts, June 30,2004" (AISC 348). c. "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, March 18,2005" (AISC' 303). i. No provision of AISC 303 shall be effective to change the duties and responsibilities of the Owner, Contractor or Structural Engineer from those set forth in these Contract Documents, ii. Where discrepancies exist between the requirements of the Contract Documents and AISC 303, the requirements of the Contract Documents shall govern. d. "Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, Including Supplement Number 1, March 9, 2005" (AISC 341). Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Structural Steel Specifications 05120 -1 e. "Prequalif ied Connections for Special and Intermediate Moment Frames for Seismic Applications," December 13, 2005 (AISC 358). 4. American Welding Society's: a. "Structural Welding Code - Steel" (AWS D1.1), 2002. b. "Seismic Welding Supplement" (AWS D1.8), 2005. c. "Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing and Nondestructive Examination (AWS A2.4). d. Tiller Metal Specifications" (AWS A5). e. "Criteria for Describing Oxygen-Cut Surfaces and Oxygen Cutting Surface Roughness Gauge" (AWS C4.1). f. "Standard for AWS Certification of Welding Inspectors" (AWS QC1). 5. American National Standards Institute's: a. "Plain Washers" (ANSI B18.22.1). b. "Beveled Washers" (ANSI B18.22.1). 6. Society of Protective Coatings': a. Solvent Cleaning (SSPC-SP 1). b. Hand Tool Cleaning (SSPC-SP 2). c. Brush-Off Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP 7). 7. American Society of Non-Destructive Testing's: a. ASNT Standard for Qualification and Certification of Nondestructive Testing Personnel (ANSI/ASNT CP-189-2001). b. Personnel Qualification and Certification in Nondestructive Testing, 2001 (ASNT Recommended Practice No. SNT-TC-1A). 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Demand-Critical Welds: Demand-Critical Welds are designated on the structural drawings. All Demand-Critical Welds are part of the Seismic-Load-Resisting System. B. Extra Smooth: Surfaces noted herein as "Extra Smooth" require a finish with surface variation of 500 micro-inches or less (AWS C4.1-77, Sample #4). C. Gouge: any depression deeper than the overall surface roughness. D. Heavy Sections: Rolled and built-up sections as defined below. 1. ASTM A6 shapes with flanges thicker than 1 1/2". 2. Welded built-up members with plates exceeding 2" in thickness, 3. Column base plates exceeding 2" in thickness. E. Nondestructive Testing: Nondestructive testing (NOT) includes magnetic particle testing (MT), penetrant testing (PT), radiographic testing (RT), and ultrasonic testing (UT).The terms nondestructive examination (NDE) and nondestructive testing (NOT) are synonymous. F. Protected Zone: The Protected Zone is defined as structural members, or portions thereof, to which connections of structural and non-structural elements are limited. The Protected Zone is designated on the structural drawings. G. Quality Assurance Plan: The Quality Assurance Plan is set of the written requirements containing the set of procedures that are to be followed by the Owner's Testing Agency to confirm compliance with these requirements. H. Seismic-Load-Resisting System (SLRS): The Seismic-Load-Resisting System (SLRS) is defined as all items designated "SLRS" on the Structural Drawings, including columns, beams, and braces, and their connections along grid lines denoted "SLRS" on the framing plans. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Structural Steel Specifications 05120-2 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Steel Fabricator's Qualifications: Fabricator shall have had not less than 5 years' experience in fabrication of structural steel and be able to furnish evidence of his ability, facilities, proficiency of his personnel and completed projects. B. Steel Erector's Qualifications: Erector shall have had not less than 5 years' experience in erection of structural steel and be able to furnish evidence of his ability, facilities, proficiency of his personnel and completed projects. C. Welder Qualifications: Welders, welding operators, and tackers shall be qualified in accordance withAWSD1.1. 1. Welders shall have a valid Welding Performance Qualification Record (WPQR) for each welding procedure to be performed. 2. Welders whose work fails to pass inspection shall be requalified before performing further welding. 3. Supplemental Welding Personnel Testing: Welders and welding operators performing work on bottom-flange Demand-Critical Welds shall pass Supplemental Welder Qualification Testing, as required by AWS D1.8, Section 5.1. FCAW-S and FCAW-G shall be considered separate processes for welding personnel qualification 4. Qualification Period: Personnel who have not welded for a period of three or more months shall be requalified. Welding personnel required to be tested using the Supplemental Welding Personnel Testing shall be qualified by test within 12 months prior to beginning welding on the project. 5. The Contractor shall pay costs of certifying qualifications and requalifications. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Inspector Qualifications: 1. All Welding Inspectors shall be trained and thoroughly experienced in inspecting welding operations, and qualified as Certified Welding Inspectors (CWI) in accordance with AWS D1.1 andAWSQCL 2. NOT Personnel Qualifications a. NOT personnel shall be qualified under one of the ASNT documents referenced in this specification. NOT performed by NOT Level I personnel shall be under the close, direct supervision of an NOT Level II. b. Demand-Critical Welds: UT may be performed only by UT technicians certified as Level II by their employer, or as ASNT Level III certified by examination by the ASNT. Ultrasonic testing technicians who perform flaw detection or sizing shall be trained in applicable UT procedure and shall demonstrate their competence through testing as prescribed in AWS D1.8, Annex E. B. Bolting Inspector Qualifications: Competency shall be demonstrated through the administration of a written examination and through the hands-on demonstration by the Inspector of the methods to be used for bolt installation and inspection. C. Submittals: The Owner's Testing Agency will submit the following items: 1. Quality Assurance Plan: The Quality Assurance Plan shall contain the Quality Assurance and Inspection items contained in this Section. 2. Qualifications of Owner's Testing Agency management and personnel designated for the project. 3. Qualification records for Owner's Testing Agency's Inspectors and NOT technicians designated for the project. 4. Owner's Testing Agency's Quality Control Plan for the monitoring and control of the Agency's operations. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Structural Steel Specifications 05120-3 5. Written Practice for Owner's Testing Agencies: The Owner's Testing Agency shall maintain a Written Practice for the selection and administration of inspection personnel, describing the training, experience and examination requirements for qualification and certification of inspection personnel, including those of subcontracting agencies. The Written Practice shall also describe the Agency's procedures for determining the acceptability of the structure in accordance with the applicable codes, standards, and specifications. The Written Practice shall also describe the Agency's inspection procedures, including general inspection, material controls, visual welding inspection, and bolting inspection. a. Bolting Inspection Procedures: Comply with AISC 348 and the Quality Assurance Plan. b. Welding Inspection Procedures: Meet the requirements of the AWS D1.1 and the Quality Assurance Plan. c. Nondestructive Testing Procedures: The Written Practice shall describe the responsibility of each level of certification for determining the acceptability of material and welds in accordance with the applicable codes, standards, specifications and procedures. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. The following items shall be submitted to the Architect for review. One reproducible copy will be returned. Do not fabricate material prior to obtaining final review of submittals. 1. Manufacturer's test reports and literature describing products, including but not limited to the following, and excluding those listed in Section 1.66: a. Manufacturer's Certifications for electrodes, fluxes and shielding gasses to be used. Certifications shall satisfy AWS A5 requirements. In addition submit a Certificate of Compliance from the Contractor supplying the materials. Submit certifications that the product meets any additional requirements of the project. b. Manufacturer's product data sheets for all welding material to be used. The data sheets shall describe the product, limitations of use, recommended welding parameters, and storage and exposure requirements, including baking and rebaking. 2. Plans of all levels showing dimensioned location of edge of slab, deck, and openings. Submit prior to Shop and Erection drawings. 3. Shop and Erection Drawings. Prior to the start of fabrication and erection, submit detailed shop and erection drawings for all structural steel showing: a. Size and location of all structural members and connection material. b. Type, size and location of bolts and welds. c. Identification of high-strength bolted joints as snug-tight, pretensioned or slip-critical, as required by the Contract Documents. d. Locations where the Construction Documents require backing bars to be removed. e. Locations where the Construction Documents require supplemental fillet welds where backing is permitted to remain. f. Locations where the Construction Documents require weld tabs to be removed. g. Identification of members and connections of the Seismic-Load-Resisting System, h. Location and dimensions of the Protected Zone. i. Identification of welds in the Seismic-Load-Resisting System. j. Identification of Demand-Critical Welds. k. Shop and erection drawings shall clearly identify revisions and revision dates in accordance with AISC 303. I. Other items as required by AISC 303 or AISC 341, Section 5. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Structural Steel Specifications 05120 - 4 m. Shop drawings shall include the following additional information: i. Complete information necessary for the fabrication of members including cuts, copes, holes, doubler plates, stiffeners, and camber. Surface preparation and finishes, including both painting and grinding. Material grades of all members, connection material, fasteners, and weld filler metal. iv. Connection details drawn to scale for members of the Seismic-Load- Resisting System, v. With each set of shop drawings include corresponding erection plans or elevation drawings identifying pieces. n. Erection drawings shall include the following additional information: Identification mark of members. Orientation and relation of members to appropriate grid lines. Setting elevations for column bases, iv. Standard and special details for field connections, v. Identification of joints or groups of joints in which a specific assembly order, welding sequence, welding technique, or other special precautions are required. o. Samples: Material samples shall be provided as requested by the Structural Engineer or Owner's Testing Agency. B. The following items shall be submitted to the Architect and Owner's Testing Agency. Submittal to the Architect is for record purposes only, and will not be reviewed. No copies will be returned. 1. Manufacturer's test reports and literature describing products: a. Structural Steel: Material test reports (MTRs), also called mill test reports, for all structural steel. MTRs shall comply with the requirements of ASTM A6. MTRs shall be accompanied by a Certificate of Compliance from the fabricator. Structural steel shall be identified in accordance with CBC Section 2203. Submittal of mill test reports is required prior to start of steel fabrication. b. Fastening Material: Manufacturer's Certifications for fastener components, including bolts, nuts, washers, and direct tension indicators (if used), accompanied by a Certificate of Compliance from the Contractor. Manufacturer certifications shall contain: i. Heat analysis, heat number, and a statement certifying that prohibited elements were not added to produce the bolts, i'r. Results of hardness, tensile, and proof load tests, as required and performed, iii. If galvanized, measured zinc coating weight or thickness, and the results of rotational capacity tests, including test method used (solid plate or tension measuring device) and lubricant present, iv. Results of visual inspection for bursts. v. Statement of compliance with dimensional and thread fit requirements, vi. Lot number and purchase order number, vii. For A490 bolts, only the Production Lot Method of testing and certification is acceptable. Shipping Lot Method is not acceptable. c. Welded Stud Connectors: Submit the following items: i. Manufacturer's Certification that the studs, as supplied, meet the requirements of AWS D1.1. ii. Certified copies of the stud manufacturer's test reports covering the last completed set of in-plant quality control mechanical tests for the diameter supplied, iii. Certified material test reports from the steel supplier. The Manufacturer's Certification shall be accompanied by a Certificate of Compliance from the Contractor. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Structural Steel Specifications 05120 - 5 2. Bolting and Welding Procedures: Procedures shall assign responsibility to a person or position and shall contain enough detail to be useful to the workforce without reference to governing specifications. The procedures need not act as work instructions. Procedures shall be dated and indicate the person or position that has the authority to maintain the procedure. a. Fastener Installation Procedures: Submit written procedures for the pre-installation testing, installation, snugging, pre-tensioning, and post-installation inspection of high strength fasteners. b. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs): Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) shall conform to the requirements of AWS D1.1. Submit Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQR) as required by AWS D1.1, to be used on the project to the Owner's Testing Agency. c. Use forms provided in Annex E of AWS D1.1 or equivalent. d. Weld Sequence Procedures: Submit written procedures indicating field welding sequences for each type of connection with multiple field-welded joints, and the sequence of such connections to be field-welded at each level. e. Weld Shrinkage and Distortion Control Plan: Where shrinkage is likely to cause distortion or other problems, submit a mitigation plan. The contractor is responsible for determining conditions requiring a Weld Shrinkage and Distortion Control Plan. 3. Welding Performance Qualification Records (WPQRs): Written Welding Performance Qualification Records (WPQRs), in accordance with AWS D1.1, for all welders on the project. Submit documentation that the welder has passed all designated supplemental welder qualification testing required for the types of welding to be performed. Submit documentation showing that the welder continued to use the applicable welding process on an ongoing basis since the WPQR test was conducted. 1.7 STRUCTURAL STEEL PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE When requested by structural engineer and prior to performing any fabrication or erection work, the Owner's Representative, Architect, Structural Engineer, and Owner's Testing Agency, together with Steel Fabricator personnel and Steel Erector personnel supervising the shop, field and Quality Control work shall hold a Pre-construction Conference to review submittal requirements, welding procedures, bolting procedures, fabrication and erection issues, and inspection requirements for all structural steel operations. 1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. B. Structural steel shall be stored and handled in a manner that prevents damage or distortion. Discharge materials carefully; do not dump onto ground. C. Do not store materials on the structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to members of the supporting structure. D. Store structural steel members, whether on or off site, above ground on platforms, skids, or other support; store other materials in weather-tight, dry place until use. E. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. F. Electrode Requirements: 1. Packaging of weld filler metals shall conform to the requirements of AWS D.1.1. FCAW electrodes shall be received in undamaged moisture-resistant containers. They shall be protected against contamination and injury during shipment and storage. When removed from protective packaging and installed on machines, care shall be taken to protect the electrodes and coatings from deterioration or damage. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Structural Steel Specifications 05120-6 2. Modification or lubrication of an electrode after manufacture is not permitted, except that drying shall be permitted when recommended by the manufacturer. 3. Electrode Storage and Exposure Limits for Demand-Critical Welds: The exposure time limit for electrodes shall be in conformance with AWS D1.8 Section 6.4. G. Fasteners shall be stored in a protected place. Except for ASTM F1852 "twist-off type assemblies, clean and relubricate bolts, nuts and washers that become dry or rusty before use. F1852 fastener components may be relubricated following the manufacturer's written instructions, and must be retested after relubrication and prior to use to verify suitability for installation. 1.9 JOB CONDITIONS A. Provide the Owner's Testing Agency with free access to places on and off job site where materials are stored or fabricated, to places where equipment is stored or serviced, and to job site. B. Sequencing, Scheduling: 1. Notify the Architect and Owner's Testing Agency in sufficient time prior to shop or field fabrication and erection to permit testing and inspection without delaying Work. 2. Ensure timely delivery of items to be embedded in work of other sections; furnish setting drawings and directions for installation 3. Provide templates for setting of anchor rods, one per location. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel Shapes, Plates, Tube, Pipe, and other sections: As noted on drawings. 1. All HSS shapes shall be manufactured (rolled and seam welded) in the United States. Alternatively, HSS shapes from outside the United States shall have all seam welds tested by ultrasonic examination. Costs of tests and repairs, if any, shall be borne by the contractor. B. Heavy Sections: 1. Heavy Sections in the Seismic-Load-Resisting System shall be supplied with Charpy V- notch (CVN) testing in accordance with AISC 341 requirements. 2. Plates and Flanges in Heavy Sections shall be free of laminations within 3" of areas to be welded with complete-joint-penetration welds. C. Standard Threaded Fasteners: 1. Machine Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A307, Grade A. 2. Plain Washers: ASTM F844. 3. Beveled Washers: ANSI B18.23.1. D. High Strength Bolts: 1. ASTM A325-N, snug-tight, unless otherwise noted. 2. Bolted joints in the Seismic-Load-Resisting System shall be Slip-Critical, with pretensioned high-strength bolts and a Class A faying surface or better. 3. Twist-off-Type Tension-Control Bolt Assemblies: ASTM F1852. 4. Direct Tension Indicators: Load Indicator Washers: ASTM F959 5. Nuts for High Strength Bolts: ASTM A563. 6. Washers for High Strength Bolts: ASTM F436. E. Welding materials: 1. Comply with AWS D1.1 with a nominal 70 ksi tensile strength. 2. Supplemental Requirements for the Seismic-Load-Resisting System: Welds shall meet the requirements of AWS D1.8, Section 6. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Structural Steel Specifications 05120 - 7 F. Welded Stud Connectors: 1. Headed Shear Studs: AWS D1.1 "Type B" automatic end-welded headed studs made from ASTM A108, Grade 1015 or 1020. 2. Threaded Studs: Automatic end-welded threaded studs made from ASTM A108, Grades 1010 through 1020. G. Anchor Rods and Nuts: ASTM F1554; Grade as noted on drawings. 1. Grade 55 shall be weldable per supplement S1. 2. Grades 55 shall have a minimum CVN toughness of 15 ft-lbs at 40° F per supplement S4. 3. Grade 105 shall have a minimum CVN toughness of 15 ft-lbs at-20° F per supplement S5. H. Threaded Rods: As noted on drawings. I. Clevises and Turnbuckles: AISI C-1035; in addition clevises and turnbuckles shall have design strengths corresponding to the 2005 AISC Steel Construction Manual with ultimate capacities at least 200% of the tabulated LRFD values. J. Primer 1. Interior steel: primer shall conform to SSPC Paint Specification No. 13. 2. Exterior steel: primer shall conform to SSPC Paint Specification No. 20 (Zinc-Rich Primer) f 3. Primers shall contain no lead or chromates. 4. Contractor shall verify compatibility with finish paint where applicable. K. Zinc-Rich Coating for Repair of Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc-rich coatings shall meet the requirements of ASTM A780. 2.2 FABRICATION A. General Requirements: 1. Fabricate structural steel in accordance with AISC 360 (Chapter M and Section J2), AISC 303, and AWS D1.1 as applicable to Statically Loaded Structures, except as otherwise noted herein. a. Assume all thermally cut edges are subject to tension stresses. b. Delete paragraphs M4.6 and M5.1 from Chapter M of AISC 360. 2. Fabricate and assemble work in shop to greatest extent possible. 3. Where possible, use procedures that do not require Architect's approval. Such approval may not be given in some circumstances. 4. Coordinate as required for attachment of other work to structural steel. 5. Drill or punch holes for passage of reinforcing steel shapes, sections, plates, or bars as indicated on Contract Drawings. Notify Architect of conditions not shown or noted. 6. Allowable Tolerances: Comply with AISC 360, Chapter M, and AISC 303, Section 6. Where more restrictive tolerances are necessary to properly install other building systems and components then adopt the more restrictive tolerances. 7. Holes and attachments to structural steel in areas designated as the Protected Zone are not allowed except as explicitly shown or noted on structural drawings. B. Connections: 1. Shop Connections: Bolted or welded as noted. 2. Field Connections: Locate splices only where noted or approved by Architect. 3. To the extent possible, assemble structural steel in the shop prior to galvanization. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Structural Steel Specifications 05120 - 8 C. Bolted Joints: 1. Punch or drill holes 1/16" larger than bolt size. Material having thickness in excess of connector diameter plus 1/8" shall be drilled rather than punched. 2. Ream unfair holes, but only up to next larger bolt size and install a bolt corresponding to the new hole size. Where unfairness exceeds maximum, weld hole in base material solid and drill hole of proper size. 3. Remove burrs that would prohibit solid seating of connected parts. 4. Mark completely tightened bolts with identifying symbol. 5. Provide hardened washers over slotted holes. 6. Draw up tight, check threads with chisel or provide approved lock washers where bolts are not pretensioned. 7. Assembly with Standard Threaded Fasteners: Provide beveled washers under bolt heads or nuts resting surfaces exceeding five percent slope with respect to head or nut. 8. Assembly of High-Strength Structural Bolted Joints: a. Meet requirements of AISC 348. b. Seismic-Load Resisting System joints shall be slip-critical (friction-type) as defined in AISC 348 with Class A or better faying surfaces. c. Provide hardened washers under provided under the element turned in the tightening procedure of high strength bolts. d. Direct tension indicator washers, where used, shall be provided under the head of slip-critical high strength bolts. D. Welded Construction: (shop and field) 1. Weld in accordance with AISC 360, AWS D1.1, and CBC Chapter 22. 2. Welding shall be performed in accordance with the WPS for the joint. 3. Welds that will be permanently exposed to view shall have burrs, flux, welding oxide air spots, and discolorations removed. Surfaces of such welds shall be reasonably smooth and uniform. 4. Exterior welds shall be watertight. 5. Each welder working on the project shall be assigned an identification symbol or mark. Each welder shall mark or stamp this identification symbol at each weld completed. Stamps, if used, shall be the low-stress type. 6. Before testing, all welds to be subjected to ultrasonic testing (UT) shall be given a visible mark, "for UT," accurately placed on the steel a distance of 4 away from the root of the edge preparation. 7. Groove welds shall be complete-joint-penetration welds, unless specifically designated otherwise. 8. WPSs shall be available to welders and inspectors prior to and during the welding process. Prior to welding, joint fit-up shall be verified by the welder for conformance with the WPS andAWSD1.1. 9. Supplemental Welding Requirements a. Maximum Preheat and Interpass Temperature: The maximum preheat and maximum interpass temperature permitted is 550° F, measured at a distance of 1" from the point of arc initiation. This maximum temperature may not be increased by the WPS, regardless of qualification testing. b. Nonfusible Backing: The use of nonfusible backing materials, including ceramic and copper, is permitted only with satisfactory welder qualification testing performed using the type of backing proposed for use and using the test plate shown in AWS D1.1, Figure 4.21, except that groove dimensions shall be as provided in the WPS and PQR. For nonfusible weld tabs and short segments of nonfusible backing bars used at the ends of welds between shear plates and column faces, or at the ends of continuity plate welds, special welding personnel and welding procedure qualification testing is not required. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Structural Steel Specifications 05120-9 c. Peening, Controlled Cooling, and Post-Weld Heat Treatment (PWHT): If peening, controlled cooling, or PWHT are used, they shall be performed in accordance with AWS D1.1 and a written procedure for their performance shall be incorporated into the appropriate WPS. i. If insulating blankets are used to control cooling a written procedure and temperature measurements are not required, ii. The application of heat immediately following completion of a joint to maintain a nominal temperature at or below 550° F is not considered PWHT. d. Intermix of Filler Metals: For Demand-Critical Welds in which different weld filler metals are used, supplemental toughness testing shall be conducted as prescribed in FEMA 353, Part I, Appendix C. e. Wind Velocity Limits: In the Seismic-Load-Resisting-System, in lieu of the wind speed limitations in AWS D1.1, welds using GMAW, FCAW-G, GTAW and EGW methods shall not be performed when the wind velocity in the immediate vicinity of the weld exceeds three miles per hour. Welding performed within an enclosed area, and not subject to drafts may be deemed to satisfy this requirement. For SMAW, FCAW-S, and SAW processes wind shall not affect the appearance of the molten weld puddle. 10. Welded joints of the Seismic-Load-Resisting-System shall conform to AWS D1.8, Section 6. 11. Welded Joint Details: a. Backing bars: The use of backing bars shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1. Backing bars shall be removed where required by the Contract Documents or AWS D1.1. i. Heavy Section Splices Requiring Removal of Backing Bars: All welded splices of Heavy Sections, shall have the backing bars removed. Where fusible backing material is used, the root pass area shall be backgouged after backing bar removal, and backwelded until flush or with slight reinforcement. The surface shall then be ground Extra Smooth. ii. Beam-Column Connection Joints Requiring Removal of Backing Bars: Following removal of backing, remove un-sound weld metal at the root area and any excessive weld discontinuities, and backweld. Minimize gouging and removal of base metal. A reinforcing fillet weld with a minimum leg size of 5/16" or the root opening plus 1/16", whichever is larger, shall be provided. Perform MT on the fillet weld and the immediately adjacent area. iii. If groove weld backing is permitted to remain, the backing shall not exceed 3/8" thickness. For connections of the seismic-load-resisting system in which backing is not removed, backing shall be attached to the member or plate that does not have its surface prepared for the groove weld. Attachment shall be by either a %" fillet or V8" groove weld along the complete bar length on the side of the bar opposite the groove weld. b. Weld dams are not allowed. c. Weld Tabs: i. Use of Weld Tabs: Welds shall be terminated at the end of a joint in a manner that will ensure sound welds. Whenever necessary, this shall be done by use of weld tabs. 1. Weld tabs shall extend beyond the edge of the joint a distance equal to a minimum of the part thickness, but not less than 1". 2. Weld tabs shall be oriented parallel to the joint preparation and to the weld direction. 3. Nonfusible weld tabs may be used in applications and locations where qualified in accordance with AWS D1.1, Section 4. // Heavy Section Joint Weld Tab Removal and Finish: All welded tension splices in Heavy Sections, shall have the weld tabs removed and ground Extra Smooth. iii SLRS Beam-Column Connection Weld Tab Removal and Finish: Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Structural Steel Specifications 05120 -10 1. Weld tabs of SIRS connections shall be removed. Removal may be performed by air carbon arc cutting (CAC-A), grinding, chipping, or thermal cutting to within 1/8" of the base metal surface. For continuity plate weld tabs, removal within %" of the plate edge is adequate. The process shall be controlled to minimize removal of base metal except for that material immediately adjacent to the weld. The edges where the weld tabs have been removed shall be finished Extra Smooth. 2. In SLRS connections, gouges deeper than 1/16" at locations of removal of weld tabs shall be repaired by welding according to the requirements of this Specification for Deep Gouges. Weld filler metal requirements for Demand-Critical Welds apply. The contour of the weld at the ends shall provide a smooth transition, free of gouges and sharp corners. A minimum radius at the corner need not be provided. 3. Following weld tab removal, finishing, and completion of any necessary repairs, the exposed ends of the weld shall be inspected using magnetic particle testing (MT). d. Weld toes: Weld toes, whether for groove welds or fillet welds, shall provide a smooth transition between the weld and base metal. The as-welded profile is adequate provided it satisfies the criteria of AWS D1.1, Section 5.24. e. Weld access holes: i. Weld access holes shall meet the dimensional, surface finish, and testing requirements of AISC 360 Chapter J1.6 and AWS D1.1, except as otherwise required by the Contract Documents, ii. Where the height of the weld access hole exceeds the quantity k-tf+1/4" or where the length of the weld access hole exceeds 4 tf (where k and tf are defined in AISC 360), welded reinforcement is required. Notify the Architect for specific instruction, iii. At welded flange joints that are part of the Seismic Load Resisting System, the weld access hole detail shown in Figure 6.2 of the AWS D1.8 shall be used unless the section is a Heavy Section. iv. The SLRS access hole shall conform to AWS D1.8, Section 6.9.2. v. SLRS weld access holes shall be inspected using magnetic particle testing (MT) or liquid penetrant testing (PT) and shall be free of cracks. If a welded gouge repair has been performed, magnetic particle testing (MT) shall be performed. f. Web weld details: A minimum clear distance of 1/4" shall be provided between the weld access hole and fillet welds connecting the shear plate and beam web. g. Welding for Moment Connection of Bottom Beam Flange shall be sequenced so as to minimize residual stresses in the joint h. Weave Passes: Weave passes are not permitted in groove welds in the SLRS.Column continuity plate details: i. Column continuity plate details: 1. If backing bars are used and remain in place, they shall receive a reinforcing fillet weld between the backing bar and column flange. No fillet weld should be placed between backing bar and continuity plate. 2. Weld terminations near the end of the column flange tips may be completed using weld tabs. Weld tabs shall be removed. Conform to AWS D1.8 Sections 6.10.3 and 6.10.4. Following finishing, the edge shall be inspected using MT. Fillet weld terminations between the continuity plate and column web shall be approximately %" from each end of the joint. j. Tack Welds in the SLRS Protected Zones: Tack welds in the SLRS Protected Zones are permitted only if they are incorporated into a required weld. E. Heavy Sections: 1. General: See AISC 360 Chapter A3.1c for materials requirements. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Structural Steel Specifications 05120 -11 2. Applicability of Provisions: All requirements of AISC 360 for Group 4 and 5 shapes shall apply to Heavy Sections as defined in this Specification. 3. Access Hole Requirements: Access holes shall conform to the requirements of AISC 360, Chapter J1.6. Weld access holes must be preheated to a minimum of 150° F prior to thermal cutting, ground to an Extra Smooth finish. Inspect holes for cracks using either penetrant testing (PT) or magnetic particle testing (MT). Optionally, weld access holes may be made by drilling and saw-cutting without grinding, but PT or MT of the cut surface is still required. 4. Welding: The minimum preheat and interpass temperature shall be as specified by AISC 360, Chapter J2. Weld tabs and backing bars shall be removed, ground to an Extra Smooth finish, with reinforcement not to exceed 1/8", at a transition slope not to exceed 1:10. See AISC 360 J2 for preheat requirements and J1.5 for weld tab and backing bar removal requirements. 5. Splices shall conform to the requirements of AISC 360, Chapter J1.5 F. Camber: Provide camber as indicated on contract drawings in accordance with AISC 360 Chapter M2.1. G. Welded Connectors: Install in accordance with AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's recommendations. There shall be no porosity or evidence of lack of fusion between the end of the stud and the steel member. H. Repair of Discontinuities in Protected Zone of Seismic-Load-Resisting System. 1. Tack Welds: Tack welds are permitted only if they are incorporated into a required weld. 2. Repair of Discontinuities: If erection aids within the Protected Zone cannot be avoided, the Structural Engineer's approval of the aid's placement, use, and the repair method is required. Conform to AWS D1.8 Section 6.15.4. 3. Air Carbon Arc Cutting and Thermal Cutting: Air carbon arc cutting (CAC-A) and thermal cutting is permitted in the Protected Zone with the prior approval of the Structural Engineer for the removal of backing bars and weld tabs, as specified in these documents. 4. Gouges in members and connections in the Seismic-Load-Resisting System shall be repaired according to the requirements of this Specification. Weld filler metal requirements for the Seismic-Load-Resisting System apply, unless otherwise noted. I. Surface Finish 1. Flush Surfaces: Welds in butt joints required to be flush shall be finished so as to not reduce the thickness of the thinner base metal or weld metal by more than 1/16", or 5% of the material thickness, whichever is less. Remaining reinforcement shall not exceed 1/32" in height. However, all reinforcement shall be removed where the weld forms part of a faying or contact surface. All reinforcement shall blend smoothly into the plate surfaces with the transition areas free from undercut. 2. Finish Methods and Values: Chipping and gouging may be used, provided these methods are followed by grinding. Where surface finishing is required, surface shall be Extra Smooth, unless otherwise noted or specified in this document. Measurement of surface finish values by visual appearance or tactile comparison is acceptable. J. Repair of Gouges: Gouges are not permitted in areas requiring an Extra Smooth finish surface, or where specifically prohibited by AWS D1.1 or this Specification. Repair of gouges meet the following requirements, unless otherwise noted: 1. Shallow Gouges: Gouges up to 3/16" deep shall be removed by grinding as per D1.1, or to a radius of not less than 3/8". Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Structural Steel Specifications 05120 -12 2. Deep Gouges: Gouges deeper than 3/16" shall be repaired by welding. Prior to welding, gouges shall be ground to provide an Extra Smooth contour with a radius not less than 3/8". The repair area shall be preheated to a temperature between 400° F and 550° F, measured at the point of welding approximately one minute after removal of the heating source, or shall be preheated in accordance with AWS D1.1 Annex XI for high restraint. A written repair WPS for the application shall be followed. Following completion of welding, the area shall be ground Extra Smooth, with fairing of the welded surface to adjoining surfaces where applicable, and shall be inspected using magnetic particle testing (MT). 3. The transitional slope after gouge removal shall not exceed 1:5. K. Weld Acceptance Criteria shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1. Regions of welds that cannot be inspected shall be identified and recorded, and the Structural Engineer shall be notified. 2.3 FINISHES A. Prime Painting 1. Surfaces to be painted: a. Apply one coat of exterior primer to structural steel surfaces permanently exposed to weather. b. Apply one coat of primer to interior structural steel surfaces. c. Do not prime paint following surfaces: 1. Surfaces to be encased in concrete except initial 2". 2. Surface to be field welded. 3. Surface to receive sprayed-on fireproofing. 4. Contact surfaces joined by high-strength bolts. 2. Preparation of Surfaces: a. Thoroughly clean mill scale, rust, dirt, grease, and other foreign matter from steel prior to painting. b. Where hand-cleaning methods are inadequate, clean in accordance with SSPC- SP1, SSPC-SP 2, or SSPC-SP 7, as required. 3. Painting: a. Apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's specifications to provide minimum dry film thickness of 1.0 mils per coat. b. Permit thorough drying before shipment. c. Do not prime in temperatures lower than 45 degrees Fahrenheit. B. Galvanization 1. Galvanize steel where required by the Drawings or by other sections of the Specification. 2. Galvanize Shapes in accordance with ASTM A153, ASTM A123 / A123M. 3. Galvanize Fasteners in accordance with ASTM B695, Class 40 minimum. 4. Paint Color: ICI Dulux A2014 "Obsidian Glass" - # OONN13/000 for all exposed structural members. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Owner's Testing Agency will: 1. Review ladle analysis and certificates of compliance. Where certification is questionable, test material to verify compliance. 2. Inspect shop fabrication. 3. Provide the management, personnel, equipment, and services required to perform the quality assurance functions required below. 4. Verify that no improper attachments to the Protected Zone have been made. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Structural Steel Specifications 05120-13 5. Inspect Heavy Sections: a. Heavy Section flanges shall be ultrasonically examined at locations to be groove- welded, for evidence of laminations, inclusions, or other discontinuities, in accordance with ASTM A898, Straight Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Rolled Steel Structural Shapes. Examination shall include entire area within 3" of such joints. For plates, ultrasonically examine in accordance with ASTM A435, Straight Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Steel Plates. Any discontinuity causing a total loss of back reflection that cannot be contained within a circle with a diameter of the greater of 3" or one-half the plate thickness, shall be rejected. 6. Forward copies of all product and procedure certificates, data sheets, and test and inspection reports to the Owner, Architect, Structural Engineer, and, Contractor, and the Building Department. B. Welding Inspection: The Welding Inspector shall perform the tasks indicated in the following list. This list shall not be considered exclusive of any additional inspection tasks that may be necessary to meet the requirements of AWS D1.1, CBC, and the Quality Assurance Plan 1. Review and understand the applicable portions of the specifications, the Contract Documents and the shop drawings for the project. 2. Verify that all applicable welder qualifications, welding operator qualifications and tack welder qualifications are available, current, accurate, and in compliance with these specifications. 3. Verify welder identification and qualification. Verify that any required supplemental welder qualification testing, if required for the joint, has been executed and that the welder has passed. 4. Verify that each welder has a unique identification mark or die stamp to identify welds. 5. Verify that all applicable Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs), with Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs) as needed, are available, current and accurate, and comply with AWS D1.1 and this specification. 6. Verify that an approved Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) has been provided and that each welder performing the weld has reviewed the WPS. A copy of the appropriate WPS shall be available for each joint, although need not be present at each joint location. 7. Review mill test reports for all main member and designated connection base material for compliance with the project requirements. 8. Verify base material identification with the contract documents. 9. Verify the electrode, flux and shielding gas certifications for compliance with the Contract Documents. 10. Verify welding consumables with the approved WPSs. 11. Verify that electrodes are used only in the permitted positions and within the welding parameters specified in the WPS. 12. Verify that electrodes and fluxes are properly stored, and that exposure limits for the welding materials are satisfied. 13. At suitable intervals, observe joint preparation, assembly practice, preheat temperatures, interpass temperatures, welding techniques, welder performance and any post-weld controlled cooling and heat treatment to ensure that the requirements of the WPS and AWS D.1.1 are satisfied. 14. At suitable intervals, verify current and voltage of the welding equipment in application of the WPS, if needed, by a calibrated amp and voltmeter. Current and voltage shall be measured near the arc with this equipment. 15. Inspect the work to ensure compliance with AWS D1.1 and the specified weld acceptance criteria. 16. Schedule NOT technicians in a timely manner, after the visual inspection is complete and the assembly has cooled. The final NOT on a specific weld shall be performed at least 24 hours after the welding has been completed. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Structural Steel Specifications 05120-14 17. Mark the welds, parts, and joints that have been inspected, and accepted, with a distinguishing mark or die stamp, or maintain records indicating the specific welds inspected and accepted by each inspector. 18. Document the accepted and rejected items in a written report. Transmit the report to the designated recipients in a timely manner. C. Nondestructive Testing of Welded Joints 1. Magnetic Particle Testing: Magnetic Particle Testing (MT) shall be conducted by the Owner's Testing Agency at the frequency designated in Table 2-1. MT shall be performed in accordance with AWS D1.1, and AWS D1.8 Annex F. 2. Ultrasonic Testing: Ultrasonic testing (UT) shall be conducted by the Owner's Testing Agency for the percentage of joints designated in Table 2-1. UT shall be performed in accordance with AWS D1.1. 3. Weld Acceptance Criteria shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1. Regions of welds that cannot be inspected shall be identified and recorded, and the Structural Engineer shall be notified. 4. K-Area Welding Inspection: After welds of continuity plates and doubler plates have cooled to ambient temperature, test column webs for cracking using liquid penetrant (PT) or magnetic particle testing (MT) over a zone 3" above and below each weld. Table 2-1. Nondestructive Testing Requirements Weld Category Welds not described below SIRS welds not described below Top-flange joints at cantilever beam connections3 Demand-Critical Welds; Butt joints in column splices Nondestructive Testing Requirements Complete-Joint- Penetration Welds1 No NDT required unless otherwise noted MT 25% of joints, full lenqth^ UT 25% of joints, full length2 MT 100% of joints, full length UT 100% of joints, full length MT 100% of joints, full length UT 100% of joints, full length4 Partial-Joint-Penetration Welds and Fillet Welds No NDT required unless otherwise noted MT 25% of joints. 6" soot at random2 MT 100% of joints, full length MT 100% of joints, full length Notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. UT is required only when the weld thickness is /16" or greater. If any joint fails testing, test 100% of joints until 40 consecutive welds pass. The testing rate may then be reduced to 25%. Test joint on each side of cantilever beam support. Reduce the rate of UT to 25% if after 40 welds have been inspected, an individual welder's reject rate is less than 5%. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine units of Work to be placed and verify that all anchor rods have been installed properly and have sufficient bolt and thread elevation. B. Do not begin erection before unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Specifications Structural Steel 05120-15 3.2 ERECTION A. General Requirements: 1. Erect structural steel in accordance with AISC 360 Chapter M, AISC 303, and AWS D1.1 Structural Steel Welding Code as applicable to Statically Loaded Structures. 2. Requirements for bolted and welded joints specified in Part 2 of this Specification shall also apply to field connections unless otherwise noted. 3. Erection Tolerances: Do not exceed the erection tolerances specified in AISC 303, Section 7. Where more restrictive tolerances are necessary to properly install other building systems and components then adopt the more restrictive tolerances. 4. Where erection requires performing work of fabrication on site, conform to applicable standards for fabrication. B. Field Cutting or Alteration: There shall be no field cutting, alteration, or repair of structural steel members or of connections without prior review and approval by the Structural Engineer. Structural elements with fabrication errors or that do not satisfy tolerance limits shall be repaired. Submit drawings showing reasons for, and details of, proposed corrective work. C. Anchor rods shall be set in conformance with Section 7.5 of AISC 303. D. Temporary Shoring and Bracing: Provide shoring and bracing as needed until permanent lateral- support is in place and complete. Contractor is responsible for identifying the need for temporary shoring and bracing. E. Erection Procedures: Control erection procedures and sequences to avoid problems caused by temperature differentials and weld shrinkage, and other sources of expansion and contraction. F. Field Assembly: 1. Clean bearing surfaces and surfaces to be in permanent contact before assembling members. 2. Do not fasten splices of columns and other members with bearing joints designated on the drawings before abutting surfaces have been brought completely into contact. 3. Bolted Construction: a. Installation of high-strength bolts shall conform to ASTM A325 for slip-critical or snug-tightened type joints, as applicable, in accordance with AISC 348. Provide washer under head or nut of high strength bolts. Washer shall be provided under the element being turned during tightening. Bolts in welded connections shall be tensioned after completion of welding. b. At bolted joints designated as Slip-Critical or that require Pretension, use Twist-off- Type Tension-Control bolt assemblies or Direct Tension Indicators. c. Do not use flame cutting to align bolt holes except as permitted by AISC 348 specifications. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. Do not enlarge holes to a diameter greater than 1". When reaming beyond 1/32", drill or ream to the next larger hole size and use the next larger size bolt. 4. Mill scale shall be removed from the column in the area where the beam flanges will be welded to the column. G. Gas Cutting: Use of flame cutting torch will be permitted only after the Architect's prior written approval and only where metal cut will not carry stress during cutting, and cut surfaces will not be visible. When thermal cutting is permitted, cutting shall be done with a mechanically guided torch or a torch controlled using a guide bar. H. Field Touch-Up Painting: After erection, touch-up paint field connections and abrasions resulting from the Work of this Section with same paint used for shop prime painting. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Structural Steel Specifications 05120 -16 I. Remove and repair galvanized surface as required for field welding in accordance with ASTM-A780, A2; required thickness is 100 micro-inches. Touch up with zinc-rich coating. Repair material shall extend at least three inches beyond edges of damaged areas. J. Protected Zone: Attachments to structural steel in the Protected Zone, other than spot welding of metal deck to beams and welding of metal studs to braces as shown on structural drawings, are not allowed 3.3 CLEANING A. After erection, thoroughly clean surfaces of foreign or deleterious matter such as dirt, mud, oil, or grease that would impair bonding of fireproofing, concrete, or other finishes as applicable. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE The Owner's Testing Agency shall: A. Verify proper anchor rod group location, elevation, and orientation prior to placement of concrete foundations. B. Verify proper anchor rod group location, elevation, and orientation subsequent to placement of concrete foundations prior to arrival of structural steel. C. Perform field welding inspection and testing in accordance with the requirements in Part 2 of this Specification for shop fabrication, unless otherwise noted. D. Inspect and test high strength bolted joints in accordance with AISC 348. E. Sample and test bolt assemblies that include direct tension indicators, on a daily basis to verify proper indication of deformation with required bolt tension for each size and lot. F. Inspect erected structural steel as required to establish conformity of Work with reviewed shop drawings and Contract Drawings. G. Perform testing and inspection of welded stud connectors in accordance with requirements of AWS D1.1. After the bend test, the weld section shall not exhibit any tearing or cracking. H. Inspect structural steel to verify that the Protected Zones of members of the Seismic-Load- Resisting System are free of damage and attachments not approved by the Structural Engineer. I. Forward copies of all test and inspection reports to the Owner, Architect, Structural Engineer, and, Contractor, and the Building Department. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Structural Steel Specifications 05120-17 SECTION 05505 RANGE METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. General: Furnish all labor, supervision, materials, tools, equipment, appliances and services necessary for the fabrication, delivery and installation of all miscellaneous metal items. All work shall be as shown or indicated on the drawings and as specified in this section. B. Scope of Work: 1. Embedded angles and plates 2. Ladders 3. Miscellaneous metal work and related items. 4. AR 500 steel, as shown on drawings and related to Range Equipment in Section 11890. C. Related Documents: The Contract Documents, as defined in Section 01110 - Summary of Work, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional requirements and information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other Documents. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design Criteria and Calculations: Structural engineering calculations shall be provided with shop drawing submissions for connections, attachments and assemblies as described in 2.03. B. Welding shall conform to American Welding Society's Standard Code for Arc and Gas Welding in Building Construction. Welding shall be continuous along entire area of contact, except where tack welding is specifically shown or specified. Grind all exposed welds. C. Provide quality control inspection of attachment and suspension connections to assure full compliance with code requirements. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Metal Fabrications Specifications 05505 -1 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals. B. Shop drawings based on the Contract Documents shall be submitted to the Architect for review prior to ordering of materials. C. Failure by the contractor to submit shop drawings, test reports, etc. required above shall release the Architect and the Engineer from any liabilities due to the negligence on the part of the contractor to comply with the construction documents. D. Approval will cover size and arrangement of members, character of construction, but not dimensions. E. Contractor shall verify actual dimensions at the construction site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Comply with the following standards, as pertinent: 1. Steel plates, shapes, and bars: ASTM A36; 2. Steel plates to be bent or cold-formed: ASTM A283; grade C; 3. Steel tubing (hot-formed, welded, or seamless): ASTM A500; grade B; 4. Steel bars and bar-size shapes: ASTM A306; grade 65, or ASTM A36; 5. Cold-finished steel bars: ASTM A108! 6. Cold-rolled carbon steel sheets: ASTM A336; 7. Galvanized carbon steel sheets: ASTM A526, with G90 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A525; 8. Stainless steel sheets: AISI type 302 or 304, 24 ga. with number 4 finish; 9. Gray iron castings: ASTM A48, class 10; 10. Malleable iron castings: ASTMA47; 11. Steel pipe: ASTM A53, grade A, schedule 40, black finish unless otherwise noted; 12. Concrete inserts: a. Threaded or wedge-type galvanized ferrous castings of malleable iron complying with ASTM A27. b. Provide required bolts, shims, and washers, hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153. 13. Bolts and nuts: Provide hexagon-head regular type complying with ASTM A307, grade A. 14. Lag bolts: Provide square-head type complying with Fed Spec FF-B-561; 15. Machine screws: Provide cadmium plated steel type complying with Fed SpecFF-S-111. B. Castings shall be made from the best grade of soft pig iron cast in stove place molding sand to a uniform thickness. Castings shall be free of defects impairing strength or appearance. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Metal Fabrications Specifications 05505 - 2 C. Accessories: Provide all anchors bolts, anchor straps, hangers and other related fittings, fastener and accessories required for proper and secure installation of all miscellaneous metal. Fasteners for exterior use shall be zinc coated. Generally, the sizes, shapes and spacing of items are shown or specified; where not shown or specified, accessories shall be adequate for the required services, subject to approval. 2.02 SHOP PAINTING A. All Iron and Steel Work: Unless otherwise specified, power tool clean all surfaces to remove mill scale. Work shall receive a shop coat of paint before leaving the factory or being exposed to the weather. Aluminum work contacting dissimilar metals shall receive a protective coating preventing galvanic action. B. Shop Paint: Shop paint shall be Fabricator's standard, fast curing, lead free, "universal" primer, compatible with finish paint system indicated and for capability to provide sound foundation for field applied topcoats. C. Aluminum surfaces to be in direct contact with concrete and masonry shall be shop coated with zinc chromate primer. 2.03 ITEMS TO BE PROVIDED A. Lintel Angles: Galvanized steel in sizes indicated on drawings. Extend loose lintel angles 8" on each side of opening. B. Miscellaneous Steel Shapes: Channels, angles, plates, tubing, connections and bolts provided where shown and detailed on drawings. AR 500 steel provided where noted and shown. C. AR 500 Steel Plate Redirective Guards and Ductwork Enclosures: Provide AR 500 Steel plates, in either 1/4" or 3/8" thickness, as noted on drawings, with steel angle and channel'framing and welded threaded studs for hanging from structure, and for supporting of blocking and cladding, as shown on drawings. a. Miscellaneous Hardware: Provide turnbuckles, S-hooks, eyebolts, cables, chains, seismic bracing, and other miscellaneous hardware as required for a complete installation. All members that are suspended from above by chain or cable shall be spaced so that the loading does not exceed 50% of the chain or cable manufacturer's specified capacity. Such chains or cables shall be attached to the anchor bolts in the roof structure. Chains or cables shall fall essentially straight. Any bridging members required for such placement of the chains shall be provided by the steel baffle manufacturer. Anchor bolts used shall be standard products rated by their manufacturers at 300% minimum load greater than the suspended load. All eyebolts, S-hooks and turnbuckles shall be rated at 300% minimum load greater than the suspended load. D. AR 500 Steel Plate Wall Fairings: Provide AR 500 Steel plates, in thickness as noted on drawings, with welded threaded studs for attaching to brackets as detailed. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Metal Fabrications Specifications 05505 - 3 E. Rolling Ladder: Provide M - 2000 series rolling ladder as manufactured by Putnam Rolling Ladder Co., Inc., New York, NY (212) 226-5147, or equal. Ladder to have foot pedal activated lockstep, be 24" wide with (8) vertical steps and have a 21" deep top step (DTS). Provide to California OSHA specifications. Ladder to be shipped knocked down and assembled by Contractor in place after Bullet Trap installation. Ladder shall be equal to Model# 083214. Provide two ladders; one behind each Bullet Trap. F. Folding & Rolling Ladder: For filter access on the main range floors, provide a fold & roll ladder with the top step at 90" above finish floor, equal to Model# LAD-RF-9- P-EZ, as manufactured by Vestil Manufacturing, N. Wayne Street, Angola, IN (800) 348-0868. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION A. Contractor shall secure and be responsible for all field measurements required for the proper and accurate fabrication and installation of the items included under this section; field alterations will not be permitted except upon specific authorization of the Architect. B. All work shall be assembled in the most substantial manner and reinforced where necessary with structural shapes, using concealed screws, bolts or similar fastenings. Make welds of adequate strength and durability, jointing tight, clean and smooth, flush and in true plane with base metals. C. All screws or rivets shall be countersunk, unless otherwise noted. Provide lock washers for all bolts. D. All steel to which wood blocking is connected shall be properly punched for anchoring blocking. E. Exposed steel shapes with marred surfaces shall be ground or draw-filled to a fine grain finish, as approved before applying shop coat of paint. F. Assembled work shall be completely constructed in the shop, accurately finished and the pieces match-marked for erection. Form exterior joints to exclude water, grind connections in exposed pieces smooth and polish. G. The Contractor shall do all drilling, cutting, tapping and fitting of work to accommodate other work coming in contact with it, and shall furnish all taps, bolts and other fittings in connection therewith. H. Except where otherwise noted, fastening to concrete, solid masonry or hollow masonry shall be with expansion bolts or anchors. Fastening to wood plugs will not be permitted. Toggle may be used only when approved by the Architect. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Metal Fabrications Specifications 05505 - 4 3.02 INSTALLATION A. All work included in this Contract shall be installed by the Contractor at the proper time and as rapidly as the progress of the adjacent and connecting work will permit. B. All work shall be installed plumb, level, square and true to line in all cases. C. Grind exposed welds smooth and touch-up shop prime coats. D. Do not cut, weld or abrade surfaces which have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and which are intended for bolted or screwed field connections. E. Loose lintel angles shall bear 8" on each side of opening. F. Immediately after erection, clean the field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop priming. Paint the exposed areas with same material used for shop priming. G. Install seismic bracing for baffles, enclosures, and range equipment as per engineering calculations referenced in 1.03.A. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Metal Fabrications Specifications 05505 - 5 SECTION 07215 - RIGID CAVITY WALL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Product Data. B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84, and as follows: 1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less where exposed; otherwise, as indicated in Part 2 "Insulation Products" Article. 2. Smoked-Developed Index: 450 or less. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION PRODUCTS A. Foil-Faced Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type I, Class 1 or 2, faced on both sides with aluminum foil, with flame-spread index of 75 or less. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install insulation in areas and in thicknesses indicated. Cut and fit tightly between masonry joint reinforcements, masonry veneer ties allowing ties to extend beyond the face of the insulation, and around all obstructions. Fill voids with insulation. B. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage as necessary to maintain insulation in place as indicated on the documents. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility RIGID CAVITY WALL INSULATION Specifications 07215-1 SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non-fire-rated steel doors and frames. B. Steel frames for wood doors. C. Thermally insulated steel doors. D. Sound-rated steel doors and frames. E. Accessories, including glazing, louvers, and matching panels. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08710-Door Hardware. B. Section 08800 - Glazing: Glass for doors and borrowed lites. C. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Field painting. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2003. B. ANSI A250.8 - SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; 2003. C. ANSI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 1998 (R2004). D. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2007. E. ASTM E 90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2004. F. ASTM E 413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2004. G. ASTM E 1408 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of the Sound Transmission Loss of Door Panels and Door Systems; 1991 (Reapproved 2000). H. BHMA A156.115 - Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames; 2006. I. NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2007. J. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and one copy of referenced grade standard. C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and identifying location of different finishes, if any. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain at the project site a copy of all reference standards dealing with installation. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840. B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Contractor shall correct defective Work within a (2) two year period after Date of Substantial Completion; remove and replace steel doors and frames at no cost to Owner. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES Specifications 08110 -1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Steel Doors and Frames: 1. Steelcraft: www.steelcraft.com. 2. Ceco Door Products - www.cecodoor.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.02 DOORS AND FRAMES A. Requirements for All Doors and Frames: 1. Accessibility: Comply with ANSI/ICC A117.1. 2. Door Texture: Smooth faces. 3. Glazed Lights: Non-removable stops on non-secure side; sizes and configurations as indicated on drawings. 4. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with BHMA A156.115, with reinforcement welded in place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard. a. Frame reinforcement: 1) Hinges: 7 gauge 2) Strikes: 12 gauge 3) Closures: 12 gauge 4) Openings: 12 gauge B. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent. 2.03 STEEL DOORS A. Exterior Doors: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 3, physical performance Level A, Model 2, seamless. 2. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 3. Doors to be 16 gauge, heavy duty. 4. Provide weather-tight top 16 gauge steel channel flush with top of door the full width of door. Plastic fillers are not acceptable. B. Interior Doors, Non-Fire-Rated: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 1, physical performance Level C, Model 1, full flush. 2. Core: Polystyrene foam. 3. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44 mm). 4. Doors to be 16 gauge, heavy duty. C. Stairway Doors, Fire-Rated: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 1, physical performance Level C, Model 1, full flush. 2. Core: Polystyrene foam. 3. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44 mm). 4. Doors to be 16 gauge, heavy duty. D. Interior Doors, Sound-Rated: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 2, physical performance Level B, Model 2, seamless. 2. STC Rating of Assembled Door, Frame, and Seals: 35, calculated in accordance with ASTM E 413, tested in accordance with ASTM E 90 or ASTM E 1408. 3. Core: Polyurethane. 4. Doors to be 16 gauge, heavy duty. 5. Sound Seals: Integral, concealed in door or frame. E. Panels: Same construction, performance, and finish as doors. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES Specifications 08110 - 2 2.04 STEEL FRAMES A. General: 1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door. 2. Finish: Same as for door. 3. Provide mortar guard boxes for hardware cut-outs in frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted. 4. Anchors: a. In masonry walls, provide 0.156" thick wire-type or with adjustable 16 gauge, A60 T- strap not less than2" x 10". b. In stud partitions, provide 18 gauge steel anchors welded to inside of jambs. c. Floor anchors to be 14 gauge welded to inside of jamb. 5. Corners to be mitered and fully welded and ground smooth. 6. Provide with integral 5/8" integral stop. B. Exterior Door Frames: Face welded, seamless with joints filled. 1. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 2. Exterior opening frames to be 14 gauge, A70 minimum. 3. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08710. C. Interior Door Frames, Non-Fire-Rated: Fully welded type. 1. For openings 4'-0" wide or less: 16 gauge, A70 minimum. 2. For openings wider than 4'-0": 14 gauge, A70 minimum. D. Sound-Rated Door Frames: Knock-down type. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Louvers: Roll formed steel with overlapping frame; finish same as door components; factory- installed. 1. Provide Anemostat model AFDL, roll-formed 20 gauge steel louver blades with 18 gauge frame. Mountflush into doors without overlapping moldings on surface of door facing sheets. 2. Louver blade to be inverted V blade, sight proof, stationary type. 3. In Fire-Rated Doors: UL-listed fusible link louver, same rating as door. B. Glazing: As specified in Section 08800, factory installed. 1. Provide Anemostat model #LOPRP 20 gauge frame, welded to security side of door, galvanized. 2. Glazing to be 1/4" thick tempered and fire rated where required. Refer to Section 08800. C. Grout for Frames: Portland cement grout of maximum 4-inch slump for hand troweling; thinner pumpable grout is prohibited. 2.06 FINISH MATERIALS A. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard. B. Bituminous Coating: Asphalt emulsion or other high-build, water-resistant, resilient coating. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted, with bituminous coating, prior to installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and NAAMM HMMA 840. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES Specifications 08110 - 3 B. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction. C. Grout frames in masonry construction, using hand trowel methods; brace frames so that pressure of grout before setting will not deform frames. D. Coordinate installation of hardware. E. Coordinate installation of glazing. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Clearances Between Door and Frame: As specified in ANSI A250.8. B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in (1.5 mm) measured with straight edge, corner to corner. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement. B. Adjust sound control doors so that seals are fully engaged when door is closed. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES Specifications 08110 - 4 SECTION 09305 - MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING AT TILE INSTALLATION LOCATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Waterproofing at toilet room walls, shower walls. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07140 - Fluid-Applied Waterproofing. B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. C. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies. D. Section 09300 - Tile: Ceramic Tile Materials. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series - American National Standards for Installation of Ceramic Tile; 1999. B. ASTM C 627 - Standard Test Method for Evaluating Ceramic Floor Tile Installation Systems Using the Robinson-Type Floor Tester; 1993. C. ASTM D 751 - Standard Test Methods for Coated Fabrics; 1998. D. ASTM D 2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness; 1997. E. ASTM D 4397 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial, and Agricultural Applications; 2000. F. ASTM E 96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 1995. G. TCA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation; Tile Council of America; 2001. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical information for each product specified. C. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's printed instructions for each product. D. Maintenance Instructions: Include cleaning and stain removal methods and cleaning solutions recommended. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm specializing in manufacture of tile installation materials, including mortars, grouts, and adhesives, with minimum 10 years experience and ISO 9001 certification. 1. Proper usage of specified materials. B. Pre-lnstallation Meeting: At least three weeks prior to commencing tile work conduct a meeting at the project site to discuss contract requirements and job conditions; require the attendance of tile installers, representative of installation materials manufacturer, and installers of related materials; notify Architect in advance of meeting. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter or other causes. B. Store materials subject to damage by freezing or overheating, including latex, organic, and epoxy materials, at room temperature if possible. C. Deliver and store materials on site at least 24 hours before work begins. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after installation to comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's printed recommendations. B. Vent temporary heaters to exterior to prevent damage to tile work from carbon dioxide build-up. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING AT TILE INSTALLATION LOCATIONS Addendum # 1 09305-1 C. Maintain temperatures at not less than 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) and not more than 100 degrees F (38 degrees C) in tiled areas during installation and for 7 days after completion, unless other temperatures are required by referenced installation standards or manufacturer's written instructions. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's standard written 10-year warranty, covering materials and labor for replacement of defective materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: LATICRETE International, Inc., which is located at: 1 Laticrete Park N. ; Bethany, CT 06524-3423; Toll Free Tel: 800-243-4788; Tel: 203- 393-0010; Email: request info (technicalservices@laticrete.com ); Web: www.laticrete.com B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600. C. Obtain products from a single manufacturer. 2.2 WATERPROOFING AND ANTI-FRACTURE MEMBRANE A. Laticrete 9235 Waterproofing Membrane: Thin cold-applied liquid rubber membrane reinforced with fabric; capable of providing adequate bond for thin-bed mortar; non- toxic, non-flammable, and non-hazardous during storage, mixing, application, and when cured. 1. Thickness: 0.020 inch (0.5 mm) nominal. 2. Breaking Strength: 2950 psi (20.4 MPa), min. in accordance with ASTM D 751. 3. Elongation at Break: 20 to 30 percent, min. in accordance with ASTM D 751. 4. Bond Strength: 250 psi (1.7 MPa), min. in accordance with ANSI A118.4. 5. Hydrostatic Resistance: 120 psi (827 kPa), min. in accordance with ASTM D 751 (modified). 6. Water Vapor Permeance: 2.88 perms (165 ng/Pa sm) in accordance with ASTM E 96. 7. Water Permeability: None, in accordance with FS TT-C-555 (modified). 8. Service Rating: Passing ASTM C 627 cycles 1-14 (TCA "Extra Heavy"). 9. Certified by IAPMO as shower pan liner. 2.3 SILICONE SEALANT A. Laticrete Latasil Tile: Single component neutral cure silicone sealant designed for exterior and interior applications for ceramic tile & stone applications. 1. Tack Free Time at 77 Degrees F (25C), 50 percent RH: 40 Minutes. 2. Tooling Time: 7-10 minutes. 3. Durometer Hardness - Shore A 25 Tensile Strength: 225 psi (1.6MpA). 4. Dynamic joint movement: +1-25 percent. 5. Weatherability, 10,000 hours QUV Weather-O-Meter: No Change. B. Laticrete Latasil 9118 Primer: Single component primer designed to increase adhesion of Laticrete Latasil to various substrates in wet service applications. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to receive tile work and conditions under which tile will be installed. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING AT TILE INSTALLATION LOCATIONS Addendum # 1 09305-2 B. Do not proceed with tile waterproofing membrane underlayment and tile work until surfaces and conditions comply with requirements indicated in reference tile installation standard and manufacturer's printed instructions. C. Surface temperature must be between 45-90 degrees F during applications and for 24 hours after installation. 3.2 PRE-TREATMENT A. Pre-treatment of cracks and joints. 1. Pre-treat cracks and joints with membrane liquid approximately 8 inches wide over substrate cracks, cold joints and board joints using paint brush or roller with a heavy napped roller cover. 2. Place 6" (150 mm) wide LATICRETE Waterproofing/Anti-Fracture Fabric into the wet waterproofing membrane liquid. 3. Press down on waterproofing/anti-fracture fabric with brush or roller until the waterproofing membrane liquid "bleeds" through from below. 4. Apply another liberal coat of waterproofing membrane liquid over the entire surface of the waterproofing/anti-fracture fabric. B. Pre-treatment of corners and seams. 1. Apply a liberal coat of waterproofing membrane liquid approximately 8" wide over substrate coves, corners, seams, joints and changes in plane using a paint brush or roller with a heavy napped roller cover. 2. Fold 6" wide waterproofing/anti-fracture fabric in half and place it into the coat of wet waterproofing membrane liquid. 3. Flash waterproofing/anti-fracture fabric 3" on walls and other vertical surfaces. 4. Press down on waterproofing/anti-fracture fabric with brush or roller until the waterproofing membrane liquid "bleeds" through from below. 5. Apply another liberal coat of waterproofing membrane liquid over the entire surface of the waterproofing/anti-fracture fabric. C. Pre-treatment of penetrations. 1. Pack any gaps around pipes, lights or other penetrations with a compressible backer rod and LATICRETE Latasil. 2. Apply a liberal coat of waterproofing membrane liquid around penetration opening. 3. Imbed pieces of 6" wide waterproofing/anti-fracture fabric into waterproofing membrane liquid. 4. Cover with a second coat of waterproofing membrane liquid. 5. When dry, seal flashing with LATICRETE Latasil. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Allow any pre-treated areas to dry to the touch. B. Apply a liberal coat of waterproofing membrane liquid with brush or roller over substrate including pre-treated areas. C. Flash waterproofing membrane up over pre-treated comers, so such areas have two layers of waterproofing/anti-fracture fabric. D. Apply another liberal coat of waterproofing membrane liquid over waterproofing/anti-fracture fabric to saturate it. E. Let topcoat dry to the touch, approximately 1-3 hours @ 70°F and 50% RH. F. Make another liberal coat of waterproofing membrane liquid to seal entire surface. G When last coat has dried to the touch, inspect final surface for pinholes, voids, thin spots or other defects. Use additional waterproofing membrane liquid to seal defects. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Provide protection for newly installed membrane, even if covered with a thin bed ceramic tile, stone or brick installation, against exposure to rain or other water for a minimum of 5 days @ 70°F and 50% RH. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING AT TILE INSTALLATION LOCATIONS Addendum # 1 09305-3 SECTION 10400 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Interior changeable modular signs, mounted on a perforated chassis. B. Emergency evacuation maps. C. Exterior wall mounted panel signs. D. Exterior dimensional letters of cut metal construction. E. Illuminated exit signs (refer to Division 16) F. Dedication Plaque. G. Traffic signs. H. Exterior accessible parking signage as shown on Drawings. I. Exterior accessibility signage as shown on the Drawings. J. All attachments and accessories necessary to provide a complete installation. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 04200 - Concrete Masonry Units B. Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts C. Section 15190 - Mechanical Identification. D. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification. E. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division I of these Specifications. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2003. B. ATBCB ADAAG - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines; 2002. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comprehensive Signage Provider: Client is seeking one, comprehensive signage provider of both interior and exterior signage. B. Fabricator's Qualifications: 1. Fabricator shall have a minimum of 20 years full time experience producing signage of similar scope and complexity to that indicated. 2. Fabricator shall provide ISO 9001 quality control standards. C. Installer's Qualifications: 1. Work to be performed only by workers who are completely familiar with the published recommendations of the manufacturer of the material being used. D. Regulatory Requirements: Products shall meet requirements of the Americans With Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG) and local amendments and modifications. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility IDENTIFICATION DEVICES Specifications 10400-1 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit product data for specified products. Include material details for each sign specified. C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles, and product components, including dimensions, anchorage, and accessories. D. Samples: Submit supplier's standard color chart for selection purposes and selected colors for verification purposes. E. Installation: Submit supplier's installation instructions. F. Closeout Submittals: 1. Submit Operation and Maintenance Data for installed products, including precautions against harmful cleaning materials and methods. 2. Submit warranty documents specified herein G. Signage Schedule: Provide information sufficient to completely define each sign for fabrication, including room number, room name, other text to be applied, sign and letter sizes, fonts, overall dimensions of each letter and colors. 1. When room numbers to appear on signs differ from those on the drawings, include the drawing room number on schedule. 2. When content of signs is indicated to be determined later, request such information from Owner through Architect at least 2 months prior to start of fabrication; upon request, submit preliminary schedule. 3. Submit for approval by Owner through Architect prior to fabrication. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package signs as required to prevent damage before installation. B. Package room and door signs in sequential order of installation, labeled by floor or building. C. Store tape adhesive at normal room temperature. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install tape adhesive when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by manufacturer. B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of signs. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. 1. Project Warranty: • Sign fabricator shall guarantee work for a period of three (3) years from the date of acceptance covering all static (non-digital) interior and exterior signage provided by the fabricator, agreeing to repair or replace work which has failed as a result of defects in materials, workmanship or installation. Upon notification of such defects, within the warranty period, fabricator will make necessary repairs or replacement at the convenience of Owner's Representative. 2. 5-Year Supplemental Guarantee: • Five (5) years from product ship date, sign fabricator guarantees to be able to make supplementary deliveries of static (non-digital) interior and exterior signage provided by the fabricator with a similar functionality and design (shape, color, typography and graphics) as delivered under the original order, unless otherwise specifically stated. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility IDENTIFICATION DEVICES Specifications 10400-2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SIGNAGE SYSTEMS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. ASI Signage Innovations • Design is based on use of standard products manufactured by ASI Signage Innovations, 3860 W. Northwest Highway, Suite 350, Dallas, Texas 75220, and trade names of that manufacturer are used herein, (www.asisiqnage.com) 2. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. B. Interior Modular Interchangeable Signs: 1. Acceptable Product: Infinity Sign Series, composed of the following mounting types: • Wall Mounted with installation clip/spacer 2. Chassis: • Material: Stainless steel, die perforated 18 ga. sheet with natural finish. • Module Attachment: LocTab™: Tamper resistant attachment, injection molded black nylon. • Manufacturing tolerance: +/- 0.008 in. • Size: 6"x6" 3. ADA-Ready™ Panels: • Material: Provide tactile copy and Grade 2 Braille raised 1/32 inch minimum from plaque first surface by manufacturer's phenolic photopolymer bonded process. Signface of single material, tactile characters and Braille integral to photopolymer. Adhesive-fixed characters are not acceptable. 1. Finish: Two-component high temperature cured polyester coating per manufacturer's standard for phenolic photopolymer material. 2. Panel size: (1) 3"x3" and (1) 1 1/2"x6" 3. Panel color: Lead SC-914 4. Text or graphic color: White SC-901 5. Letter style, letter size and layout position: • Century Gothic, all capital letters; 5/8" at room name, 1" at room number 6. Text or graphic schedule: See room schedule. 4. Graphic Panels: • Logo Panel: 1. Material: Aluminum alloy per manufacturer's standard. 2. Finish: Two-component polyester coating per manufacturer's standard 3. Size: 3"x3" 4. Panel color: White SC-901 5. Graphic technique: Screen process - image to be provided by Owner • Linear Accent: 1. Material: Aluminum alloy per manufacturer's standard. 2. Finish: Two-component polyester coating per manufacturer's standard 3. Size: 3/4"x6" 4. Panel color: Tomato Red SC-203 5. Type: A-Square 6. Graphic technique: Screen process - image to be provided by Owner • Accessory Trim Panel: 1. Material: Aluminum alloy per manufacturer's standard. 2. Finish: Two-component polyester coating per manufacturer's standard 3. Size: (2) 3/8"x3" 4. Panel color: Orange SC-301, Yellow SC-401 5. Type: A with chassis edge cover 6. Graphic technique: Screen process - image to be provided by Owner Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility IDENTIFICATION DEVICES Specifications 10400-3 Room Name Elev. Machine Room - Room 102 Hallway - Room 1 1 3 General Storage- Room 104 Range Master's Office - Room 105 Armory/Secured Weapons Storage -Room 106 Tele/Data - Room 107 Uni-Sex Shower - Room 108 Janitor's Room - Room 110 Conference Room - Room 114 Storage - Room 1 1 5 Vestibule - Room 1 1 7 Range Control Room - Room 118 Weapons Cleaning Area - Room 1 1 1 Vestibule - Room 120 PRISM Room - Room 122 Range Equip. Storage II - Room 128 25- Yard Range - Room 1 30 Divisible Training Classroom - Room 201 Divisible Training Classroom - Room 201 Classroom Storage I - Room 202 Lettering and Braille Elevator Machine Room Hallway General Storage Oil Storage Armory + Secured Weapons Storage Telephone + Data Locker Room Janitor's Room Conference Room Storage 25- Yard Shooting Range Range Control Room Weapons Cleaning Room 100-Yard Shooting Range PRISM Room Range Equipment Storage II 25- Yard Shooting Range Training Classroom I Training Classroom II Training Classroom Storage I Floor Level First First First First First First First First First First First First First First First First First Second Second Second Quantity 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 Door # on Plans 03 04 06,07 05 08,09 10 11 14 16 17 19 22,23 21 24 18 34 32 51,52 53,54 55,56 Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Specifications IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 10400-4 Vestibule - Room 203 Janitor Room - Room 204 Classroom Storage II - Room 205 Stair Janitor's Room Training Classroom Storage II Second Second Second 1 1 1 61 60 59 5. Restroom Signs: • Size: 12" triangle and 12" circle complying with the pertinent requirement of Title 24 of California Administrative code • Pictograms: Identify the names "MEN", "WOMEN" and "UNI-SEX", and braille • Thickness: 1/4" • Panel Color: Lead SC-914 • Text Color: White SC-901 • Trim/Edge Color: White SC-901 • Text Style: Century Gothic • Margins: Center/Center • Mounting: Screw mounting - 60" high above finish floor to centerline of sign. Room Name Women's Restroom - Room 109 Men's Restroom - Room 111 Uni-Sex Restroom I - Room 132 Uni-Sex Restroom II - Room 133 Women's Restroom - Room 207 Men's Restroom - Room 208 Lettering and Braille Women's Restroom Men's Restroom Uni-Sex Restroom Uni-Sex Restroom Women's Restroom Men's Restroom Floor Level First First First First Second Second Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 Door # on Plans 15 13 43 44 57 58 C. Exterior Wall Mounted Panel Signs 1. Acceptable Product: COMPASS Exterior Panel Sign System • Wall Mounted Panel: 1. Material: Aluminum alloy per manufacturer's standard. 2. Finish: Two-phase, high temperature cured polyester color coating per manufacturer's standard • Primer: 2 mil thick chromium layer for optimum surface coat adhesion and weatherability. • Top Coat: Two-component, water-based, non-toxic, lead-free, zero emissions, high temperature cured polyester coating of 2-3 mil thickness. 3. Panel Size: 6"x6" 4. Panel Thickness: Regular Panel, 1" (25mm) wide 5. Panel color: Lead SC-914 6. Text or graphic color: White SC-901 7. Letter style and size: • Century Gothic, all capital letters; 5/8" high for room name, 1" high for room number. 8. Mounting: Manufacturer's standard injection molded mounting clips. • Minimum of four (4) per sign. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Specifications IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 10400-5 Sign Materials and Components: 1. Aluminum Panels: Meeting ASTM B209, alloy EN 5052 H12, minimum 0.05" (1.25mm) thick. 2. Aluminum Extrusions: Meeting ASTM B221, alloy 6063-T5. 3. Accessories: Provide end caps, couplings, coupling fittings, mounting fittings, interchangeable fittings, and other hardware and accessories for a complete installation. Room Name Elec. Room -Room 123 Air Compressor/Fire Riser Room -Room 125 Range Equip. Storage I - Room 127 Range Equip. Storage II - Room 128 Fire Training Storage - Room 129 Bullet Trap Bullet Trap Lettering and Braille Electrical Room Air Compressor + Fire Riser Room Range Equipment Storage I Range Equipment Storage II Fire Training Storage 25-Yard Range Bullet Trap 100-Yard Range Bullet Trap Floor Level First First First First First First First Quantity 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 Door # on Plans 27 28 31,33 35 36,37 38/39 41/42 D. Dimensional Cut Metal Letters - Building Identification and Address 1. Acceptable Product: Series LPS Cut Metal Dimensional Letters • Material: Aluminum with Polished Face, Satin Sides • Fabricated Letters: 1. Letterstyle: Century Gothic 2. Text and Letter Cap Height: • 10" high: "CITY OF CARLSBAD" 8" high: "JOINT FIRST RESPONDERS" 8" high: "TRAINING FACILITY" • 24" high: "2560" 3. Letter Depth: 1" • Mounting Method: Projected Stud Mount • See Drawings for location of signage. E. Dedication Plaque 1. Acceptable Product: Sign Etch™ II Series • Material: Stainless Steel • Size: 18"x24" - Portrait Orientation • Usage: Exterior • Thickness: 3/8" • Edge Detail: Square • Edge Finish: Brushed • Raised Surface Finish: Brushed • Recessed Surface Finish: N/A Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Specifications IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 10400-6 2. 3. • Installation Method: Mechanical Fasteners (MH) 1. Concealed mounting with threaded rods; contractor to coordinate mounting with adjacent surfaces. • Text Letterstyle: Century Gothic Contractor to provide a template for the City of Carlsbad to review and provide language. After provided language is received, camera ready artwork from the manufacturer will be submitted for review and final approval. F. Emergency Evacuation Maps: 1. Allow for one map per locations specified below. 2. Use clear plastic panel silk-screened on reverse, in brushed aluminum frame, screw-mounted. Room Name Lobby -Room 101 Check-in Gathering Space - Room 1 1 6 Vestibule - 203 Second Floor Lobby - 209A Floor Level First First Second Second Quantity 1 1 1 1 Location To the left of the elevator door. To the right of the door #09. To the right of the door #61 . To the left of the elevator door. G. Site Signage - Refer to Drawings 1. Exterior Parking Signage: • Provide the following signs: 1. Visitor Parking Sign 2. Van Accessible Parking Sign 3. Handicap Parking Sign 2. Exterior Accessibility Signage 3. Provide Architect with sign color charts, type styles and color and sizes 4. Mounting: Center mount; base mounting by direct embedment in concrete footings H. Low-Level Self-Illuminated Exit Signs: 1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Light Panel Technologies 2. Exit signage as described in the Drawings. 3. Illuminated directional exit signs: • Die cast aluminum series • Black housing with brushed aluminum face 4. Low-level self illuminated exit signs. Location Lobby -Room 101 Hallway -Room 112 Hallway -Room 124 Stair - Room 1 26 Floor Level First First First First Quantity 2 1 1 1 Door # on Plans 01,02 12 26 29 Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Specifications IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 10400-7 Vestibule - Room 124 Range Equipment Storage I - Room 127 Fire Training Storage - Room 129 25-Yard Range - Room 1 30 100-Yard Range -Room 131 Second Floor Lobby- Room 209A Vestibule - Room 203 Stair -Room 126 First First First First First Second Second Second 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 30 33 37 20,32 25,50 Above egress stair down to 1st Floor 61 62 I. Owner Provided Signage: 1. Contractor to coordinate the location and mounting of all Owner provided signage. 2. The following is a listing of the Owner provided signage: • Vinyl Art work - see Section 12100 • All shooting range safety signage PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. B. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations as approved by the Owner, using only the approved mounting materials, and locating all components firmly into position and plumb. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Install neatly, with horizontal edges level. D. Locate signs where indicated: 1. Room and Door Signs: Locate on wall at latch side of door with centerline of sign at 60 inches (1525 mm) above finished floor. 2. If no location is indicated obtain Owner's instructions. E. Protect from damage until Substantial Completion; repair or replace damage items. 3.03 CLEANING, PROTECTION AND REPAIR A. Repair scratches and other damage which might have occurred during installation. Replace components where repairs were made but are still visible to the unaided eye from a distance of 10 feet. B. Remove temporary coverings and protection to adjacent work areas. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior to Owner's acceptance. C. Remove construction debris from project in accordance with provisions in Division 1. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Specifications IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 10400 - 8 SECTION 16721 FIRE ALARM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Scope A. Work Included: This specification document provides the requirement for Simplex 4100U Fire Alarm Control Panel. The system shall include a digital communication module (DACT), a CRT terminal, a printer, system cabinet, associated peripheral devices, programming, wiring, and other relevant component for a complete operational full automatic fire alarm system. All labor, materials, appliances, tools, equipment necessary for and incidental to performing all operations in connection with furnishing, delivery and installation of the work of this Section, complete, as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. Work includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Examine all other specifications sections and drawings for related work required to be included as work under Division Sixteen. 2. General provisions and requirements for electrical work. 1.02 Submittals A. Submit eight (8) copies of the following to the Architect/Enginneer for approval: 1. A listing of all fire alarm components and equipment including the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) listing numbers. 2. CSFM listing sheets of all devices being used. 3. Manufacturers standard catalog data for fire alarm components. a. The submittal shall be arranged in the order of the Specification and shall list the specification paragraph number, the name, the proposed model and manufacturer for each item as well as a reference indicating the specific piece of data which can be easily located in the brochure. b. The manufacturer's data sheets shall be marked to indicate the specific item being proposed in cases where the sheet covers several types or sizes of item. The data sheet shall completely describe the proposed item. c. Where modification to the equipment is necessary to meet the operational requirements of the contract documents, the data sheets shall include complete mechanical and electrical shop drawings detailing the modification. 4. A listing of the outlet rough-in needed for every device and equipment item. The applicable symbol which illustrates that rough-in item on the job plans shall be drawn on the proposal, opposite the description of the rough-in to facilitate locating the data by field personnel. B. Provide record drawings to City at end of construction showing entire fire alarm system including 1/8" scale redrawn building plans showing all devices, panels and interconnecting wiring. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Fire Alarm Specifications 16721 -1 1.03 Applicable Standards A. The equipment shall be listed, labeled, and approved for the application shown in contract documents, as fire alarm equipment complying with the following requirements: 1. Codes and Standards: a. 2006 IBC and 2007 California Amendments (2007 California Building Code - Part 2, Title 24, CCR) b. 2006 UMC and 2007 California Amendments (2007 California Mechanical Code - Part 4, Title 24 CCR) c. 2006 UPC and 2007 California Amendments (2007 California Plumbing Code - Part 5, Title 24 CCR) d. 2006 International Fire Code with 2007 California State Amendments (2007 California Fire Code - Part 9, Title 24 CCR) e. 2005 National Electrical Code (NEC) and 2007 California Amendments (2007 California Electrical Code - Part 3, Title 24 CCR) f. National Fire Protection Association's - National Fire Code 2. The fire alarm system shall conform to CBC Sec. 305.9 CFC Article 10, Article 760 of California Electrical code, NFPA 72, and the applicable Standards and Guides referenced in CBC Chapter 35. B. Written certification by the fire alarm equipment manufacturer shall be submitted to the Architect, stating that the system and its component parts are listed and approved by the California State Fire Marshal and the installation has been tested, is operational and conforms to the requirements as set forth in Part 3, Article 24, Title 19, California Code of Regulations. 1.04 Equipment and Installing Qualifications A. The specification is based on the equipment of manufacturers who have been approved by the City and the manufacturers herein named shall be considered as meeting the requirements of this specification. For all items which are identified by part number and manufacturer the Performance specifications which are published in the most recent manufacturer's data sheets available at the time of bidding this project shall be applicable to the present work as though fully written out herein. B. All equipment shall conform to all local applicable codes and ordinances, and shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. C. The Contractor shall maintain a fully equipped service organization capable of furnishing adequate repair service to the equipment. The Contractor shall be financially able to provide a performance bond covering the work and the guarantee described. The Contractor shall provide that bond if requested. D. Installation Certification: 1. Work and material for cables, cable terminations and related components shall be performed by certified installers. The installer shall be certified by the respective product manufacturers. 2. The manufacturers of the indicated work and material, shall provide a installer education/training and certification program for the supplied products. 3. The installers performing the Contract work for the indicated products, shall have attended and successfully completed each of the respective manufacturer's installation training education programs for the specified products. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Fire Alarm Specifications 16721-2 4. Submit six (6) copies of the manufacturer's certifications for each installer performing the work. The submittal shall be approved prior to initiating any related contract work. 5. Contract material installed and work performed by installers not complying with these requirements shall be removed. Removal of work and material not in compliance with these requirements shall done at the CONTRACTOR'S expense, without any additional cost to the contract and without any additional contract completion due date extensions. New material and work required to replace the non-compiling removed work and material shall be provided at the CONTRACTOR'S expense, without any additional cost to the contract and without any additional contract completion due date extensions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Acceptable Manufacturers A. Single Source Approved Installer: The City of Carlsbad's accepted single source installer of the Fire Alarm system and integration shall be performed by the below listed source. Products and Equipment listed within this section are based on compatibility and standards of the existing Fire Alarm system installed elsewhere in the city under a separate contract. Substitutions proposed by the single source approved installer shall be considered under the provisions of Section 01030 of these specifications. 1. Company: Simplex Grinnell 3568 Ruffin Road South San Diego, CA92123 P: (858) 633-9100 x. 2107 F: (858) 633-9101 2. Contact: Kevin Wunderly, Electronic Service Sales Consultant 3. Website: www.simplexgrinnell.com 2.02 General System Operation A. System shall be microprocessor-based, addressable, and power-limited with Class A or Class B supervised circuits. 1. The microprocessor shall execute all supervisory and control programming to detect, report the failure or disconnection of any system module or peripheral device and initiate programmed control sequences. An isolated supervision "watchdog" circuit shall monitor the microprocessor and, upon failure, shall activate the system trouble circuits. 2. The fire detection and alarm system shall consist of main control panel, transponder panel(s), notification alarm devices, remote annunciator, automatic detection devices, manual stations, printer, and CRT/keyboard, installed and wired in accordance with the drawings and shall function as specified herein. 3. The system shall be programmable in the field, by a non-computer trained person. All programmed information shall be stored in non- volatile memory. 4. The system shall operate both addressable and non-addressable ionization, thermal and photoelectric detecting devices, manual stations, water-flow switches, and external control modules. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Fire Alarm Specifications 16721-3 5. The control panel shall provide power, annunciation, supervision and control for the fire detection and alarm system. The system shall be designed such that alarm indications override trouble and control conditions. 6. External circuit supervision shall not require additional wires other than the pair used for detection or alarm (only two wires shall be used from the control panel to each loop of initiating devices and two wires for the notification alarm devices). These two wires shall provide both supervision and notification alarm signals. There shall be no loss of supervision for Class "B" wired addressable devices. Class "A" supervision may be provided by adding an additional pair of wires. B. Alarm Conditions: 1. Actuation of any manual or automatic alarm initiating device, connected to the system shall cause the following automatic functions. a. All notification alarm signaling units shall activate continuously. Audible notification alarms shall sound the California State coded signal. b. The respective zone alarm lamp or annunciator alpha numeric readout on the central control panel, and remote annunciator panel, shall be activated. c. Activate the Digital Alarm Communicator system. 2. Actuation of HVAC air duct smoke detectors shall stop the designated fans and motors in the building's air distribution system. 3. Actuation of smoke detectors on either side of smoke doors shall energize the release mechanism on the smoke door causing the door to close. 4. Notification alarm signal duration shall be capable of continuous sounding or adjustable from three to ten minutes. 5. Perform any additional functions as specified herein or shown on the drawings. C. Trouble Condition: 1. A single open or single trouble condition in a manual or automatic fire initiating wiring circuit shall activate the respective zone trouble lamp or annunciator readout on the fire alarm control panel and sound a trouble signal at the control panel. 2. A single open or single trouble condition in the notification alarm signaling wiring circuit shall activate the trouble lamp or annunciator readout in the control panel and sound a trouble signal at the control panel. 3. 120 volt AC normal power shall be monitored with indication by a "power on" lamp. Upon normal power outage, the system shall activate a power trouble condition lamp or annunciator readout, and indicate a trouble condition. 4. The control panel shall monitor the standby batteries and, upon a low battery condition, activate the low battery battery lamp or annunciator readout and indicate a trouble condition. 5. System ground detection shall be provided for the entire system. Upon ground detection, activate the ground detection lamp or annunciator readout and indicate a trouble condition. D. Control panels employing alpha numeric readouts shall display the trouble condition along with a prompt to review the list chronologically. The end of the list shall be indicated. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Fire Alarm Specifications 16721-4 2.03 Fire Alarm Control Panel A. General: 1. The fire alarm control panel shall be software programmable, microprocessor controlled, solid state, electronic integrated system. The panel shall be the product of one manufacturer. The control panel shall provide power, annunciation, supervision and control for the detection and alarm system. The detection system shall remain 100% operational, responding to an alarm condition while in the routine maintenance mode. 2. Addressable detection and control devices shall be individually identified by the system, and any quantity of addressable detection devices shall be in alarm and any quantity of addressable control units shall be operable at any time up to the total number connected to the system. 3. The microprocessor shall access the system program, which is stored in non-volatile programmable memory, for all control-by-event (CBE) functions. The system program shall not be lost upon failure of both primary and secondary power. Volatile memory shall not be acceptable. 4. A means shall be provided for acknowledging each abnormal condition. Each activation of the appropriate acknowledge button shall sequentially acknowledge every point in the system. After all the points have been acknowledged, the LEDs shall glow steady and the panel audible signal will be silenced. The total number of alarms, supervisory, and trouble conditions shall be displayed along with a prompt to review each list chronologically. The end of the list shall be so indicated. 5. An alpha numeric annunciator readout shall indicate on the control panel the activation by type, loop, and address of the specific device, sub-loop or alarm/monitor/control point via an alpha numeric display. An audible alert, shall sound at the control panel and an alarm light shall flash. 6. If the microprocessor fails, the system shall executive a default signaling program. This program shall enable the control panel to sound the audible signals and summon the Fire Department. In addition, a red LED shall light to indicate the communication loop wherein the alarm originated. Inability of the system to sound signals or summon the fire department during microprocessor failure shall not be acceptable. 7. Protected access to the system controls shall be provided to allow the user/operator access to the following system functions: a. Status of all addressable points. b. Status of all events logged. c. Set/change the real-time clock and date. d. Perform an operational manual test of the system from the control panel, including actuation of any initiating device and trouble circuit without alarming the remote central station. The panel shall automatically return to normal mode in the event the panel remains unattended in the service mode. e. Retrieve from event log the last 150 alarms, or control points and 150 trouble conditions. 8. Individual input (monitor) and output (control) device addressability shall all be performed on the same pair of wires. Wiring shall be Class "A" or "B". When Class "B" wiring is used, no special wiring sequence shall be required on addressable device circuits. An unlimited number of wiring branches shall be permitted with no loss of supervision. 9. A minimum of 25% spare addressable monitor, trouble and control points shall be provided. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Fire Alarm Specifications 16721-5 B. Cabinet: 1. A metal tamper resistant cabinet shall contain the control panel components. Panel shall be surface or flush mounting as indicated on the drawings. Provide a full height tamper resistant hinged locking cabinet door. The door shall have transparent, high impact windows to allow visual observation of all indicators and switches without opening the panel door. 2. "In-out" circuit conductors shall terminate on numbered screw-type terminals. 3. All groups of circuits or common equipment shall be clearly marked and shall be expandable by inserting interchangeable units. C. The control panel shall provide positive protection against the fire alarm system inadvertently being left in a non-operating status. The alarm system shall automatically restore and resound alarms and trouble signals, if subsequent alarm initiating or trouble signals are received under any of the following conditions: 1. After the alarm or trouble silence switch have been activated. 2. Prior to resetting system after previous alarm or trouble conditions. D. The system indicating and operational control devices shall be mounted on the control panel face behind the panel door and shall provide the following minimum functions: 1. Individual visual indicating pilot lights annunciator or alpha numeric readout to monitor the following alarm system conditions: a. Input power. b. System common alarm. c. System common trouble. d. Alarm or trouble signal silenced. e. Ground fault. f. Battery condition. g. Each individual alarm, control or initiating zone-activation, h. Each individual alarm, control or notification zone-trouble. i. Report, by specific device number, any device removed from an addressable initiating circuit, all other devices shall continue to function. 2. Manual control switches to allow the following system controls: a. Alarm silence. b. Trouble silence. c. Test all indicating pilot lights and readouts. d. System reset, including remote devices connected to the alarm panel. e. Alarm test to initiate an alarm condition from the control panel. f. Alarm disconnect for system testing without activating the Digital Alarm Communicator system. g. Changing the status of configured circuits (arming or disarming and changing status of relays). If any change in status degrades system operation as configured, a trouble condition shall be reported and remain until system operation again meets configured status. h. Perform multiple operations at the same time. These operations shall include but not be limited to timed functions and multiple configured sequences. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Fire Alarm Specifications 16721-6 E. Alarm initiating zone modules: 1. Shall supervise and accept remote alarm actuating device input signals. An alpha numeric readout shall indicate separate zone alarm and trouble indicators for each zone. 2. Zones shall be compatible, and designed to operate with the connected initiating devices either addressable or non-addressabe type. 3. A spare double throw set of software programmable auxiliary alarm relay contacts shall be provided for control of remote devices for each zone. Contacts shall be rated 120 volt-60 HZ 3 Ampere. 4. Each device on the system shall report as its own unique address. F. Notification alarm signal control: 1. Shall supervise and activate remote notification alarm devices. 2. Notification alarm shall be compatible and designed to properly operate with the connected audio and visual notification alarm devices, with no signal degradation. 3. The notification alarm shall provide group notification signal control of all notification zones. 4. The alarm modules shall be field resettable to provide either continuous or coded notification alarm signals. The coded alarm signal shall provide an intermittent "on-off" pulsed sound activation of audible notification alarm devices. 5. A notification alarm circuit trouble indicating readout shall be provided for each notification zone. G. Automatic ground detection shall detect either positive or negative voltages when earth connections of 50,000 OHMS or less occur, and activate the ground trouble signal. 1. A ground fault code shall provide indication of either a positive or negative ground fault and shall operate the general trouble devices as specified herein but shall not cause an alarm to be sounded. 2. A short circuit error message shall be a standard feature of the fire alarm control panel. Each communication loop shall be monitored for short circuits and shall have a distinctive error message for visual indication of circuits and operating trouble devices as specified herein but shall not cause an alarm to be sounded. H. Power Supply: 1. The power supply shall be adequately sized to properly operate the equipment, including remotely connected, spare and future indicated equipment with all alarm dvices in alarm condition. Provide 20% spare power supply capacity for future expansion. Provide transfer modules and multiple power supplies as required for proper operation. 2. Input voltage 120 volt 60 HZ. A.C. 3. Surge transient voltage protection on the input and output phases of the power supply shall be provided. 4. Supervised voltage types (i.e. 120V-60HZ A.C., 24 volt A.C., 24 Volt D.C., etc.) required by special connected equipment shall be supplied, including but not limited to: a. Alarm initiating devices. b. Door hold-open or closing devices. c. Automatic fire doors and dampers. d. Notification alarm devices. e. Control and annunciator panels. f. Fire and smoke dampers. 5. A solid-state power transfer circuit shall provide (UPS) uninterrupted power supply between internal standby power and line power Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Fire Alarm Specifications 16721-7 automatically and instantaneously if normal power fails or falls below 15% of normal ("brown out" conditions). 6. Individual circuit fuses shall be provided for smoke alarm detector power, main power supply notification circuits, battery standby power, and auxiliary output. I. Battery Back-Up Operation: 1. Internal batteries and battery power supplies shall be provided to allow continuous automatic normal operation of the entire control panel and fire alarm system after the failure of the incoming utility power. 2. Batteries shall be maintenance free, sealed, lead-acid or lead calcium or gelled electrolyte type rated 25% larger than required to provide power for the entire system upon loss of normal 120 VAC power for a period the length of time indicated on drawings with five (5) minutes of alarm signaling at the end of the period. 3. The battery charger, shall be automatic, dual rate with capacity to recharge completely discharged batteries in 18 hours. Charger shall be temperature compensated. J. Lighting and transient voltage surge protection shall be incorporated in the power supply circuit, common control circuits, signal circuits, and telephone line circuit. K. Circuitry shall be provided in the control panel to permit transmission of trouble and alarm signals over leased or privately owned telephone cables to a remote receiving panel. A reverse polarity or a masterbox circuit as required, shall be provided in the control panel. There shall be a supervised disconnect switch to allow testing of the fire alarm signal without transmitting an alarm signal to the central station. L. The alpha numeric annunciator (printer and CRT/keyboard) shall list upon request: 1. Alarms with time, date and location. 2. Troubles with time, date and location. 3. Status of output functions, "on" or "off. 4. Sensitivity of addressable smoke detectors. 5. Detection device number, type and location. 6. Status of remote relays, "on" or "off1. 7. Acknowledgment time and date. 8. Signal silence time and date. 9. Reset time and date. M. The system shall also provide the following: 1. Counting the number of addressable detectors within a "zone". 2. Which are in alarm. 3. Counting "zones" which are in alarm. 4. Counting the number of addressable detectors which are in alarm. 5. Alarm on the system. 6. Differentiating among types of addressable detectors such as smoke detectors, manual stations, water-flow switches, thermal detectors. 7. Assigning priorities to types of detectors, zones or groups of detectors. 8. Cross-zoning. N. Control Functions: 1. Control functions shall be assigned on the basis of multi-relational system initiation patterns of detection devices including full logic element equations using as "anding" zones, counting zones, counting devices, "anding" groups, conditional "if, "then", "or" programming and "anding" types of detection devices. 2. Control functions shall be assigned on the basis of, cycle, delay, count, time of day, day of week, day of month and with a holiday schedule of up Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Fire Alarm Specifications 16721-8 to thirty (30) holidays per year. Each addressable detection device shall report its condition to the system control unit not less than every four (4) seconds in a manner such that failure of the connections to the internal electronics of the device will result in a trouble signal which identifies the specific device involved. 3. The system shall be field programmable for the response of control points to monitored devices. 4. The operating software program shall provide programmable control for the Event-lnitiated-Programs (E.I.P.) which shall allow automatic operation of system control points in the event of a alarm condition. To program these E.I.P.'s, the system shall use a specifically designed user friendly programming language, which shall not require a knowledge of computer programming to learn and understand. 5. The operating software shall support the following additional capabilities: a. Three levels of designated and unique Priority Alarms for each point. b. Designated "Sense Mode" for status interpretation for each point. c. Designated Print/No Print/Vectoring Mode for each point. 6. The input statement defines the conditions required to activate the associated output statement. The input statement shall consist of single or multiple monitor point status, subroutine status, time comparison and the utilization of AND, OR, NOT, COUNT, and DELAY logic functions. 7. The output statement defines the action to be taken by the control panel. The output statement shall consist of activation/deactivation of single or multiple control functions, subroutines, and remote Annunciator status LED's. Output statements shall also include the "Alert" messages. 8. The software shall provide an "alert" message, unique to each point in the system, which will provide specific instructions for the operator on duty. These messages shall be up to 5 lines with up to 70 characters in each line. Each system monitor point shall have 5 specific alert messages when in alarm. Control points shall also be assigned alert messages. 9. The hardware and software shall have the capacity to accept up to 64 independent programs. Each program shall have "Edit" or "No Edit" capability. Each program shall be written in an equation format comparable to ladder-logic equations. The Equations shall consist of an input and an output statement. 10. Provide initial programming services for coding, loading and debuging the initial Owner specified programs, as part of the contract. Provide Owner with a complete programming software package, including hardware keys and cabling, and specific system data disks with each installation. 11. Programming Command Definition a. Timing command shall provide time delay and time control functions based on internal clock/calendar by time of day; day of week; day of month; month in year. b. Count command shall provide a specific number of events to occur before a control action is initiated. c. Pulse command shall provide on control for a specific period of time. d. Cycle command shall provide on-ofT control for preset periods of time. e. Print command shall provide printing of specified information after an event occurs. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Fire Alarm Specifications 16721-9 2.04 Fire Alarm Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter A. Enclosure shall be red. B. Panel shall be solid state with eight zones for off premise monitoring of the fire alarm control panel. C. System shall monitor alarm and trouble conditions. System shall be power limited. D. System shall include dual telephone line switcher for central station reporting. Telephone lines shall be supervised. E. System shall include dual battery harness, batteries, and battery charger. F. System shall be U.L. listed for central station fire signaling systems (NFPA 72). G. System shall be California State Fire Marshal approved for central station reporting. H. System shall be Simplex 5071 Series. System shall be approved for connection to the fire alarm control panel. Contractor provide and terminate all necessary cabling to interconnect Digital Communicator to City owned telephone equipment. I. Verify specific requirements with City and central station prior to submittals. 2.05 Manually Activated Alarm Initiating Devices A. An electronic, digital multiplex, addressable module shall be incorporated into each device. The module shall communicate the status and trouble condition of each device with a unique address code. The module shall communicate with and be supervised and monitored by the fire alarm control panel. B. Devices shall be suitable for use on a class "B", 2-wire supervised alarm initiating circuit. C. Numbered screw type terminals shall be provided for "in-out" connections of the alarm circuit wiring. D. The face of the station shall have lettering indicating "FIRE" and operational instructions. Stations shall be tamper resistant, semi-flush mounting. E. Auxiliary spare switch contact shall be provided for control of remote devices rated 120 volts - 60HZ, AC - SAMP minimum. F. Stations shall provide visual indication the station has been activated. A key and special tool shall be required to gain access into the station to reset the station after being activated. G. Stations shall be "nonbreak-glass" type and shall be provided with breakaway polycarbonate shields in non-administrative areas. H. RF and transient filtering shall be provided in the device electronics. I. . Pull stations shall be non-coded double action, requiring a two distinct manual "pulling" actions to initiate the fire alarm system. J. Stations installed outdoors shall be weather resistant construction, double action to activate the pull station. 2.06 Automatic Alarm Initiating Devices A. General: 1. An electronic digital, multiplex, addressable module shall be incorporated into each device. The module shall communicate the status and trouble condition of each device with a unique address code. The module shall communicate with and be supervised and monitored by the fire alarm control panel. 2. Devices shall be suitable for use on a Class "B", 2-wire supervised alarm initiating circuit. Where initiating devices are shown connected to an Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Fire Alarm Specifications 16721-10 existing system, devices shall operated on two or four wire circuits plus - 2 - wire power circuit as required by the existing equipment. 3. Numbered screw type terminals shall be provided for "in-out" connectors of the atarm circuit wiring. 4. Auxiliary double throw spare relay contact shall be provided for activation of remote rated devices 120V-60Hz, 1 Ampere minimum. 5. RF and transient filtering shall be provided in the initiating device electronics. 6. Initiating devices shall be reset from the control panel and shall not require individual resetting. B. Smoke Detector: 1. Detectors shall comply with U.L. standard 268, 167 and 168, and shall use solid state electronic circuits throughout. 2. The smoke detector shall operate on a total of two circuit wires. Alarm signaling and detector power shall use the same conductors. Detector sensitivity shall be factory set at 1.5%. 3. A fine mesh insect screen shall be provided on all detector openings. 4. The detector shall lock-in on alarm and shall provide a visual alarm/trouble indicator light. An electromechanical test feature shall provide functional testing of the unit without smoke. 5. The detector shall also incorporate a fixed temperature heat detector rated at 135 degrees F. The heat detector shall operate the alarm circuit and alarm/trouble light. a. Photo electric type smoke detectors shall employ a light emitting diode (LED) as the detector light source, activated by the presence of combustion smoke products. Failure of the LED shall activate the alarm/trouble light on the detector. b. Air duct smoke detector photo electric or ionization type for installation on a mechanical air ducts. Two air tubes shall extend into the air duct. The sampling tube shall extend across the entire width of the air duct. The second tube shall allow air to escape back into the duct. C. Fire Detector - Heat: 1. Heat detectors shall be dual action electro-thermostatic combination rate of temperature rise and fixed temperature operation. An indicator shall be visible when detector has activated. 2. The rate of rise element shall be self restoring, after activation. 3. The fixed temperature unit shall be set at 136 degrees F (190 degrees F for high temperature areas i.e. over 110 degrees F.) 4. Provide a wire guard cover for the detector. D. Fire Sprinkler Water Flow Detector: 1. Vane-type water flow detectors shall be provided on the sprinkler system piping as shown on the drawings. Detectors shall be designed for mounting on either vertical or horizontal piping, but shall not be mounted in a fitting or within 12 inches of any fitting that changes the direction of water flow. 2. The detectors shall have a sensitivity setting to signal any flow of water that equals or exceeds the discharge from one sprinkler head. 3. Detector switch mechanisms shall incorporate an instantly recycling pneumatic retard element with an adjustable range of 0 to 70 seconds. Switches shall have a minimum rated capacity of 7 amp 125 volt A.C. - .25 amp 24 volt D.C. A D.P.D.T. switch shall be actuated by a polyethylene vane extending into the waterway of the piping. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Fire Alarm Specifications 16721-11 4. Detectors shall be of weatherproof, dust tight construction and shall provide a %" inch conduit entrance. Detector shall be finished in red baked enamel. 5. Flow switch shall be sized to match the fire sprinkler riser pipe diameter. E. Fire Sprinkler Valve Tamper Switch: Tamper switch shall monitor the position of the fire sprinkler shut-off valve. Operation of the valve shall activate the switch and activate a trouble alarm. 2.07 Notification Alarm Devices A. General: 1. Notification alarm devices shall activate automatically from the control panel. Devices shall operate on a Class "B" (Style Y), 2-wire supervised alarm notification circuit. Series wired alarm devices shall not be used. 2. Numbered screw type terminals shall be provided for "in-out" connections of the alarm circuit wiring. 3. Devices shall be installed in a box, 3 1/2" deep maximum, flush mounting unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. Size as required for the alarm indicating device and wiring connections. Provide a trim ring and metal grill cover assembly. Cover assembly shall be minimum of 1/16" minimum thick flat stainless steel or aluminum. Finish color as selected by Architect. The word "fire" shall appear on the grill minimum 1/2" letters. The grill shall be attached with screws to the box. 4. Each audible notification visual devices shall incorporate a visual alarm indicator. The visual alarm indicating device shall be an integral part of the audible alarm box assembly. 5. Audible notification device and visual notification devices shall be connected to separate notification alarm signal circuits. Do not connect these devices to the same circuit conductors. B. Audible Alarm Horns: 1. Horns installed indoors shall be electronic type. 2. Horn shall provide a minimum sound level of 75 DB at 10 feet, when installed in the field operating conditions shown on the drawings. 3. Outdoor horns shall be electro-mechanical, weatherproof and shall be mounted in a recessed backbox with vandal resistant grille, Soundolier 193-8/VP-161 series. 4. Audible devices shall provide a minimum sound level of 15DB over the ambient level measured 48" above the floor. C. Visual Alarm Indicator: 1. Lamp/Strobe internally illuminated projecting lens assembly, with flasher system. Unit shall flash on and off to provide visual indicating of fire alarm. 2. The word "fire" shall appear on the lens or lens plate. 3. Flash rate, one flash per second, with a flash duration of approximately 0.001 second flash rate independent of audible device. 4. Light source, Xenon high intensity flash strobe tube white/clear color. 5. Strobe shall have candela ratings indicated on drawings. 6. Strobe shall comply with NFPA 72 Chapter 4 and ADA requirements. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Fire Alarm Specifications 16721 -12 2.08 Remote Fire Alarm Annunciator A. General: 1. The annunciator panel shall be powered and operated from the fire alarm control panel. "In-out" circuit conductors shall terminate on numbered screw-type terminals. 2. A metal tamper resistant weatherproof cabinet shall contain the annunciator components. The panel shall be surface or flush mounted as indicated on the drawings. Provide a full height tamper resistant, hinged locking cabinet door. Door shall have transparent high impact windows to allow visual observation of all indicators and switches. 3. An electronic digital, multiplex, addressable module shall be incorporated into the annunciator. The module shall communicate the status and trouble condition of each device with a unique address code. The module shall communicate with and be supervised and monitored by the fire alarm control panel. B. Each alarm initiating zone (including spares) shall be individually annunciated in the annunciator panel. C. A common fire trouble alarm shall be annunciated in the annunciator panel from the fire alarm control panel. D. Annunciator lamp circuits shall be automatically supervised. Provide lamp test switch in the annunciator panel. E. An audible alarm/trouble buzzer with silence switch and automatic resound for subsequent alarm/trouble signals shall be provided. The annunciator panel shall be automatically reset when the control panel is reset. F. A keyed switch shall be provided for remote reset of the system. The annunciation panel shall also be automatically reset when the control panel is reset. G. Provide a floor plan of the facility framed under acrylic and mounted adjacent to the fire alarm annunciator. The floor plan shall be to scale and shall have room numbers clearly displayed on all rooms corresponding to the annunciator for the purpose of easily identifying the fire zones. 2.09 Remote Equipment Monitoring and Control A. An electronic digital multiplex addressable module shall be provided at each device or equipment indicated to be controlled by the multiplex system. Multiple addressable control ports shall be provided in each module quantity as required for each point controlled or monitored. The module shall communicate the monitor status control action and trouble condition of each device with a unique address code. The module shall communicate with and be supervised and monitored by the fire alarm control panel. B. Where multiple points are monitored or controlled, provide digital, multiplex, multipoints, monitor, control panel (MMCP). The panel cabinet shall be self contained NEMA 1 construction and hinged locking door. Provide tamper switch detection zone on the cabinet door, provide 60 hour battery UPS backup and power supply, the same as required for the fire alarm control panel. Panel shall be expandable using plug-in circuit monitor/control printed circuit cards. Provide barriered numbered terminal strips. C. Each control point shall provide a supervised "dry" relay contact single pole double throw maintained contact rated 10 ampere, 120 volt, 60 HZ. D. Each monitor point shall provide not less than one of the following supervised methods of monitoring a remote device or equipment action or status. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Fire Alarm Specifications 16721 -13 1. Remote "dry" contact operation normal open, normally closed or momentary contact operation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Identification (Additional Requirements) A. The inside cover of alarm initiating devices shall be marked with the zone initiating number corresponding to the zone number in the control panel. Marking shall be with a felt-tip pen. B. Each fire alarm terminal cabinet shall be painted red. C. Provide nameplate: "Power to Main Fire Alarm Control Panel" screwed onto the branch circuit overcurrent device supplying power to the main fire alarm control panel. 3.02 Wiring (Additional Requirements) A. Review the total system point-to-point wiring layout to assure that the correct number and type of wires and conduit sizes are installed. B. Final connections, testing, adjusting and calibration shall be made under the direct supervision of a factory-trained technician of the system supplier. C. All wiring shall be in conduit, or surface metallic raceway. Refer to drawings. D. All wiring in cabinets shall be neatly formed, laced and made up on bolt and nut terminal blocks. Tag all spare conductors. All conductors shall terminate on terminal strips with spade lugs, of adequate size for all incoming and outgoing conductors. The strips shall be labeled as to their use and wiring diagram shall be placed on the cabinet door showing connections of all related equipment to these strips. E. Wiring requirements for shielding certain conductors shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. Provide all conduit, raceways and conductors per manufacturers recommendations and include all material and labor costs in the contract price. F. The conductors used for digital, multiplex communication between the fire alarm control panel and external remote initiation devices, control points and annunciators, shall be twisted, shielded, multi-conductor cable, #16 AWG copper minimum with a separate internal ground/drain conductor, U.L. listed for fire alarm system use. One spare pair of multiplex conductors shall be provided in all main and branch device/equipment connections for future system use. "Tees" and taps at any junction box location in the communication lines, shall be permitted by the system to additional devices without affecting proper system operation. G. Wire Size: Wire shall be sized to insure installed circuit voltage drop does not exceed 10% and all devices function properly. 3.03 Outlet Boxes (Additional Requirements) A. Device outlet boxes shall be flush mounted unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. Provide extension rings to finish flush with finish surface. Where the drawings indicate surface mounted devices, outlet boxes shall be cast metal with threaded hubs. Where the conduit entrances are not exposed for surface mounted devices, provide flush outlet box behind the device box and omit the conduit hubs on the device box. Size device boxes and outlet boxes per manufacturer's recommendation and as required by code for wire fill. B. Coordinate installation of exterior surface horns in recessed flush backboxes so that conduit enters backbox to align with entry port on horn. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Fire Alarm Specifications 16721 -14 3.4 Special Installation Requirements A. Air duct smoke detectors shall be installed in the supply air ducts and return air ducts with an air flow of 2000 CFM or greater, coordinate with mechanical contractor. Sampling tube shall extend across entire duct width. Provide 3/4" conduit with 2#12 to respective motor control device to automatically shut down the respective fan motor upon detection of smoke in the air duct and initiate the alarm. B. Water flow switches shall be installed on each main fire sprinkler rise pipe, coordinate with the fire sprinkler contractor. C. Tamper switches shall be installed on each main fire sprinkler shut-off valve, coordinate with the fire sprinkler contractor. D. Equipment shall be weatherproof gasketed where installed in locations exterior to the building, or where indicated on the drawings. Weatherproof equipment shall be tamper resistant. 3.05 Testing A. The entire fire alarm system shall be tested in the presence of the local fire official Inspector and a representative of the manufacturer after the installation is complete. Invite the local fire official to witness the test. 1. Individually activate each manual initiating station and verify correct alarm operation and control panel response. 2. Individually test each automatic initiating device and verify correct alarm operation, control panel response and remote equipment operation. 3. The communication loops and the notification alarm circuits shall be opened in at least two (2) locations per building to check for the presence of correct supervisory circuitry. B. Test the battery back-up system by disconnecting the incoming normal power and allowing this alarm system to operate 24 hours on battery power. Sound the alarm system for five minutes at the end of 24 hours on battery power. C. Perform all electrical and mechanical tests required by the equipment manufacturer's certification form. Measure and adjust each automatic detection detector to the maximum stable sensitivity setting. Detector tests shall be performed with the detector at its operational location and under normal operational environmental conditions in the area. Bench settings are not acceptable. An operational check-out test and report shall be performed. Submit six copies of test report results. The tests and report shall include, but not be limited to: 1. A complete list of equipment installed and wired. 2. Indication that all equipment is properly installed and functions and conforms with these specifications. 3. Test of individual zones as applicable. 4. Serial numbers, locations by zone and model number for each installed detector. 5. Voltage (sensitivity) settings for each ionization and photoelectric detector as measured in place with the HVAC system operating. 6. Technician's name, certificate number and date. 7. The completed manual and automatic monitoring and control system shall be tested to insure that it is operating properly. This test will consist of exposing the installed units to a standard fire test. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Fire Alarm Specifications 16721 -15 8. Acceptance of the system shall also require a demonstration of the stability of the system. This shall be adequately demonstrated if the system operates for a ninety (90) day test period without any unwarranted alarms. Should an unwarranted alarm(s) occur, the contractor shall readjust or replace the equipment and detector(s) and begin another ninety (90) day test period. As required by the Architect, the contractor shall recheck the detectors using the fire test after each readjustment or replacement of detectors. This test shall not start until the City has obtained beneficial use of the building under tests. D. After the testing has been completed to the satisfaction of the inspectors, provide the NFPA certificate of compliance to the City, the local Fire Official, the Architect and Inspector of Record (IOR). E. Upon the receipt of Certificate of Compliance, the installer/supplier shall supply the Owner with a written operating, testing and maintenance instructions, point- to-point as-built drawings, and equipment specifications. 3.06 Instruction A. Provide a two (2) hour instructional sessions conducted by a factory-authorized technician at the job site after completion of all tests to instruct City personnel on the use of the system. The first session shall be videotaped and conducted prior to final acceptance of the project. The second session shall be held within eleven months of final acceptance of the project, when requested by the City. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Fire Alarm Specifications 16721-16 SECTION 16725 CAMPUS SECURITY SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 Summary: Contractor to provide complete integrated campus security system which will be fully compatible and inter-connected with the existing security system installed for the City of Carlsbad Public Safety Center under as separate contract. 1. Exterior Closed-Circuit security cameras (CCTV) 2. Interior Closed-Circuit security cameras (CCTV) 3. Proximity access control card readers for doors (DACS) 4. Central camera monitoring and recording station(s). 5. Central door access control and programming station 6. Coordination and verification of system required infrastructure to be provided and installed whether shown within the contract drawings or implied as required for the intended security system operation. 7. Internet data connections to the City of Carlsbad main terminals for security cameras and access controls. 8. Coordination and review of proposed door hardware and installation of infrastructure to support noted security system equipment. 9. Coordination with installation and integration into building Fire Alarm System and controls as required by building codes: Refer to Fire Alarm drawings & Specifications. A Work in This Section to include: 1. Provide an integrated point monitoring and control system for door access (DACS), provide a closed circuit television system (CCTV) for internal and external monitoring, for selected entry points. Provide necessary software and hardware to integrate the systems and provide control terminals on a local network for access to all functions. This section describes the purpose of the system, location of control points, types of hardware, and installation practice. 2. System: Contractor shall provide a complete and satisfactory operating system for the control and monitoring of key access and security doors in the facility. It will consist of a proximity card reader door control system, door status indication and alarm, and an audit record of door access events. The system shall interface with the fire alarm system to release all doors in case of a fire alarm. The access control will be PC-based and will allow flexibility in programming on a permissive access on a door-by-door, card-by-card basis. 3. Contractor shall provide a complete and satisfactory operating system for a closed circuit television system for the monitoring of key doors and entrances. The system shall consist of fixed plus pan-zoom-tilt cameras. The system shall also provide a video and camera control system with operator access in specified locations. A video recording system shall also be provided. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Campus Security System Specifications 16725-1 4. An open architecture security integration system shall be provided which will simultaneously control the DACS, the CCTV, and the door intercom systems. The system may be combined with the CCTV recording and matrix switcher hardware. It shall have the necessary hardware to provide a local network connecting the monitoring terminals to the City of Carlsbad main security system server, to allow monitoring and control of all building security functions from terminals which are permitted access. The requirements for the integration software are contained in a later section of this specification. 5. All equipment and installation material required to fulfill the above requirements shall be furnished, whether or not specifically enumerated herein or on the drawings. All necessary hookup and installation shall be by a factory-approved representative. The installation Contractor shall also instruct designated personnel in the correct operation of the system. A minimum of three hours for this instruction shall be included in the bid. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Although specific brand names and models are called out in this Specification, equipment manufactured by other reputable companies if proposed by the single source approved installer shall be acceptable if deemed equal and compatible by the City of Carlsbad. Complete engineering data and diagrams shall be submitted with the bid if a substitute system is proposed by the single source approved installer. B. Installation: All equipment furnished under this procurement shall be installed in final operational position by trained technicians or installers. C. Contractor Qualifications: 1. The Contractor must insure compliance with an understanding of all local codes, union requirements, and contract conditions pertaining to this project. D. UL Approval: All equipment supplied according to this Specification and operating from 110 VAC shall carry approval of the Underwriters' Laboratories and shall be so marked with the approved UL seal. The system shall meet UL 264. 1.03 REFERENCES A. The security system shall be installed in accordance with all applicable national, state and local codes including but not limited to the following: 1. ANSI: Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 2. NEC, National Electrical Code 3. NFPA, National Fire Protection Association Life Safety Code. 4. Local and State Governing Codes. 5. UL: Underwriters Laboratory Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Campus Security System Specifications 16725-2 1.04 SUBMITTALS: Refer to Project Manual for Procedures. A. The Contractor shall submit prefabrication submittals consisting of product data and shop drawings for approval. Partial submittals will not be accepted without prior written approval by the Project Manager. The Contractor shall not be relieved from responsibility for any deviation from the requirements of the contract documents by the Project Manager's approval of prefabrication submittals. No portion of the work shall commence nor shall any equipment be ordered until the prefabrication submittals have been approved in writing by the Project Manager. All work shall be in accordance with approved submittals. A detailed completion schedule shall be submitted with the prefabrication submittals. B. Product Data: Five (5) sets of product data shall be submitted in 3-ring binders divided into separate sections for each system. Each section shall include the following: 1. Equipment schedules listing all system components, the manufacturer, model number, and quantity of each. 2. General functional description of each system. 3. Manufacturer's literature sheets for all system components, including any warranty and maintenance information. 4. General functional description of any software to be used for the system. 5. Point charts defining all inputs and outputs for the system, if applicable. 6. Block diagrams for DACS, CCTV, and security system integration equipment. 7. Cable and wiring types. 8. Finishes and graphics C. Shop Drawings: Five (5) large format copies shall be submitted for each drawing. Shop drawings shall include, but be limited to the following: 1. Floor plans with all device locations, wire runs, and wire designations. 2. System riser diagram with all devices, wire runs, and wire designations. 3. Block diagrams for each system. 4. Wiring diagrams for each system defining the interconnection for all inputs and outputs for all equipment. 5. Wiring diagram for fail-safe release of electric locking mechanisms. 6. Wiring diagram for interface between the intercom and CCTV systems 7. Fabrication shop drawings for all custom equipment. 1.05 GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS A. Intent: 1. The intent of these Specifications is to define the operational and equipment requirements to implement and operate the DACS, and CCTV in a manner that is . totally responsive to the needs of the users. Any reference to one manufacturer's equipment is for descriptive purposes only as to level of quality and functions desired and is not restrictive to that manufacturer. 2. This Specification also is intended to define quality equipment that is dependable and capable of delivering maximum performance with high reliability. All equipment furnished under this procurement shall be the latest model available, shall be new, and shall not have been used in any demonstration or exhibit. The overall design shall meet or exceed the latest applicable standards of the Electronics Industries Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Campus Security System Specifications 16725-3 Association (EIA), and the Federal Communications Commission (FCC). B. Turnkey System: All bids shall be for the entire system, as specified, to ensure that a complete turnkey system is bid and that nothing remains to be purchased or supplied by the customer other than those items so indicated. C. System Completeness: These Specifications may not necessarily list all equipment required to produce a fully operational system that will satisfy the requirement for an operational Campus Security System. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify completeness of the equipment list and suitability of the units. Any equipment or special installations required by these performance specifications and not specifically called out herein shall be provided by the Contractor without claim for additional payment. It shall be understood that bid award will be comprehensive in nature and will lead to a completely operational system. D. Equipment Offering: Contractor shall offer equipment that most nearly meets the specific details of this Specification. If no deviations are noted, the buyer shall assume complete conformance to this Specification and system requirements. The Contractor will be required to assume responsibility for all equipment offered in the bid. Absence of specification details implies that best general practice will prevail and that the Contractor will supply only high-quality, commercial-grade equipment. E. Installation: Refer to the approved contract drawings for the location of specified equipment and tables listen in paragraph 3.05 of the specification. F. Maintenance and Repair: The Contractor shall specify and clearly state the policy and procedure for maintenance and repair of all items delivered under any contract resulting from this Specification. The Contractor shall clarify provisions of maintenance and repair during and after the first warranty period. The Contractor shall outline those routine and precautionary maintenance procedures and standard checkout procedures that should be used. This company must have a repair facility within 50 miles of the buyer's location. G. Parts: The Contractor shall formulate and state plans for assuring an on-going stock of replacement parts for each item included in the offering, and shall guarantee to make available such part(s) as may be required for a period consistent with the life of the equipment or for a period of not less than ten years, whichever is greater. If one of the items or components becomes obsolete and replacement parts are ordered, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide a device that will appropriately replace the defective unit. 1.06 WARRANTY: A. The Contractor shall guarantee all equipment and installation for a period no less than two (2) years against defects in design, material, and workmanship. The warranty period shall begin with installation completion and system acceptance. Repairs to correct discrepancies identified during this period will include labor and materials at no cost to the City of Carlsbad. The Contractor, as a warranty action shall replace any faulty equipment that, in the opinion of the City of Carlsbad, is not reasonably repairable. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Campus Security System Specifications 16725-4 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Acceptable Installers A. Single Source Approved Installer: The City of Carlsbad's accepted single source installer of the Campus Security system and integration shall be performed by the below listed source. Products and Equipment listed within this section are based on compatibility and standards of the existing campus security system installed elsewhere in the city under a separate contract. Substitutions proposed by the single source approved installer shall be considered under the provisions of Section 01030 of these specifications. 1. Company: JMG Security Systems 7297 Ronson Rd. #A San Diego, CA 92111 Tele (800) 900-4564 FAX (714) 545-0352 2. Contact: Mike Tremblay, Senior Agent 3. Website: www.jmgsecurity.com 2.02 DOOR ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM (DACS) A. Basis of Design: The selected manufacturer and system selected for the Door Access Control System shall be as specified herein. Substitutions shall not be considered. 1. Manufacturer: HID 2. Series: iCIass 3. Model No. Refer to specified products herein. B. Functional Specifications: 1. The DACS system shall consist of a alarm input/control output data gathering panels Wiegand Interface Modules (WIMs). The WIMs shall be capable of collecting card reader data, multiplexing the information, and transmitting that data back to the computer. The WIMs shall be capable of providing control output points initiated by alarm events, remotely controlled by the operator's terminals or by software. 2. The system shall have the capability of being operated from two (2) locations. a. Shooting Range Building b. City of Carlsbad Main Terminal Control (Verify location with the Owner): 3. The main equipment terminations and appropriate nodes shall be located in the Tele/Data Room #107 of the Shooting Range Building. The CCTV monitoring location shall be located in Room Range Control Room #118. Local WIM panels may be located in convenient places to group card readers locally. The door lock strikes will be provided by others. Refer to Door Hardware Specification. An interface with dry switch closures will be provided to the door access system to operate request to exit functions for selected doors for remote release. The door access system shall provide dry contract closures to indicate door position/status. 4. The system shall provide for at least six (6) password restricted operator access levels. This feature shall restrict operator access levels. This feature shall restrict access to sensitive programming functions to authorized personnel only. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Campus Security System Specifications 16725-5 5. The system shall provide an audit trail feature to maintain an historical record of what changes were made to the data base, when the changes were made, and who made them. 6. All user programming shall be accomplished via the administrative/CRT keyboard terminal. Any terminal may enter the programming mode by proper password entry. 7. The system shall provide for user programming of the following data for each card: a. Card number (internal and hot stamp) b. Access level(s) c. Card holder name d. Card holder department name e. Four (4) user-definable fields of at least 24 characters each 8. The system proximity cards shall be match the City of Carlsbad existing issued access control system access cards. 9. The system shall provide for bulk loading of the cardholder database for large numbers of cards with the same access levels. 10. The system shall provide for partitioning of the cardholder database by password, to restrict access to card programming functions for groups of cards and readers. 11. The system shall provide for user programming of the following for each alarm input points: a. Point number b. Point type c. Point priority group d. Point location e. Point description f. Normal mode descriptor g. Abnormal mode descriptor h. Response message i. Restore message j. Time program arm and disarm k. Real time arm and disarm 12. The system shall allow all alarm input points in the system to be partitioned by software to be reported only at certain terminals during certain time periods and at other terminals during other time periods. 13. The system shall provide for user programming of the following for each control output point: a. Point number b. Point activation (alarm point, time schedule, or real time) c. Maintained or momentary output d. Normally open or normally closed output 14. The system shall allow all control output points in the system to be partitioned by password for real time control only by certain operators. 15. Exact alarm input and control output point partitioning requirements shall be as indicated on the Point Charts. 16. Certain alarm input points shall be "transparent" as indicated on the Point Charts. These points, used to initiate another event within the system, shall not be annunciated at the operators' CRT or event printer. 17. The system shall provide for time programmable and real time arming and disarming of all alarm input points and all control output points as indicated in the Point Charts. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Campus Security System Specifications 16725-6 18. Alarm reporting shall take precedence over all other system functions. The operators' CRT shall visually and audibly annunciate that an alarm condition exists, independent of any other current operator's CRT activity. The alarm signal volume shall be adjustable on all terminals. 19. The operators' CRT shall display the date, time, and number of alarms waiting at all times. 20. Multiple alarms shall be queued in their order of priority. 21. The operators' monitor and event printer shall display and record the alarm message including: the time, date, location, point number, event type, and point status for each point transaction. 22. The event printer shall record with time designations all or selected system activities, including but not limited to: a. Log-on and log-off denoting operator's I.D. b. Program changes c. Alarm conditions d. Alarm resets e. Alarm acknowledge f. Control commands g. Guard tour stops h. Selective card tracking i. Invalid card use j. Selective reader tracking 23. The system shall provide for report printing and/or display of any group of events within any selectable time period. The report printer shall be capable of producing a hard copy of any report that the system may generate. Reports shall include historical events, defined by any combination of the following categories: a. All events b. Location c. Point number d. Event type (e.g., intrusion, door open, etc.) e. Point status (e.g., on, off, alarm, normal, shunted, etc.) f. Management reports of transaction history by card number, cardholder, reader number, time period, or invalid attempts g. Audit trail reports 24. The system shall monitor the alarm input point status of the following equipment and systems as indicated within the Project Plans and the Schedule of Card Reader Locations, paragraph 3.05 of this Specification Section. a. Access Control: Card reader controlled door prop alarms, intrusion alarms, and invalid card use alarms. b. Fire Alarm Systems: The Fire Alarm Contractor shall provide normally closed dry contacts for general fire alarm and system trouble alarm. c. Door Position Switches: A concealed door position switch, an overhead door position switch, a surface mount door position switch, a hinge position switch (Refer to Section 08710), a lock position switch (Refer to Section 08710), a sliding gate, and swinging parking lot gate position switch (provided by others), or a fourfold door position switch (Refer to Section 08710) shall be used to monitor the secure status of each door in the system as indicated on the plans and in the Schedule of Card Reader Locations, paragraph 3.05 of this Specification Section. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Campus Security System Specifications 16725-7 d. Exit Alarm Units: Exit alarm units shall be provided for local monitoring of the secure status of certain doors as indicated on the Schedule of Card Reader Locations, paragraph 3.05 of this Specification Section. An alarm output contact shall be activated whenever a protected door is opened to initiate an alarm condition on the DACS system. e. Door Control Panel Push-Buttons: The door pushbutton contacts or console door releases shall be wired as transparent alarm inputs. Contact closures will be provided from the radio control consoles. f. Panic Alarm: Panic alarm buttons shall be installed at selected pedestrian gate for the use of personnel in distress or needing help. g Tamper Switches: Tamper switches shall be provided in all WIMs. The number of WIMs are dependent on the system supplied by the Contractor and shall be included in the total alarm input figures. 25. The system shall provide control point outputs to the following equipment and systems. a. Access Control: Card reader, door control panel, DACS network keyboard, motion detector or time schedule activates lock release power control. b. Exit Alarm Units: Unit reset/bypass control is activated by DACS network keyboard and/or time schedule. 26. The system shall provide for card reader and remote control of certain doors listed in the Design Guidelines. 27. The system shall provide for controlling access through card reader controlled door based on the card user's access level, which shall be defined by a specific group of readers during specific time intervals. 28. The system shall provide the capability for controlling access through card reader/keypad controlled doors based on the card user's access level and personal identification number (PIN). The requirement for use of the keypad with each reader use shall be user programmable from the operator's terminal. 29. The system shall provide for automatic card invalidation after a programmable number of invalid transactions and/or a programmable time period. 30. The system shall store in memory every card access transaction, describing the nature of the transaction, time, date, reader location, card holder name, card number, and validity status. 31. Unauthorized reader use attempts shall cause an alarm indication at the operator's terminal. 32. The system shall provide operator's monitor display and event printing of card use (all transactions or violations only) by card and/or by reader. 33. The system shall provide momentary or maintained release of card reader controlled door locks via the operator's keyboard. 34. The system shall monitor the status of card reader controlled doors against intrusion or door propping. 35. Each card reader controlled door shall be equipped with an electric locking mechanism. Power supplies for the locking mechanisms shall be provided with local battery backup. 36. The DACS shall be connected (hard-wired) to the base building fire alarm system for failsafe release upon any fire alarm. A single low voltage/low current normally closed dry contact from the fire alarm system shall be provided by others. This contact shall open on any fire alarm condition. The Security Contractor shall provide all additional UL listed failsafe relays as necessary to interface to this contact and unlock all of these doors. The fire alarm takes precedence over any card reader or other function. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Campus Security System Specifications 16725-8 37. All devices associated with each card reader controlled door shall be as indicated on the plans and in the Door Schedule. 38. The system shall provide for card reader and remote activation of the motorized site parking gates as indicated on the plans. Refer Specifications Section 02835 and approved project plans for information pertaining to gate operation and signalization. C. Technical Specifications: 1. Computer (Provided by the Owner) a. The controlling computer and software of the logic controller for the DACS system shall be provided and located by the owner. 2. Flat Panel Monitor & Keyboard Terminal (Provided by the Owner) a. The color flat panel monitor/keyboard terminal to support the access control system shall be provided and located by the owner. 3. Printer: (Provided by the Owner). a. The event printer which shall interface with the Computer shall be provided and located by the owner. 4. Wiegand Interface Modules (WIM) a. The WIM shall provide supervised alarm inputs to monitor the status of alarm circuits and report the status information to the PMAC Computer. b. The WIM shall provide control relay outputs for controlling devices by remote command from the PMAC operator's terminal, through time programming or on alarm point activation. c. Communications between WIMs and the Computer shall conform to EIA standards. d. The WIM shall automatically disconnect from the communication loop upon a communication failure to prevent communications to other WIMs in the loop from being interrupted. e. Upon loss of communication with the Computer, the WIM shall store up to 16 events per potential alarm input and transmit that data to the Computer as soon as communication is restored. f. Each WIM shall have 20 percent spare input points and output points after all specified points are connected. g. Eight (8) hours of rechargeable battery backup shall be provided in each WIM for memory backup. Batteries shall be sealed gel type. h. The WIM shall be housed in a locking steel enclosure designed for surface mounting. A tamper switch shall be provided to sense the removal or opening of the enclosure cover. The Contractor shall provide any conduit required from the WIM to power supplies, junction boxes, or wireways. i. All alarm and control points as well as card reader inputs shall be capable of independent time programming via software controls from the DACS computer. j. The WIM may be combined with the Reader Interface Module as one unit. 5. Reader Wiegand Interface Module (WIM) a. The WIM shall provide an intelligent interface between card readers and the Computer utilizing distributed processing technology. b. The RIM shall contain enough RAM to maintain a card database equal to the system capacity with the same expansion capabilities. c. Communications between WIMs and the Computer shall conform to EIA standards. d. Upon loss of communication with the Computer, the WIM shall contain enough RAM to operate normally without failing into the degraded mode. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Campus Security System Specifications 16725-9 The access control database shall contain sufficient RAM to operate normally. e. The lock control output contacts shall be rated for 2 A @ 24 VDC. Relay activation time shall be adjustable from the PMAC operator's terminal from 1 to 30 seconds on a per reader basis. f. Transaction time for authorized cards shall be less than 0.5 second from the time of card read until the door is unlocked. g. The WIM shall be housed in a locking steel enclosure designed for surface mounting. A tamper switch shall be provided to sense the removal or opening of the enclosure cover. The Contractor shall provide any conduit required from the WIM to power supplies, junction boxes, or wireways. h. The WIM may be combined with the Data Gathering Panel as one unit. 6. Tamper Switch a. The tamper switch shall be a normally closed plunger type switch designed to be mounted to an enclosure to sense the removal or opening of the enclosure cover. b. The tamper switch shall be a Sentrol Model 3025T or approved equal. 7. Concealed Door Position Switch a. The concealed door position switch shall operate with up to a 1/2" gap between switch and magnet when mounted in a steel door and frame. The contact configuration shall be normally closed when the door is closed. The switch and magnet shall mount into a 1" diameter hole. b. The door position switch shall be a Sentrol Model 1078 or approved equal. 8. Surface Mount Door Position Switch a. The surface mount door position switch shall operate with a gap up to 3" between the switch and the magnet. The cable shall be armored when exposed. The contact configuration shall be normally closed when the door is closed. b. The surface mount door position switch shall be a Sentrol Model 2505-A or approved equal. 9. Overhead Door Position Switch a. The overhead door position switch shall be a heavy duty floor-mounted contact with a stainless steel armored cable, when exposed. The contact, which shall operate with up to a 3" gap, shall be configured to be normally closed when the door is closed. b. The overhead door position switch shall be a Sentrol Model 2205-A or approved equal. 10. Request to Exit Sensor. a. Panic exit devices shall contain integral "Request to Exit" solenoid sensors for the release of the electronic lock on the secure side of card reader controlled doors to allow exit through the door when in the locked mode. Activation of the sensor shall release the door strike mechanism and shunt the door position switch. b. Panic device hardware provided identified in Section 08710 of these specifications. Contractor to coordinate installation requirements. 11. Card Reader Unit a. The card reader shall be HID iCIass Series Keypad/Proximity Technology or approved equal, and shall read encoded data from access cards and transmit the data to the RIM. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Campus Security System Specifications 16725-10 b. An LED on the face of the reader shall differentiate between authorized and unauthorized reader uses. c. An LED on the face of the read head shall indicate authorized and unauthorized reader uses. d. The read head shall provide for communication between the remote electronics unit and the card. The read head shall mount directly to a metal surface. f. Wall-mounted read heads shall be no larger than 4.80" H X 3.30" W X 0.9" D, and shall mount directly to a standard single gang electrical box. The read range of the read head shall be up to 2". g. Mullion card reader unit read heads shall be no larger than 4.80" H X 3.30" W X 0.9" D. The read range of the read head shall be up to 2". h. The driveway entrance pedestal read head shall be no larger than 12" H X 12" W X 1.25" D. The read range of the read head shall be up to 18". Dual heads shall be provided at driveway entrances, one at passenger vehicle height and the other at fire truck driver window height. i. The entry gate shall be provided with a access control system providing remote opening. Contractor to coordinate the required interface between the read head and the DACS System. j. The wall, door frame and mullion mounted card readers shall be: HID iCIass Model RK40 Keypad Reader 6130, or approved equal. k. The parking pedestal card reader shall be an HID iCIass R90 Long Range Reader standard unidirectional reader or approved equal. I. The Contractor shall provide a common ground wire from the proximity reader head through the remote electronics unit and power supply to the reader interface module to an isolated ground point from each card reader. The ground point shall be a grounding rod or the telephone equipment ground if available. The electrical service ground shall not be used. 12. Access Card : Proximity Type a. The access card shall be Electrostatic Proximity Technology. b. The access card shall have only a hot stamp card number visible on the card. c. The access card shall not indicate the Contractor name or logo. d. The access card shall accommodate photo identification packets. e. 100 access cards and photo identification packets shall be provided. f. The access card shall be an HID iCIass 2K ID Badge Proximity cards or approved equal. 13. Card Reader and Remote Electronics Unit Power Supply a. The proximity card reader and remote electronics unit power supply shall be a regulated linear DC power supply that supplies +12 VDC @ 170 mA. The power supply shall have a series pass transistor on the output side of the regulator to prevent noise and cross-talk to the reader. b. The proximity card reader and remote electronics unit power supply shall be per manufacturer's recommendation for system. 14. Card Reader Keypad Unit The card reader/keypad unit shall consist of a card reader and a 12-button keypad mounted as one unit. The card reader shall read encoded data from access cards. The keypad shall transmit the user's PIN number to the WIM. 15. Card Reader Pedestal Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Campus Security System Specifications 16725-11 The entry gate card reader pedestal and access control unit shall be as described in Specification Section 02835 and shown within the contract drawings. Contractor to coordinate installation. 16. Electronic Locking Mechanism Power Supply a. The electric locking mechanism power supply shall consist of a UL listed transformer with 120 VAC input and regulated and filtered 24 VDC output. The power supply shall have individual fused outputs to each lock. Refer to Door Hardware Section 08710. b. Security System vendor shall provide power supply to noted doors via central transformer located in Tele/Data Room #107. 17. Door Release Bypass Pushbutton a. The door release/optical turnstile bypass push- button shall consist of a momentary pushbutton and a SPOT switch rated for 6A @ 125VAC in a surface-mount enclosure designed for mounting in the knee space of a desk. Refer to Schedule of Card Reader Locations, paragraph 3.05 of this section. 18. Time Delay a. The time delay relay shall meet the following minimum specifications: 1) Input: One normally open input to activate time delay relay 2) Output: One normally closed time delay relay output contact for lock, and one normally open time delay relay output contact for alarm shunt 3) Time Delay: Adjustable 1 to 30 seconds 2.03 CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM (CCTV) A Basis of Design: The selected manufacturer and system selected for the Closed Circuit Television System shall be as specified herein. Substitutions shall not be considered. 1. Manufacturer: Pelco 2. Model No. Refer to specified products herein. B Functional Specifications 1. The systems described in this section will consist of a CCTV system used for surveillance of the entire site and key door security. Systems will terminate in the same rooms as DACS to be determined 2. The building security system will consist of both indoor and outdoor PTZ CCTV cameras that will be located at strategic positions inside and outside the buildings for observation of entrances and parking areas and key interior locations. 3. The interior CCTV cameras shall be high color models. The exterior cameras shall be high resolution color models. 4. The outdoor cameras shall be enclosed in weatherproof dome housings or suitable brackets. The interior cameras can be either on open brackets or also located in small domes in the case of ceiling mount locations. 5. The PTZ camera controls shall be accessed from all control positions through the network connected terminals. Any position with CCTV controls shall be accessible through password-protected format. 6. A matrix switcher shall allow the connection of the video from any camera. Monitors to be located in the designated room by Owner 7. The digital switcher shall connect appropriate video to a designated monitor when a video-monitored door produces an alarm or door-prop indication. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Campus Security System Specifications 16725-12 8. A digital video recorder shall be furnished which shall record all cameras in a sequential mode. The recorder shall use hard disk storage for immediate recording and playback. It shall use DVD archiving for permanent storage of the video. The recorder shall feature event or motion-triggered recording either by alarms of the operators choice or activity or by input signals from access-control devices. 9. All user programming shall be accomplished via network access to the open architecture security integration system C Technical Specifications 1. Camera Equipment a. Environment: Each unit shall be capable of operating without degradation over a temperature range of -20 to +60 degrees C. All cameras shall be weather-resistant dome type and able to withstand a blow from a 10-pound sledgehammer. b. Fixed Cameras: The indoor and outdoor fixed security cameras shall be equipped with vari-focal 4-8mm auto iris lens and shall additionally be compatible with snap on quick change lens options ranging from 2.9mm~16.mm. The main power board and camera assembly shall be easily removed/replaced via snap-in assembly. The cameras shall be 1/3" ccd, DSP, resolution shall be 540 TVL, with 50dB S/N ratio. c. PTZ: The outdoor PTZ cameras shall be the fully enclosed, weather-resistant dome type. The cameras shall be 1/3" ccd, DSP, resolution shall be 540 TVL, with 50dB S/N ratio. A minimum of 100 preset positions shall available. Pan and tilt speed shall be 300 degrees per second or higher. The PTZ dome shall include a zoom lens providing a total minimum zoom of 18X - 128X (Digital: 1x-8x and Optical: 16x - 128x). d. Image Burn: The image device shall be inherently resistant to image burn. e. Blooming: The bright spots and light shall not cause an excessive blooming effect on the display. f. Image Retention: Image retention shall be reduced to less than 10 percent per second during scene changes. g. Camera Resolution: The camera shall be capable of a resolution of 540 TVL or better at the center of the picture, and at least 400 lines within 1/10 of the edge of the frame on all sides. h. Camera Power: The power required by the cameras shall be furnished either through the coaxial cable or on a separate low voltage cable pulled in the same conduit as the video cable provided and installed by system vendor. 2. Monitors a. Contractor shall provide one (1) monitor within Range Control Room #118. Standard NTSC 1.0 v p-p video shall be provided from the matrix switcher. b. Monitor. Monitor size to be 24" measured diagonally and shall have sufficient high-voltage current capacity to produce a high-contrast picture without significant blooming or fading when operating in ambient light levels of 50 foot candles or more 3. Matrix Switcher a. General: A video matrix switcher shall be provided. The equipment shall be configured to mount in a standard EIA 19-inch panel. The operator control unit shall have the capability of automatically selecting, multiplexing, or sequencing selected cameras to one or more video monitors. a. Video Selection System: The video selection system shall be a remotely- controlled, microprocessor-based, matrix-type switcher. It shall allow an Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Campus Security System Specifications 16725-13 operator to select and view any operational video camera on a preselected local monitor. It shall also allow for remote camera operation, for those devices having zoom, pan, and tilt capability. The equipment shall be a Pelco 6800 Series switch platform for camera integration, combined with the digital video recorder or equal. b. The switcher shall be capable of 32 NTSC camera inputs, and five programmable analog video monitor outputs. It shall have a minimum of 24 alarm inputs. c. The switcher shall have a network interface card built-in. 4. Digital Video Recorder a. A digital video recorder shall be provided to continuously record video from the cameras, as selected by the matrix frame switcher. b. Video Recorder: The video recorder shall be a self-contained unit, a Pelco 8000 Series DVR Platform or equivalent. It shall be capable of 60 images per second per single camera input. c. Recording medium: Internal hard drive. Capable of thirty (30) days recording normal capabilities at default settings of 1 image per second per camera at minimum 15K files size for resolution, based upon medium to high activity levels. d. Recording shall be high-resolution wavelet compression e. Video Input: 0.5-2.0 V p-p,75 ohm, BNC connector f. Video Output: 1.0 V p-p 75 ohm BNC connector 5. Accessories and Hardware: a. General: The Contractor is to supply and install all cable, mounts, and hardware necessary to implement and operate the CCTV system. b. Housings: Suitable dome type weatherproof housings and mounts shall be provided for the outdoor cameras which will accommodate the pan, tilt, and zoom features. Wall mounts or ceiling mounts shall be provided for cameras in indoor locations. 2.04 BUILDING SECURITY SYSTEM INTEGRATION A. Functional Description 1. Contractor shall provide the necessary software and hardware to functionally integrate the DACS, CCTV systems. Combining of these functions shall be performed by an Open Architecture Security Integration System 2. Integration system shall use a software system contained on an existing local computer/server provided by the owner. An acceptable system which performs this function is the Integral Technologies Inc. Oasis Integration Software. Equivalent systems will be considered under Substitutions Section 01300. 3. System shall provide full on-screen control of cameras, DVR, doors, entry gate, pedestrian gate and relay functions. 4. System shall provide real-time status of each device on the system, on each workstation including doors, alarms, intercoms, lights, etc. 5. Security integration system shall log security system events and operator activities, including a "memo log" feature. Log to be stored on central server. 6. System Contractor shall include providing all required ethernet wiring between Security computer/server and the remote camera locations. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Campus Security System Specifications 16725-14 PART 3 - INSTALLATION 3.01 WORKMANSHIP STANDARDS A. General: The Contractor shall supply the necessary labor, cable, connectors, and other materials to install the cameras, monitors, housings, video recorder, the matrix switcher, card readers, door switches, DACS computer and other needed devices. The locations of cameras and associated conduits are indicated on the drawings and specified herein.. Each bidder is cautioned to carefully examine the existing facility, project plans and specifications to properly plan and scope the shown installation. B. Installation: The installation of the building CCTV and DACS system shall be in accordance with current industry standards. All wiring, terminal blocks and the like shall be high-quality and subject to inspection and approval by the City of Carlsbad. C. Equipment: At the time of submittal, the Contractor shall furnish a complete and accurate listing of all major items to be used in assembling the system, including each item of equipment listed under this Specification. Contractor block diagrams shall indicate the proposed interconnection of all equipment to be furnished. A detailed listing of any proposed deviations from this Specification shall be included. Substitute standard equipment necessary to meet the Specifications shall be explained fully and must be accompanied by schematic diagrams. D. Mounting: All equipment shall be rigidly mounted including cameras, monitors, and cables. Fastenings and supports shall be adequate to support their loads with a safety factor of at least three. All switches, connectors, and outlets shall be clearly, logically, and permanently marked during installation. E. Precautions: 1. The Contractor must take such precautions as are necessary: a) to guard against electromagnetic and electrostatic hum b) to supply adequate ventilation c) to install the equipment so as to provide maximum safety to the person who will operate it. 2. Care shall be exercised in wiring so as to avoid damage to the cables and to the equipment. All joints and connections shall either be made with rosin-core solder or with mechanical connectors reviewed and approved by the Project Manager. All wiring shall be executed in strict adherence to standard broadcast practices. F. CCTV, DACS and Intercom Equipment Installation: Installation shall be in accordance with all applicable building and electrical codes. 3.02 IMPLEMENTATION PLAN A This plan should include equipment layouts, drawings, and detailed installation documentation. This plan will be reviewed by the architect and CITY OF CARLSBAD representative. The implementation plan must be approved prior to system installation. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Campus Security System Specifications 16725-15 3.03 DOCUMENTATION A. All equipment and installation must be fully documented. Drawings, descriptions, or schematics of any special strapping or modifications shall be provided in addition to manuals provided by the equipment manufacturer. Cables terminated on connection blocks shall be recorded to provide a record for future servicing. Documentation shall be in 3-ring binders to provide a complete as-built record. Three copies of equipment manuals and of the as-built documentation must be provided not later than 30 days after acceptance. 3.04 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE TESTING A. System Test Procedure The Contractor shall prepare and deliver a detailed system test procedure at least two weeks prior to the start of the system installation. The architect shall review the test procedure, which may contain mutually concurred modifications as required. B. Correction and Documentation: In the event that problems are encountered during acceptance testing, those items failing to meet specifications shall be noted as well as the corrective action taken. The system will be accepted -only after all required corrections are made. C. Witnessing of Tests: All acceptance test should be performed in presence of the architect and/or the Project Manager. The Project Manager may, at its option, waive witnessing certain acceptance tests or may spot-check units already installed. In these cases, the written test records must still be provided. D. Faulty Workmanship: Acceptance of the system shall not release the Contractor from liability for faulty workmanship or defects that may appear after the final payment has been made. E. Visual Inspection: In addition to functional testing, all elements of the system shall be subject to a thorough visual inspection by the architect and/or Project Manager's representative. These inspections shall include, but not be limited to, the items listed below: 1. General workmanship 2. Neatness of wiring and cable routing 3. Identification of cables and punch blocks 4. Overall system documentation Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Campus Security System Specifications 16725-16 3.05 SCHEDULE OF CARD READER LOCATIONS A. The following table is a list of doors which shall be provide with card reader access hardware. Contractor shall refer to plans for door locations. Bldg Site Site Site S S S S S S S S S S S S S r c R Room Name Vehicle Gate (Pedestal High) Vehicle Gate (Pedestal Low) Pedestrian Gate > f'^m-i"^ fcH&V- Lobby/Entry Lobby/Entry Hallway General Storage Armory/Secured Weapons Storage Armory/Secured Weapons Storage Tele/Data Range Control Room Range Control Room Hallway Vestibule Ready Area Fire Training Storage Control Room Smoke & Prop Equip Room Room Number ,^vr-."; X" 101 101 113 104 106 106 107 118 118 121 124 130 129 106 104 Door# '-,• %,-^*«H 01 02 04 07 08 09 10 22 23 26 30 32 37 05 05 - Room # Card Side West West East '*«»*ri«f»»* >«.-#• Exterior Exterior 101 127 104 116 112 116 121 Exterior Exterior Exterior Exterior Exterior Exterior Room # Secure Side East East West 101 101 113 104 106 106 107 118 118 121 124 130 129 106 104 Exit Ground Loop Ground Loop Latch ''fr'vS-f*"** Panic Panic Latch Latch Latch Latch Latch Latch Latch Panic Panic Latch Latch Latch Latch Remote Release Yes1 Yes1 x«s ••'••>.•'» No No Yes" No No No No No No No No No No No No B. Notes: 1. Remote access via telephone entry control system. Refer to specification section 02835 for additional information. 2. Remote door release via push button release located in Range Master's Office #105. The following table is a list of exterior perimeter doors of Building "C" which shall be provided with door contact switches which shall be interconnected to the access control system. Contractor shall refer to plans for door locations. 01 39 02 42 12 50 26 27 28 30 33 35 L37 Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Specifications Campus Security System 16725-17 3.06 SCHEDULE OF CCTV CAMERA LOCATIONS A. The following table is a list of CCTV camera locations. Contractor shall refer to plans for door locations. Bldg Site Site Site ifc?£ S S S S S S S S Location Exterior (Facing West to Gate) Exterior (Facing East to Tower) Exterior (Facing North to Gate *£?£** v--"> >~f £&%&'**& a* Lobby/Entry (Southwest Corner) Check-In Gathering Space (Northeast Corner)) South Exterior Alcove (Northeast Corner) Ready Area (Northwest Corner) Ready Area (Southwest Corner) 25-Yard Range (Mount at 10- Yard Line) 25- Yard Range (Mount at 10-Yard Line) 100-Yard Range (Mount at 10-Yard Line) Drawing Reference A-C-5.1 A-1.1 A-1.1 .W, «-,...•- A-S-3.1 A-S-3.1 A-S-3.1 A-S-3.1 A-S-3.1 A-S-3.1 A-S-3.1 "i A-S-3.1 Room # Tower 5tn Floor Level T- 101 116 130 131 130 130 131 Camera Type PTZ PTZ PTZ '-•- - ,X'.£*'-i. /• - ^ PTZ PTZ PTZ PTZ PTZ PTZ PTZ PTZ Activation Door# Vehicle Entry Gate Pedestrian Entry Gate 01 &02 09 26&30 32&39 All Lanes All Lanes All Lanes Mount Tower Canopy Exterior Wall Exterior Wall -* Interior Ceiling Interior Ceiling Exterior Ceiling Interior Ceiling Interior Ceiling Interior Ceiling Interior Ceiling Interior Ceiling END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Specifications Campus Security System 16725-18 o MASONRY RETAINING =ADDITIONAL 150 WALL SO. FT. 4" P.C.C.=ADDITIONAL 150 SO. FT. rrmdesigngroup creating environments people enjoy*" 232 Avenida Fabricate, Suite 112 Sandemente, CA92672 P: (949) 361-7950 | F: (949) 361-79551 rniw.nmdesign.com A California Corporalion] Victor Montgomery. Archllect»C1la90| Jerry Michael, PE 13689^ LS«276|JdiF«tM,LA«M4 CARLSBAD FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY ADDENDUM 1 EXHIBIT ADO 1-C-l Sheet No. By Checked Date Job No. Scale _ 13 (C-6) JSB 02/22/10 1107570 1"=30' CONCRETE ELECTRICAL CONDUIT VAULT NOTE: SEE SAN DIEGO REGIONAL STD. DWG. C-4, C-7 It C-8 FOR WALL AND FOOTING DESIGN PLAN rrmdesigngroup creating environments people enjoy" 232AvwKtaFeMcwt»,SUt«112 8»damwt»,CA92972 P-.(949)381-7950|F:(B49)3ei-7966|wwwjm«JM^i.com CARLSBAD FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY ADDENDUM 1 EXHIBIT AD01-C-2 Sheet No. By N/A JSB Checked Date Job No. . Scale 02/22/10 1107570 PROPOSED RETAINING WALL (SEE STD. DWG. C-4, C-7 & C-8) ELECTRICAL BOX CONCRETE ELECTRICAL CONDUIT VAULT ELEVATION NOT TO SCALE rrm group creating environments people enjoy"" Swdemen»e,CA 92*72 P;(M9) 381-7960 1 F: (949) 361-7966 1 wwwjnwta^.oom CARLSBAD FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY ADDENDUM 1 EXHIBIT AD01-C-3 Sheet No. By N/A JSB Checked Date 02/22/10 Job No. Scale _ 1107570 NTS rrmdesigngroup creating environments people enjoy"" 232 Avenida Fabricate, Sutta 112 San Ctemente, CA 92672 P: (949) 361-79501F: (949) 361-79551 www.imidesign.com ACrifen*CoponflonI VWor Martaaiwy.fatta*K110WI AnyMcM.KMMS. LSM2T81MFMV.LAKM4 CARLSBAD FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY ADDENDUM 1 EXHIBIT AD01-A-01 Sheet No. By Checked Date Job No. Scale _ A-l.l MH DI 02/22/10 1107570 1"=20'-0" rrmdesigngroup creating environments people enjoy"1 232 AvenMa Fabricate, Suite 112 San Clemente.CA 92672 P: (949) 361-79501F: (949) 361-79551 www.rnndesign.coni CARLSBAD FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY ADDENDUM 1 EXHIBIT ADO l-A-02 Sheet No. By Checked Date Job No. Scale __ A-S-2.1 MH DI 02/22/10 1107570 COMPRESSOR/ rrmdesigngroup creating environments people enjoy1™ 232 AvwiidaFabricantB. Suite 112 San Ctemente,CA 92672 P: (949) 361-7950 1 F: (949) 361-7955 1 www.mndesign.com A CMmta Cnporafen | W»Id 1090 1 Jmt* Hdml, PE tXUS, a MZ78 ( M FKlar. 1A IZS44 CARLSBAD FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY ADDENDUM 1 EXHIBIT ADO l-A-03 Sheet No. By A-S-2.4 MH Checked Date DI 02/22/10 Job No. Scale _ 1107570 rrmdesigngroup creating environments people enjoy1" 232 Avenida Fabricate, Suite 112 San Cltmente.CA 92672 P: (949) 361-79501F: (949) 361-7955I www.mndesign.com , AnMad K11CM | Jny UkM, PEROM. U ttOn \ M Fwinr. LA «W CARLSBAD FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY ADDENDUM 1 EXHIBIT AD01-A-04 Sheet No. By A-S-3.1 MH Checked Date DI 02/22/10 Job No. Scale _ 1107570 ® rrmaesigngroup creating environments people enjoy" 232 Avenida Fabricante, Suite 1 1 2 San Clemente, CA 92672 P: (949) 361-7950 1 F: (949) 361-7955 1 www.rTmde5ign.com A Cdlbmta Cwpcrafcn | Vox Manymn.d K110SO | Jan> Mtiuel. PE 136895. LS 16278 1 Jafl FartMf, LA K CARLSBAD FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY ADDENDUM 1 EXHIBIT ADO l-A-05 Sheet No. By Checked Date Job No. _ Scale MH DI 02/22/10 1107570 A( DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULE DOOR MARK t 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 v*6-v 27i_^2g^ 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 SIZE WD 6'-0" 6'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-Oir 5'-8" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 2'-6' 3-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 4'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 8'-8" 8'-4" 3'-0" 3'-0" 6'-0" 14'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 9'-4" 3'-0° 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0° 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 5'-0" 5'-0" 3'-0" 3-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3-0" 4-0" 7'-0" 7'-0" HGT 7'-10" 7'-10' 7'-10" 7'-10" 7'-10" 7'-10" 7'-10" 7'-10" 7'-10" 7-10" 7'-10" 7'-10" 7'-10" 7'-10" 7'- 10" 7'- 10" 7'-10" 7'- 10" 7'-10° 7'-10" 7'-10" 7'-10" 7'- 10" 7'-10" 7'-10" 7'-10" 7'-10" 7'- 10" 8'-0" 7'-10" 7'-10" 7'-10" 7'-10" 8'-0" 7'-10" 3'-10" 3'- 10" 8'-0" 3'- 10" 3'- 10" 7'-10" 7'-10" 7'-10" 7'-10" 7'-10" 7'-10" 7'-10" 7'-10" 7'-10" 7'-10" 7'-10" 7'-10" 7'-10" 7'-10" 7'-10" 7'-10" 7'-10" 7'-10" 7'-10" 7-10" 6'-0" 6'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" MAIL SF SF SF SF SF SF HM HM HM HM HM SF MM HM HM SF HM SF HM HM HM HM SF SF HM PCs^—voP-v* SF ^-&*-^ HM HM STL HM HM HM HM STL HM HM HM STL HM HM HM HM HM HM HM HM HM HM SF SF SF SF HM HM HM HM HM HM HM HM STL STL STL STL GLAZING T T — — T— — — — — — T — — — T — — — T — — — — T '~^-**~^~**S~\r •*^*^^^^*~. T T T T — — . — — — — — — — u — — TYPE A A C C C C D B 8 B B C B B B C B C B B B B C C Bc_^L^*— *s*r\s— CS^Q^. B B E D B B D E B B B F B B B B B B B B B B C C C C D D B B B B B B G G E E FRAME MATL SF SF SF SF SF SF HM HM HM HM HM SF HM HM HM SF HM SF HM HM HM HM SF SF HM ~&-~~ SF SF^ HM HM STL HM HM HM HM STL HM HM HM STL HM HM HM HM HM HM HM HM HM HM SF SF SF SF HM HM HM HM HM HM HM HM STL STL STL STL DETAIL HEAD 11/A-S-8.3 11/A-S-8.3 32/A-S-8.3 41/A-S-8.3 51/A-S-8.3 31/A-S-8.3 31/A-S-8.4 11/A-S-8.2 21/A-S-8.2 12/A-S-8.2 12/A-S-8.2 21/A-S-8.3 12/A-S-8.2 12/A-S-8.2 12/A-S-8.2 51/A-S-8.3 12/A-S-8.2 51/A-S-8.3 21/A-S-8.2 31/A-S-8.4 22/A-S-8.2 31/A-S-8.2 41/A-S-8.3 31/A-S-8.3 31/A-S-8.4 21/A-S-8.3 12/A-S-8.2 43/A-S-8.3 21/A-S-8.4 42/A-S-8.2 33/A-S-8.2 11/A-S-8.2 33/A-S-8.2 11/A-S-8.4 33/A-S-8.2 43/A-S-8.2 43/A-S-8.2 24/A-S-8.2 43/A-S-8.2 43/A-S-8.2 23/A-S-8.2 23/A-S-8.2 32/A-S-8.2 32/A-S-8.2 32/A-S-8.2 32/A-S-8.2 32/A-S-8.2 44/A-S-8.2 42/A-S-8.3 42/A-S-8.3 42/A-S-8.3 42/A-S-8.3 12/A-S-8.2 12/A-S-8.2 12/A-S-8.2 12/A-S-8.2 12/A-S-8.2 12/A-S-8.2 12/A-S-8.2 12/A-S-8.2 — — SEE MANF. SEE MANF. JAMB 11/A-S-8.3 11/A-S-8.3 32/A-S-8.3 41/A-S-8.3 51/A-S-8.3 31/A-S-8.3 31/A-S-8.4 11/A-S-8.2 21/A-S-8.2 12/A-S-8.2 12/A-S-8.2 22/A-S-8.3 12.13/A-S-8.2 12/A-S-8.2 12.13/A-S-8.2 51/A-S-8.3 12/A-S-8.2 51/A-S-8.3 21/A-S-8.2 31.32/A-S-8.4 22/A-S-8.2 31/A-S-8.2 41/A-S-8.3 31/A-S-8.3 31.32/A-S-8.4 22/A-S-8.3 12/A-S-8.2 44/A-S-8.3 22/A-S-8.4 42/A-S-8.2 33/A-S-8.2 11/A-S-8.2 33/A-S-8.2 12/A-S-8.4 33/A-S-8.2 43/A-S-8.2 43/A-S-8.2 34/A-S-8.2 43/A-S-8.2 43/A-S-8.2 23/A-S-8.2 23/A-S-8.2 32/A-S-8.2 32/A-S-8.2 32/A-S-8.2 32/A-S-8.2 32/A-S-8.2 44/A-S-8.2 42/A-S-8.3 42/A-S-8.3 42/A-S-8.3 42/A-S-8.3 12/A-S-8.2 12/A-S-8.2 12.13/A-S-8.2 12.13/A-S-8.2 12/A-S-8.2 12/A-S-8.2 12/A-S-8.2 12/A-S-8.2 51.52/A-1.3 24/A-1.2 SEE MANF. SEE MANF. SILL 12/A-S-8.3 12/A-S-8.3 23/A-S-8.3 23/A-S-8.3 33/A-S-8.3 23/A-S-8.3 23/A-S-8.3 23/A-S-8.3 23/A-S-8.3 23/A-S-8.3 23/A-S-8.3 12/A-S-8.3 23/A-S-8.3 23/A-S-8.3 23/A-S-8.3 33/A-S-8.3 33/A-S-8.3 33/A-S-8.3 23/A-S-8.3 23/A-S-8.3 23/A-S-8.3 23/A-S-8.3 23/A-S-8.3 23/A-S-8.3 23/A-S-8.3 ^A^S-W 12/A-S-8.3 23/A-S-8.3 12/A-S-8.3 13/A-S-8.3 23/A-S-8.3 13/A-S-8.3 23/A-S-8.3 13/A-S-8.3 13/A-S-8.3 13/A-S-8.3 13/A-S-8.3 13/A-S-8.3 23/A-S-8.3 13/A-S-8.3 13/A-S-8.3 13/A-S-8.3 13/A-S-8.3 13/A-S-8.3 13/A-S-8.3 13/A-S-8.3 13/A-S-8.3 13/A-S-8.3 23/A-S-8.3 33/A-S-8.3 33/A-S-8.3 33/A-S-8.3 33/A-S-8.3 33/A-S-8.3 33/A-S-8.3 33/A-S-8.3 33/A-S-8.3 33/A-S-8.3 33/A-S-8.3 33/A-S-8.3 33/A-S-8.3 — — SEE MANF. SEE MANF. HARDWARE SET NO SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. • Sffi"SPKS^-~- SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. 11 12 — — NOTES 2,4,5,6,7,12 2A5.6.7.12 8,9 8,10 2,6,7 9,10 8,9,12 12 9.10,12 12 — 2,3,4,5,6,7 1 1 1 2,6,7 — — — 2,6,7 — 12 — — 2,6,7 ^-v^^/— >^3*3r4v§^iri^2^-s^->^^— 1N^_X*-^ — ^-^^^ 3,5 3,5,8,9,12 — 9,10,11,12 8,9 — 8,9 — 12 — — 11 — — — — — — — — — 10,11 2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10 2,3,4.5,6,7,8,9,10 2,3,4.5,6,7,8,9,10 2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10 8,9,10 8,9,10 8,9,10 8,9,10 8,9,10 8,9,10 3.5,8,9,10 3,5 3 12 8 8 creating environments people enjoy"1 232AvenWaFaMcante,SuHe112 San Ckmente, CA 92672 P: (949) 361-7950 1 F: (949) 361-7955 1 www.rnndesign.com AUkn*Oifiailm|VI(teUonlv»^,MNbdlC1ia90|J^Md^PE«3B^l3Hin|MF«tw,LAi2W CARLSBAD FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY ADDENDUM 1 EXHIBIT AD01-A-06 ) Sheet No. A-S-8.1 By MH Checked DI Date 02/22/10 .TnhNn 1107570 ,v™/* NTS MSB - UMD SUMMARY * FEEDER SCHEDULE LOCATION: ELECTRICAL ROOM 120 ENCLOSURE: NEMA-1 800 AMP BUS VOLTAGE: 277/480V.3P.4W 65.000 AIC SYM, MINIMUM 800 AMP MAIN CB FEEDER NUMBER MSB-1 MSB-2 MSB-3 MSB-4 MSB-5 MSB-6 MSB-7 MSB-8 MSB-9 MSB-10 MSB-1 1 MSB- 12 MSB- 13 T1-BPR T2-BPC T3-RECEP FROM MSB MSB MSB MSB MSB L_ MSB MSB MSB MSB MSB MSB MSB MSB T1 T2 T3 A-F (:AB-> LTG. T1 T2 ,$P£A ( MCC ) ELEV. P.V. SYS. T3 BPR BPC RECEP NO. OF SETS CONDUIT (INCHES) 4' 2 1/2" 2" 2" 2 1/2" 2 1/2" r 2" 2" r 1 1/2" 2" CONDUCTORS (AWG) 4 4/0 3 8 3 4 3 250MCM 3 4/0 3 8 3| 3/0 4# 8 4# 1/0 4# 4/0 GROUND (AWG) 4 8 8 2 4 10 4 8 6 2 * FEEDER LENGTH IN FEET ARE INDICATED FOR VOLTAGE DROP CALCULATION ONLY AND SHALL NOT BE USED FOR QUANWY TAKEOFFS. CONNECTED LOAD AMPS 164.06 69.16 12.99 25.86 223.72 107.89 20.21 0.00 106.70 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 730.47 KVA 136.40 57.50 10.80 21.50 186.00 89.70 16.80 88.60 607.30 607.30 FEEDER LENGTH* VOLTAGE DROP REMARKS FUTURE FUTURE SPACE SPACE SPACE SPACE LOAD INCLUDED LOAD INCLUDED LOAD INCLUDED SUBTOTAL 25% OF LARGEST MOTOR TOTAL LOAD nnra T M A D •iBv TAYLOR & • 1 GAINES 800 North Ferrari Lane, Suite 100 Ontario, California 91764 Phone: 909.477.6915 Fax: 909.477.6916 www.ttqcorp.com Project No. 2008.040.00 rrmdesigngroup creating environments people enjoy" 232 AvenkJa Fabricate. Suite 112 San Ctefrante.CA 92672 P: (949) 361-79501F: (949) 381-79551 www.rnmdesi9n.coni CARLSBAD FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY ADDENDUM 1 EXHIBIT EDO l-E-01 E-0.7 By AS Checked Date MD 02/22/2010 Job No. Scale _ 1107570 NTS MAIN SWITCHBOARDS-MSB' 800 AMPS, 480Y/2 (2) 225AF SPACES (2) 100AF SPACES 112.5 KVA 480V-208/120V. 30, 4W 1/2"C-1#2 GND 1C-4#8 & 1#10 GNO STRUCTURAL MECHANICAL ELECTRICAL CIVIL 208V-120/208V, STUB-OUT AND CAPPED VIA HANDHOLES FUTURE POWER PANEL "AB nnra T M A !• TAYLOR& • GAINES 800 North Ferrari Lane, Suite 100 Ontario, California 91764 Phone: 909.477.6915 Fax: 909.477.6916 www.ttgcorp.com Project No. 2008.040.00 rrmdesigngroup creating environments people enjoy" 232 Avenkta Fabricate, Suite 112 San demote, CA 92672 P: (949) 361-79501 f: (949) 361-79551 vmw.mndesign.aini CARLSBAD FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY ADDENDUM 1 EXHIBIT EDO l-E-02 Sheet No. By E-0.7 AS Checked Date MD 02/22/2010 Job No. Scale _ 1107570 NTS MOUNTING: SURFACE PANEL-RECEP LOCATION: ELECTRICAL ROOM #123 VOLTAGE: 1 20/208V.3P.4W 10.000 AIC SYM 225 AMP BUS MLO N 0 T E DESCRIPTION 100 YARD RANGE 100 YARD RANGE 100 YARD RANGE 100 YARD RANGE CAMERA 100 YARD RANGE CAMERA 100 YARD RANGE CAMERA 25 YARD RANGE CAMERA 25 YARD RANGE CAMERA 25 YARD RANGE CAMERA GEN. RECEPTACLE GEN. RECEPTACLE GEN. RECEPTACLE CONTROL RM. 118 CONTROL RM. 118 CONTROL RM. 118 GEN. RECEPTACLE GEN. RECEPTACLEfiEt^jjECEElACLt^^^-x,- TELE/DATA RM. 107 UPS - - ~**-*-s*-**s^l SUBTOTAL VOLT-AMPERES A 1080 1200 1600 1448 1080 900 V"X*p~> B 1080 1200 1600 1448 1080 900 2720 | 10028 2720 10028 C 1080 1200 1600 1448 1080 -9PO^ 2720 10028 L T E •\f K E C P 5 6 6 •\*- M I S C 6 5 6 9 9 9 8 8 8 8 3 3 5 5 >5- 1 V 0 L E 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ,)~ 3 - - B R K R 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 W 40 - * C1 R C 1 3 9 7 9 11 13 13 17 19 21 23 28 27 29 31 33 38 i*7 M )»1 C1 R C II 4 a 8 10 12 14 18 18 20 22 24 28 28 30 32 34 38 38 40 42 B R K 30 v 20s 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 - - 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 P 0 L £* 2 - ^1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 - - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 M 1 S P- 1 ^ 2 2 3 1 13 KUJO oSv_ 6 5 7 7 6 6 L I T ~t. *v_ \ J-S~54 CONVENIENCE OUTLETS ^ TOTAL LOAD - 53.396 KVA Y 123 MISCELLANEOUS OUTLETS |^ OR - 149 AMPS < v_^^>s_yv^s_>\_A_^.^»^v-^\ VOLT-AMPERES A ""sv*''""N*1 1456 xs>>s. 1080 1260 1600 1000 500 300 7196 17224 B — «V^"> 1456 •*^wxv &? 1080 1080 1000 900 1600 1560 8676 18704 C 1260 1080 1000 1500 500 500 7440 17468 53.4 KVA DESCRIPTION CU & FC-S1-1 - tf^s^sC^f^t^t-^^^-^ GEN. RECEPTACLE GEN. RECEPTACLE GEN. RECEPTACLE GEN. RECEPTACLE GEN. RECEPTACLE GEN. RECEPTACLE RM.| 114. 122 PROJECTOR GATE OPENER - - POLICE BAR LIGHTING POLICE BAR LIGHTING EF/S1-11 EF/S1-2. S2-2. S1-12 CONTROL PNLS "ACP"/"BCP" FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL FIRE SMOKE DAMPERS SPARE SUBTOTAL VA PER PHASE N 0 T E \ ^ 1 1 2 2 TOTAL CONNECTED LOAD NOTES 1 2 3 4 VIA LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL PROVIDE LOCK-ON DEVICE T M A D 'STRUCTURAL -• . _ lvxi s^n n -MECHANICAL • TAYLOR& -ELECTRJCAL • GAIN ES •CIVIL 800 North Ferrari Lane, Suite 100 Ontario, California 91764 Phone: 909.477.6915 Fax: 909.477.6916 www.ttgcorp.com Project No. 2008.040.00 rrmdesigngroup creating environments people enjoy"1 232 Avenida Fabrirante, Suite 112 San Clements, CA 92672 P: (949) 361-7950 1 R (949) 361-7955 1 ww.nmdesign.com A Ctffarii Coponftn | VUtf , M*d IC1 1 090 1 J«ny Udud, PC fiOtS. LS ttzn I Jot Fflrtw, U BM4 CARLSBAD FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY ADDENDUM 1 EXHIBIT ADO l-E-03 E-0.21 By AS Checked Date MD 02/22/2010 Job No. Scale _ 1107570 NTS LOCATION: TELE/DATA ROOM #107 SUBTOTAL 2000 2000 1000 -ELECTRICAL M A D • TAYLOR& • GAINES 800 North Ferrari Lane, Suite 100 Ontario, California 91764 Phone: 909.477.6915 Fax: 909.477.6916 www.ttgcorp.com Project No. 2008.040.00 rrmdesigngroup creating environments people enjoy"* 232 Avenlda Fabricate, Suite 112 San Oemente.CA 92672 P: (949) 361-79501F: (949) 361-79551 vmw.rmidffiign.coni A C4fcn* Copnfcn | Victor uontparaqr, tehfcd K110801 Jany Mcta^ re MBW5. L3 Km | Jdl Frtw, U AB44 CARLSBAD FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY ADDENDUM 1 EXHIBIT ADO l-E-04 Sheet No. By E-0.21 AS Checked Date MD 02/22/2010 Job No. Scale _ 1107570 NTS I ;OMMUWCATION 1ELEPH 'ULLBOXES. (2) EACH, fitftf 10 UTILITY OWER^MANHOLE \ SITE POWER AND SIGNAL PLAN • STRUCTURAL •MECHANICAL ^^agFESS/QJg • ELECTRICAL "•*> V^TRH^C* i GAINES 'CMl- 800 North Ferrari Lane, Suite 100 Ontario, California 91764 Phone: 909.477.6915 Fax: 909.477.6916 www.ttgcorp.com Project No. 2008.040.00 CARLSBAD FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY rrmdesigngroup creating environments people enjoy" ADDENDUM 1 EXHIBIT ADO l-E-05 232 Avenlda Fabricate, Suite 112 San Clements, CA 92672 P: (949) 361-7950 1 F: (949) 361-7955 1 www.rrmdesign.coni KEY NOTES IN ADDITION TO 3-FEEDERS, PROVIDE (1) 4"C., SPARE FOR POWER. ^_>V_Xs_ PROVIDE (2) 2"C., FOR CAW, (3) 3"C., FOR TELEPHONE/DATA DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS, (2) 4" CONDUIT FOR TELEPHONE SERVICE AND (1) 3" CONDUIT FOR CATV SERVICE. 4"C., SPARE FOR POWER -tfbARM [R, PROVIDE: 12 C., FOR CATV 3"C., FOR TELEPHONE/DATA (1) 3"C., FOR CATV SERVICE (2) 4"C., FOR TELEPHONE SERVICE >^^-~vr-^s-^s-~v^^-~*s~-*v>^s~ IN ADDITION TO POWER FEEDERS, PROVIDE: (1) 4"C., SPARE FOR POWER (2) 2"C., FOR FIRE ALARM (2) 3"C., FOR TELEPHONE/DATA IN ADDITION TO POWER FEEDER, PROVIDE: (1) 1"C., FOR TELEPHONE/DATA COORDINATE CONDUIT ENTRY TO ENCLOSURE CONCRETE PAD WITH PUMP SUPPUER/INSTALLER/CONTROLLER. SITE POWER AND SIGNAL PLAN TM A D iM ' TAYLOR& • - GAIN ES 800 North Ferrari Lane, Suite 100 Ontario, California 91764 Phone: 909.477.6915 Fax: 909.477.6916 www.ttgcorp.com Project No. 2008.040.00 rrmdesigngroup creating environments people enjoy" 232 Avenida Fabricate, Suite 112 San Clements, CA 92672 P: (949) 361-79501F: (949) 361-79551 www.mndesign.com A O*mli Cnporafen | VWor UoHfamt, Aichfcd IC110801 Jwy Uchao^ re nMK. IS Km \ Jaf Fatar, LA RB44 CARLSBAD FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY ADDENDUM 1 EXHIBIT ADO l-E-06 Sheet No. By E-1.2 AS Checked Date MD 02/22/2010 Job No. Scale _ 1107570 NTS FIRST FLOOR POWER PLAN T M A D ; --»!• ' TAYLOR & -ELECTRICAL • GAINES 800 North Ferrari Lane, Suite 100 Ontario, California 91764 Phone: 909.477.6915 Fax: 909.477.6916 www.ttgcorp.com Project No. 2008.040.00 N rrmdesigngroup creating environments people enjoy"" 232 Avenlda Fabricate, Suite 112 San elements, CA 92672 P: (949) 361-79501F: (949) 381-79551 www.mndeslgn.coni CARLSBAD FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY ADDENDUM 1 EXHIBIT ADO l-E-07 Sheet No. By Checked Date Job No. Scale _ E-S-3.1 AS MD 02/22/2010 1107570 POWER J-BOX FOR IRRIGATION SYSTEM CONTROLLERS TP-2 COMPRESSOR LTG2-1I>,17,19 T3 MAINTENANCE DISCONNECT TRANSFORMER F.- ,',.-•--,.-• ,.,, *f r, ,,f, f ,• - DISTRIBUTION n SWITCHBOARD "SDP I II !l I i—" •--• FUTURE ISOLATION TRAf FOR FUTURE PV SYS FUTURE PANEL "PV" FIRST FLOOR POWER PLAN E1E1O T M A D "STRUCTURAL ™lB TAVI/^D 9 -MECHANICAL !• ' TAYLOR & -ELECTRICAL • 1 GAIN ES 'CIVIL 800 North Ferrari Lane, Suite 100 Ontario, California 91764 Phone: 909.477.6915 Fax: 909.477.6916 www.ttgcorp.com Project No. 2008.040.00 N rrmdesigngroup creating environments people enjoy" 232 AvenldaFabrtcante, Suite 112 San Ctemente.CA 92672 P: (949) 361-79501F: (949) 361-79551 www.rnndesjgn.com CARLSBAD FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY ADDENDUM 1 EXHIBIT ADO l-E-08 Sheet No. By E-S-3.1 AS Checked Date MD 02/22/2010 Job No. Scale _ 1107570 L30AS Er>25AFU 3P, WP EFZS1-1"— 30AS EH20AFU 3P, WP 30AS 30AFU 2P, WP TO FC/S1-1 IN TEL/DATA ROOM 107, SEE E-S-3.1 RECEP-2,4jv HVAC-7,9,11 ROOF PLAN nnra T M A D • !• 1 TAYLOR & . ^•-3 GAIN ES 'CIVIL 800 North Ferrari Lane, Suite 100 Ontario, California 91764 Phone: 909.477.6915 Fax: 909.477.6916 www.ttgcorp.com Project No. 2008.040.00 N rrmdesigngroup creating environments people enjoy" 232 Avenlda Fabricate, Suite 112 San demente.CA 92672 P: (949) 361-79601F: (949) 361-79551 www.rnndesign.ooni CARLSBAD FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY ADDENDUM 1 EXHIBIT AD01-E-09 Sheet No. By Checked Date Job No. Scale _ E-S-6.1 AS MD 02/22/2010 1107570 nnra T M A D IB"* TAYLOR & •fl : GAIN ES -CIVIL 800 North Ferrari Lane, Suite 100 Ontario, California 91764 Phone: 909.477.6915 Fax: 909.477.6916 www.ttgcorp.com Project No. 2008.040.00 rrmdesigngroup creating environments people enjoy" 232 AventdaFabrfcante, Suite 112 San Clements, CA 92672 P: (949) 361-7950 1 F: (949) 361-7955 j www.mndesign.com A Cribnto Coptnfcn | vfcta , Ant*d K1 10» | Jwy MUM, P6 fla095, 18 «27I | J«fl Fwbw. LA «M4 CARLSBAD FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY ADDENDUM 1 EXHIBIT AD01-M-01 Sheet No. By M-0.2 PR Checked Date VR 02/22/2010 Job No. Scale _ 1107570 NTS (2)10x10 CD —1 300 CFMS EA. 12x12 CR 310 CFMR14x14 CR 600 CFMR2 CD MS EA.GENERAL STORAGE 104 14x14 CR 450 CFME AC-S1-110"0 IS 8x8 CR 140 CFMR WEAPONS_STORAGt-IIX 106 14x1 500 OFOCR UNIT 10"0 10x10 CD 300 CFMS6x6 CD 60 CFM 12x12 290 CFMS 14x14 CD IT16 1 FIRST FLOOR PLAN CH T M A D • ':«>.J TAYLOR & ••1B^ GAINES -CIVIL 800 North Ferrari Lane, Suite 100 Ontario, California 91764 Phone: 909.477.6915 Fax: 909.477.6916 www.ttgcorp.com Project No. 2008.040.00 N rrmdesigngroup creating environments people enjoy*" 232 AvenWaFabricante, Suite 112 San Clements. CA 92672 P: (949) 361-79501F: (949) 361-79551 www.mndesign.aini A CMmii Coponfcn | VUa UoayHmi. AnMtat IPC110U | *ny UOmd. PC HOBS, LSMZH | MS FMv.LAI2M4 CARLSBAD FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY ADDENDUM 1 EXHIBIT ADO l-M-02 Sheet No. By Checked Date M-S-2.1 PR VR 02/22/2011, Job No. Scale _ 1107570 REVISE PLATFOR TO FIT LARGER SIZE UNIT AND 26x16 RA DUCTS-DTR, TRANSITION TO 30xT4 SA AND RA 5x12 EXH JCT DTR (2)REFRIGERANT PIPES DTREXH-v DTR \ Sn AND 26x16 RA yCTS-DTR, TRANSITION18x22 SA AND DUCTS DTR, TO 20x14 SA DUCT 24x16 SA AND RATRANSITION 22 SA AND 26x16 RA DTR, TRANSITION 24x16 SA AND RA ROOF PLAN T M A D TAYLOR & • . GAINES 800 North Ferrari Lane, Suite 100 Ontario, California 91764 Phone: 909.477.6915 Fax: 909.477.6916 www.ttgcorp.com Project No. 2008.040.00 CARLSBAD FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY rrmdesigngroup creating environments people enioy^ ADDENDUM 1 EXHIBIT ADO l-M-03 232 Avenlda Fabricate, Suite 112 San Clements, CA 92672 P: (949) 361-79501F: (949) 361-79551 www.nmdesign.com TO EMS CONTROL PANEL "BCP" REMOTELY LOCATED IN CONTROL RM 118 208V-J0-60HZ ! ,__, MDISC. 1 208V-J0-60H i __}—I DISC (V DISC (4) r--*-—i_J i Ji ii i--i i © FAN COIL/CONDENSING UNITS (5 FAN COIL UNIT CONTROL WIRING DIAG.NTS 3 T M A D -STRUCTURAL V -, TAYLOR & :BP, GAINES -C1VIL 800 North Ferrari Lane, Suite 100 Ontario, California 91764 Phone: 909.477.6915 Fax: 909.477.6916 www.ttgcorp.com Project No. 2008.040.00 rrmdesigngroup creating environments people enjoy1" 232AvenkJaFabrican(e,SJle112 SanCtemente,CA92672 P: (949) 361-79501F: (949) 361-79551 www.rnndeslgn.com d fCt TOO | My UdMl. K MM5, LS H2n | M Fwtar, LA «2B44 CARLSBAD FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY ADDENDUM 1 EXHIBIT ADO l-M-04 Sheet No. By M-6.1 PR Checked . Date VR 02/22/20 R Job No. Scale _ 1107570 NTS BACKFLOW-J- DEVICEl rrm group creating environments people enjoy*" 232 AvwiWa Fabricate, Suite 112 San Clements, CA 92672 P: (949) 361-79501F: (949) 381-79551 xww.rTmdesign.com CARLSBAD FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY ADDENDUM 1 EXHIBIT AD01-L-01 Sheet No. By L-1.2 CD Checked Date BH 02/22/10 Job No. Scale _ 1107570 B"xB"x4". HP PUU. BOX FOR RADIO/ANTENNA CABUNG 4'x8W4" FIRERATED ^PLYWOOD - -MHC- .— 110V DOUBLE / DUPLEX OUTLET ffl_ \*. - ENTRANCE CONDUITAT LEFT EDGE OF BACKBOARD STUBBED 6" ABOVE FLOOR. IN. CALL 858-268-6722 ACTUAL ON TELEPHONE ACCESS LINES WJLL ETON OF INSPECTION. - IN A SECURE ROOM NTS ^RANK EOF.SMKCI LjiD o >T RABCE EQUP.STOWff Iran ^} mm AREA THE ROOF FOR DISPATCH ANT! 1"C.. STUB-OUT ![>M\ w111 f ', \Jf c /Tvjiy~[; i '' Tjfy ~7 — ~7~ ( 0 NNA BELOW COUNTER «WONS SfCBGE MAIN TELEPHONfjSn TERMINAL CABINET AND EQUIPMENT "MTTC". d» o <1> TWO-GANG J-80X FOR PROJECTION SYSTE CONTROLLER. MOUNT +43" A.F.F. WITH (1 STUB-OUT INSIDE CEILING SPACE. SEE EO. ONE-GANG J-BOX FOR PROJECTION SYSTE of Carlsbad Public Works - Contract Administration March 8, 2010 ADDENDUM NO. 2 RE: JOINT FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY BID NO. PWS10-31UTIL, CONTRACT NO. 3686 Please include the attached addendum in the Notice to Bidder/Request for Bids you have for the above project. This addendum-receipt acknowledged-must be attached to your Request for Bid when your bid is submitted. KEVIN DAVIS Sr. Contract Administrator Attachment ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF ADDENDUM NO. 2 Bidder's Signature 1635 Faraday Avenue • Carlsbad, CA 92008-7314 • (760) 602-4677 • FAX (760) 602-8562 ADDENDUM NO. 2 CARLSBAD JOINT FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY CONTRACT NO. 3686 SPECIFICATIONS 1. Reference is made to Addendum No. 1, Item 2, Part (A) Coverages And Limits: "Course of Construction/Builder's Risk Insurance". After the last sentence beginning with the words "The insurer shall waive ..." add a third bullet item with the following sentence: "Earthquake and Flood Insurance is not required." 2. Reference is made to CONTRACTORS PROPOSAL, page 28, titled "Bidder's Statement of Technical Ability and Experience". The form shown on page 28 is not required to be submitted because the City of Carlsbad has pre-qualified all the bidders. Bidders that are not pre-qualified will not be allowed to submit a bid for the project. 3. Section 02751. CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT A. Section 3.5 Joints has been updated per the following: 3.5 JOINTS A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline, unless otherwise indicated. 1. When joining existing pavement, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless otherwise indicated. B. Weakened-Plane Control or Contraction Joints: Provide joints at spacing of 15'-0" on centers, maximum each way. Construct control joints for depth equal to at least 1/4 of the concrete thickness, as follows: a. Form tooled joints in fresh concrete by grooving top with recommended tool and finishing edge with jointer. b. Form sawed joints using powered saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut joints into hardened concrete as soon as surface will not be torn, abraded, or otherwise damaged by cutting action. C. Construction Joints: Place construction joints at end of placements and at locations where placement operations are stopped for period of more than 1/2 hour, except where such placements terminate at expansion joints. Construct joints in accordance with standard details. D. Transverse Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints at maximum of 180'-0" on centers, maximum each way unless otherwise shown on the Construction Drawings. Provide premolded joint filler for expansion joints abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, sidewalks, and other fixed objects. 1. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. 2. Terminate joint filler not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than 1 inch (25 mm) below finished surface if joint sealant is indicated. 3. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not indicated. 4. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint-filler sections together. 5. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal, plastic, or other temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint. E. Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial floating with an edging tool to a 3/8- inch (10-mm) radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces. 4. Section 03330. LITHOCRETE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE B. This section has been added to the specifications. 5. Section 03335. ARCHITECTURAL HP CONCRETE SYSTEMS C. This section has been added to the specifications. 6. Section 12490. WINDOW TREATMENTS D. The entire specification has been updated to more accurately reflect the proposed product and intent of the manufacturer. 7. Section 13050. SMOKE DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM E. Section 2.04.B.1 - DMX Analog Control • Revise the sentence to read: "The fog machine shall operate from a remote control that plugs into the machine using a 3-pin DMX connector and adaptor unit. Connecting cable shall be Category 5 cable. Actual lengths of cable shall be verified in the field based on actual installation locations." 8. Section 15410, PLUMBING PIPING F. Subpart 2.04.A WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE was added to the specification and states the following: • Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L hard drawn. Fittings: ANSI B16.18, cast copper alloy solder joint pressure fittings. Joints: ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA. G. Subpart 2.09.A CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING, ABOVE GROUND was revised to state the following: • DWV Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type M hard drawn. Fittings: ANSI B16.29, wrought copper solder joint drainage fittings. Joints: ASTM B32, solder Grade 95TA. Insulate concealed piping with one-inch thick fiberglass insulation with factory applied vapor barrier jacket. 9. Section 16725. CAMPUS SECURITY SYSTEM A. Section 2.03.C.1 .B - Fixed Cameras • Delete the sentence "The main power board and camera assembly shall be easily removed/replaced via snap in assembly". B. Section 3.06.A - Schedule of CCTV Camera Locations • The following cameras have been added: Location Dwg Ref. Room# Camera Type Door # Mount Lobby Entry A-S-3.1 101 Fixed Dome 01 Interior Ceiling • The following two (2) cameras have been changed: Location Dwg Ref. Room# Camera Type Door # Mount Lobby Entry A-S-3.1 101 Fixed Dome 02 Interior Ceiling Check-in A-S-3.1 116 Fixed Dome 09 Interior Ceiling CONSTRUCTION PLANS 1. Sheet C-6 A. Per Exhibit AD02-C-1, the keynote pointing to the East vertical curb has been updated to call out keynote #2. B. Per Exhibit AD02-C-1, the keynote #3 that appeared to point toward a fire line has been removed. 2. Sheet C-10 1. Per Exhibit AD02-C-2, the demolition notes, construction notes and legend were all updated on the Improvement Plan. 3. Sheet A-1.1 A. Per Exhibits AD02-A-01 through AD02-A-08, the dimensions of the site wall elements have been defined and a distinction has been made to clarify which portions are CMU and which are perforated metal. 3. SheetA-S-2.13 A. Per Exhibit AD02-A-09, the legend of the Finish Plan was updated. 4. Sheet A-S-5.2 A. Per Exhibit AD02-A-10, the legend has been updated to call out the color for the concrete block of the Shooting Range building. 5. Sheet A-S-8.1 A. Per Exhibit AD02-A-11, the Door Schedule has been updated to show that doors 3, 4, 51, 52, 53, and 54 now have a hollow metal frame in order to create a 1-hr, rating. 6. SheetE-1.2 A. AD02-E-01 thru AD02-E-03: Revised Site Plan to reflect additional conduit and cabling requirement between the facility and existing Safety Center building. 7. Sheets E-S-4.1 and E-S-4.3 A. AD02-E-04 thru AD02-E-07: Add data ports for wireless AP at the locations shown on attached sketches SK-1 and SK-2 from the city of Carlsbad. Added note #6. GENERAL QUESTIONS 1. Q: Section 07140 Fluid Applied Waterproofing: 1. The section is labeled Fluid Membrane but in the section the product is a sheet membrane. We want to verify that sheet membrane is correct and that the section name should be changed. 2. The plans show waterproofing at detail 8/S5.3. Our question, which is on the same page and detail 6/S5.3, does not show waterproofing on foundation wall or adjacent planter wall. Both these walls show a French drain pipe. Should they also show waterproofing? A: Yes. Specification Section 07140 preferred product is the membrane waterproofing as described within the specification. Provide membrane waterproofing as shown in detail 8/S-5.3 AND PROVIDE membrane waterproofing on foundation wall, top of footing, and interior face of planter walls similar to 6/S-5.3. 2. Q: Section 08520 Aluminum Windows and 08410 Aluminum Entrances. Review Arcadia attachment to determine if it is equal to EFCO as specified. A: Comparison of the submitted substitution request of Arcadia material to the specified and detailed EFCO material resulted with the opinion that the Arcadia products are not sufficiently equal and thereby NOT acceptable for implementation into the project. The sizes of the Arcadia sections are different enough to require reconsideration of details with interaction of other finish materials. Also, the Arcadia section places the glass elements further toward the face of the storefront section than the desired design. 3. Q: 24 & 34/A-S-9.8: Review and respond to the attached drawing regarding connections of aluminum panels. Aluminum cannot be welded to steel, so how will this connection work? A: At the infill panels defined and detailed on sheet A-S-9.8, all angles attached to the steel columns and beams to be steel angles in lieu of reference aluminum angles. Thru-bolts connecting aluminum infill panels to be either aluminum or stainless steel. All other comments and references remain as referenced. 4. Q: A-1.1: How often do the perforated metal screen panels occur along the perimeter wall? Please clarify how many 24' long perforated panels are required in the perimeter screen wall. A: See Exhibits AD02-A-01 through AD02-A-08 for clarification. 5. Q: The specifications list three (3) different colors of CMU block. Are three required? If yes, provide locations for different colors. A: Yes, three colors are required for this project. See sheets A-C-5.1, A-C- 5.2, A-R-5.1. In addition, refer to Exhibit AD02-A-10 which shows that the legend for sheet A-S-5.2 has been updated to call out the CMU color. 6. Q: Plumber is asking if they can use the following: 1) type '!_' copper above grade for the water lines, 2) schedule 40 PVC pipe for the waste piping below grade, 3) type M copper pipe for condensate lines A: Refer to the revisions noted above for specification section 15410 Plumbing Piping. The use of a schedule 40 PVC pipe is acceptable for all sewer lines. However, it must be labeled "PVC DWV". 7. Q: Does the allowance for blasting cover rock encountered during the underground utility trenching or earthwork only? A: The blasting allowance was inclusive of all proposed utility trenching. 8. Q: Given the depth of site utilities and the hard and rocky soil conditions with unknown factors can an allowance for hard digging be provided for all bidders to include. A: The GeoTech report contained a discussion regarding excavation (Section 3.7.2)- based on hollow stem auger borings (Appendix B) and a seismic refraction field study (Appendix D). We would recommend that the bidders refer to that information and the project plans to determine the depth of hard/difficult digging/ripping conditions and/or blasting based on his excavation equipment, which may vary. Note that the cross sections of seismic refraction lines 5, 6, and 8 in Appendix D present a good graphical representation of the depth of harder underlying formation beneath the site. 9. Q: On sheet A-S-8.1, Note #8, One Hour Rated Door, is noted for Aluminum storefront doors #3, 4, 51, 52, 53 & 54. Please clarify, as these doors do not have a fire rating. A. Per Exhibit AD02-A-11, the Door Schedule has been updated to show that doors 3, 4, 51, 52, 53, and 54 now have a hollow metal frame in order to create a 1-hr, rating. 10.Q: Window Type 'C', Aluminum Pass-Thru Window, is shown in sheet A- S-8.5, but is not on the Schedule. Please clarify if this window is to be used. A: Window Type 'C' is no longer being used in the project and should not be considered for bidding purposes. 11. Q: On sheet C-6, Keynote #1, curb & gutter, pointing to what appears to be a vertical curb along the East side of the site. Should this be keynote #2? A: Per Exhibit AD02-C-01, the keynote pointing to the East vertical curb has been updated to call out keynote #2. 12.Q: On sheet C-6 there are two keynote #3's, one is pointing to a swale and the other appears to be pointing to a fire line. Please clarify. A: Per Exhibit AD02-C-01, the keynote #3 that appeared to point toward a fire line has been removed. 13.Q: What is the decorative concrete finish? A: Refer to the specification sections 03330 - Lithocrete Cast-in-Place Concrete and 03335 - Architectural HD Concrete systems. 14.Q: Reference Sheets A-1.1, A-1.2, A-1.4, S-6.1. On sheet A-1.1 details 51/A-1.2 and 52/A-1.2 point to the same wall. Detail 51 refers to Detail 41/A-1.4, Site Wall Elevation. Detail 52 refers to Detail 42/A-1.4, Site Wall Elevation w/ Perforated Screen. Please provide the extent of wall with Perforated Screen. Please provide top of wall elevations and top of footing elevations along the length of these walls so bidders can properly calculate. Please identify on plans where footing detail 9/S6.1 applies. A: Refer to Exhibit AD02-A-01 through AD02-A-08 for the extent of the various site wall types. The top of wall elevations will vary depending on the finished grade, so refer to the grading plan on sheet C-6. Detail 9/S- 6.1 occurs to the South of the vehicular entry gate along the site wall as the finished grade to the West is higher than the finished paving inside the Rodeo/Drill Grounds. 15.Q: Is the curved wall at the employee eating area casting-in-place concrete per 31/A-1.3? A: The curved wall as shown in 12/A-1.3 is a cast-in-place concrete wall. The wall transitions from a cast-in-place wall to a CMU wall where the decorative concrete pavers end at the Employee Eating Area. The cast-in- place concrete wall transitions in height per Civil drawing C-6. 16.Q: The deductive alternates call for "All site improvements adjacent to and utilities to a...POC to be 3' from the face of the building" to be part of the base contract. Our interpretation is that this means the site improvements up to the building footprint are left in the base bid and not deducted. Is that correct? Does this mean that the remedial earthwork to establish the building pads is left in the base bid and not deducted? Are the building footprints to be left as exposed soil? A: All site improvements and utilities to within 3'-0" of the building remain as part of the base bid and are not deducted. Remedial earthwork to establish building pads remain as part of the base bid and are not deducted. Building footprints are to be left with a minimum 2 inch layer of gravel. 17.Q: General Note A. on A-C-2.1 refers to sheet A-C-2.0. There is no A-C- 2.0. General Note A. on A-C-2.8 refers to sheet A-R-2.3. Should this be sheet A-C-2.3? A: General Note A on sheets A-C-2.1 and A-C-2.8 has been updated to say "Refer to sheets A-C-2.7, 2.8 & 2.9 for additional fire training props and equipment not shown on these drawings." 18.Q: Demolition note 4, relocate street light. Is this the same light that gets installed under Construction Note 2, or is that a new street light? (The existing street light symbol shows up within the new driveway area.) What does the surface area consist of where the street light foundation is being placed? Is there asphalt patch needed between the sawcut and the new driveway? Is there Class 2 base required under the G-14 driveway? A: Refer to Exhibit AD02-C-2. This is the same street light being removed in the demo plan. Existing improvements are still left on proposed improvement plan as reference. Surface area is existing ground. As called out in note 2, street light should be constructed per SDE-101 and have an anchor base foundation. Hatching on improvement plan refers to the legend which calls out concrete driveway standard drawing and the concrete specs. Yes, minimum requirements have been added per the attached exhibit. 19.Q: Reference Sheets C-9, A-C-2.1 & A-C-6.1. The 4" PCC sidewalk limits shown on sheet C-9 appear to be different than the area on sheet A-C-2.1 between Column Line D-E & 1-6. Building section 1/A-C-6.1 seems to show building slab at this area although it is outside the building wall lines. Please clarify whether this area is sidewalk or building slab and how they transition. A: The concrete paved area defined by grid lines D-E and 1-6 on sheet A- C-2.1 is an exterior sidewalk and not part of the building slab. 20. Q: What are the specifications for the decorative paving shown on plans C-9 and 12/A-1.3? Is this concrete or spec 02783? A: The decorative paving indicated on C-9 and detail 12/A-1.3 is referenced in specification section 02783 Concrete Pavers. 21. Q: The specifications in section 02751, 3.5.D. say to provide contraction joints "as indicated" with three different types and no spacing requirements. There is no joint information on the plans. Can we get a joint pattern plan for this work, or spacing requirement identifying joint types? A: Refer to the revised specification section 02751, 3.5 - Joints, listed above in "Specifications" item #1. 22. Q: Please clarify the mix designs for the site concrete work. Spec 02751 calls for three different compressive strengths: 4000, 3500, and 3000. It also indicates a 0.50 water cement ratio which makes for a 4000 psi mix. The civil drawings refer to City Standard details which are typically 2500 and 3250 psi city mixes. The geotechnical report indicates a 3250 mix for the 8" PCC. Can we use the following? Driveways and 8" PCC - 3250 city mix; Curbs, Gutter, Sidewalks - 2500 city mix. A: We recommended 8" pavement section with 3250 psi concrete based on proposed traffic loading and an assumed flexural strength. The use of a 3,500 psi concrete (i.e., a higher strength) would be acceptable. In addition, the use of a 2,500 psi mix is acceptable for curbs, gutters and sidewalks per the City's standards. 23. Q: A substitution request was issued by Kingspan Panels for their exterior metal wall panels and preformed roof panels per specification 07411. A: Although the wall panels are extremely similar, there are two unresolved items currently restricting the acceptance of the Morin panel. One is finish coats over the steel panel; unable to compare submitted substitution manufacturer finish coatings. Two is no color sample submitted for comparison; search of manufacturer website resulted in no corresponding color reference. Substitution must match exactly in both of the above conditions in order to be considered. 24. Q: Specification Section 02150 Shoring and Underpinning 1.01 A - states underpinning of buildings as shown on structural drawings. Structural drawings don't appear to show any underpinning. Please verify that there is no requirement for underpinning the building. A: As a result of construction means and methods for the new structures, shoring and underpinning may occur. Specification 02150 - Shoring and Underpinning, Part 3 - Execution, Paragraph 3.01 Design of Shoring reads as follows: "A. As directed by Contractor's Structural Engineer." As such, the Contractor shall provide for any construction shoring and underpinning as necessary. 25. Q: Specification 03451 calls for Rainguard water sealer for the architectural precast concrete. Is this intended to be factory or field applied? A: Factory application is preferred. 26. Q: The footing steps shown on sheets S-S-2.1 and S-S-2.2 don't match the footing steps shown on Wall Elevation plan S-S-3.5. Please advise on whether to bid per the Foundation plans or the Wall Elevations. A: The stepped footing indicators on the structural plans are there to show the need for stepped footings. Exact location will depend on the final finished grade. The requirements for the minimum distance from the top of the finished grade to the bottom of footing and the minimum coverage to the top of footing are given in the structural details. Exact location and exact number of steps shall be determined by the contractor, in the field, based on the above noted criteria. 27. Q: Detail 12 on A-S-9.4 indicates to weld aluminum L-clip to vertical and horizontal members. Can you please advise on how can aluminum perforated panel be attached to steel guardrail? Per AWS D1.1, structural steel cannot be welded to aluminum. A: At the infill panels defined and detailed on sheet A-S-9.4, all angles attached to the vertical and horizontal members to be steel angles in lieu of reference aluminum angles. Thru-bolts connecting aluminum infill panels to be either aluminum or stainless steel. All other comments and references remain as referenced. 28.Q: The schedule calls out for VCT and rubber base in resilient areas while specs say cover with Armstrong Medintech Sheet Vinyl. Which one should we go with? The ceramic tile base doesn't exist in the color and size selected. It is available in 4x4 however. Will this be acceptable? A: The Armstrong Medintech Sheet Vinyl should be used in all rooms that indicate a resilient flooring material per the finished schedule. At those locations the specified rubber base should be used, NOT a coved base of the sheet vinyl. The use of a 4"x4" ceramic base tile is acceptable. The base tile should be Dal Tile Modern Dimensions color #X714 - Matte Desert Grey(1). 29. Q: After reviewing specification section 13020 we are concerned about the information in Part 3-Products, 3.02 Schedule of Thermal Lining Locations. The charts for A. Commercial Burn Tower Prop, Building "C" and B. Residential Burn Prop Building "R" contain information that does not coincide with the drawings. 1. Warehouse #109, The partial north and south wall are not indicated on the drawings or sections. We cannot determine the extent of coverage for these areas. 2. Office #301, The partial ceiling area is not indicated. 3. Kitchen #105, Wall areas do not match drawings and there is no indication on ceiling coverage. 4. Open Training #201, Walls do not match drawings and ceiling is not indicated on drawing. A:1. Refer to sheets A-C-2.7 and A-C-3.1. The walls and ceilings are clearly indicated in the Fire Training Plan and Reflected Ceiling Plan. 2. Refer to sheets A-C-2.8 and A-C-3.2. The walls and ceilings are clearly indicated in the Fire Training Plan and Reflected Ceiling Plan. 3. Refer to sheets A-R-2.3 and A-R-3.1. The walls and ceilings are clearly indicated in the Fire Training Plan and Reflected Ceiling Plan. 4. Refer to sheets A-R-2.3 and A-R-3.1. The walls and ceilings are clearly indicated in the Fire Training Plan and Reflected Ceiling Plan. 30.Q: Item 5.0 in the General Earthwork and Grading Specifications for Rough Grading of the geotechnical report mentions installation of a subdrain system per the report, grading plans, and standard details. We find no indication on the grading plan. Is a subdrain system required for this project? To clarify, this was sent in relation to the Canyon Subdrain, Standard Details C, D in the soils report. The retaining wall subdrains are indicated on the structural details. A: In summary, there are no canyons on this site. ...Therefore, there are no canyon subdrains... .Note that the Appendix E, General Earthwork and Grading Specifications For Rough Grading, may have items that are not applicable. 31. Q: Sheet S-S-2.1, Column Line P, 6-8, detail 7/S-5.3: The detail indicates a footing width of 8'-3", but the plan scales 12' at the footing dash lines. Similar dimension issue at 6/S-5.3 at column lines P/9, but the 8'-3" dimension shown on the detail will work. Detail 2/S-5.3 (near column lines P/5on S-S-2.1 ) doesn't indicate a footing width. A: For Detail 7/S5.3, total width of the footing can be obtained by using the plan dimensions given on Sheet A-S-2.4 in that area and the dimension given in the details. Dimension from Grid P-Grid N is 4'-0". Dimension from P to face of the planter wall is 3'-4". The thickness of the wall on the left side of Detail 7/S5.3 is 1'-6". Detail 7/S5.3 indicates a dimension of 2" from the face of planter wall to the right end of the footing and a dimension of 1'-6" from the back face of left wall to the left end of the footing. The added up dimension would be 10'-6". See Note II F on Sheet S-4.1 in regard to not using scaled dimensions. Detail 6/S-5.3 should work as indicated. For Detail 2/S-5.3, the total width of the footing can be obtained by adding up the dimensions given. Per Sheet A-S-2.4, dimension from the centerline of column to the face of the concrete wall is 1'-5". Per Detail 2/S-5.3, dimension from centerline of column to the back face of the concrete is 10", dimension from the face of the wall to the right end of footing is 3'-0", dimension from back face of the wall to the left end of the footing is 4", adding up these dimensions should give a footing width of 32. Q: Will a site demolition plan be provided? A: There is no specific Site Demolition Plan. As the site does not contain any building structures, the demolition effort can be identified by review of the Civil documents C-6 and C-10, and as defined in the Project Specifications; 02225-Demolition, 02230-Site Clearing, 02300-Earthwork. 33. Q: We are having difficulty locating the fence line and fencing on the plans in reference to Specification Section 02821 and Section 02830. Any help would be appreciated. A: The chain -link fencing indicated in section 02821 can be found in Building "S" at rooms #127 - Range Equipment Storage I and #135 - Storefront Prop. The free standing trellis fence systems are located along the exterior of the South wall of the 100-yard shooting range. They are fixed screening systems that allow for plantings to grow up them. 34. Q: Will the storage tank and all the accessories be part of Deductive Alternate #1? A: The Storage Tank and all the accessories are NOT a part of Deductive Alternate No. 1. As they serve site areas as well as prop buildings. 35. Q: Will there be a specification provided for the decorative paving shown on detail 12/A-1.3? A: The decorative paving indicated on detail 12/A-1.3 is referenced in specification section 02783 Concrete Pavers. 36. Q: On page C-5, there is a retaining wall shown west of the Shooting Range building that is shown as CMU. On page A-1.1, it is referenced by note 03300.K, which is a CIP concrete wall. Which is correct? A: The planter wall indicated as 03300.K "Concrete Site Wall" on sheet A- 1.1 is the intended construction material for this area. The retaining wall that surrounds the "utility area" off of Orion St., which includes backflow preventers and the electrical transformer, shall be made out of CMU. 37. Q: Page A-C-2.1 does not have any concrete sealer (note 03356.B) at the ground floor. Is this correct? A: The ground floors at the Commercial Burn Prop Building, "C", and Residential Burn Prop Building, "R", are intended to have a concrete sealer. 38. Q: Please clarify the finish schedule for building C and R, none shown on plans. A: Buildings "C" and "R" do not have finish schedules as they are training facilities where the construction material is intended to be the finished look of the building. 39. Q: Sheet A-S-5.3, Detail 2. On the right corner of the building just below the parapet is a callout for 03300K (Concrete Site Wall). What is the correct designation? A: The keynote designated by 03300.K just below the parapet has been removed from detail 2. It is not intended to designate any other material. 40. Q: Sheet A-S-7.5, Detail 2C. In the elevation 15440G is call out. Is this the water heater? A: The item reference by keynote 15440.G is a water heater. Please refer to P-S-2.1 for further information. 41. Q: Sheet A-S-7.5, Detail 1. The detail designates a shelf as a 06400D Solid Phenolic with 07420D Plastic Wall Panel. Is this an error? On this same page all of the casework has the 07420D. A: The designation of 07420.D next to the casework is to identify the color of the solid phenolic panel as indicated in section 06400 - Casework. 42. Q: Sheet A-C-8.1, Keynotes. The keynote section seems to be missing detail. The only item that appears is '201. Keynote...'. A: Remove the place holder item "201. Keynote..." from sheet A-C-8.1. Refer to the Door Schedule and General Notes for all necessary information. 43. Q: Please clarify specification for the polished concrete on building S. A: Refer to specification section 03335 - Architectural HD Concrete Flooring for further clarification concerning polished concrete. 44. Q: Detail 11/S-8.4 indicates metal pan stair tread with 2" hardrock concrete fill, but the architectural details for the stairs in Bldg S indicate pre-cast concrete treads which are also mentioned in spec 03451. Also, there is no mention on the architectural plans (A-S-2.9 & A-S-2.10) whether the Landings are pan fill or pre-cast. There is a detail reference on A-S-2.9 (34/A-S-9.4) that indicates the landings may be pre-cast. Please advise on interior stair treads and landings whether they are pre-cast or poured in place. A: The stairs are intended to be precast concrete treads with the appropriate 2" wide warning stripping. The landing pans should be poured f~ in place concrete with the appropriate 2" wide warning stripping where indicated. SECTION 03330 LITHOCRETE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS A. Requirements of "General Conditions of the Contract" and of Division 1, "General Requirements," apply to work in this Section with same force and effect as though repeated in full herein. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish materials, labor, transportation, services, and equipment necessary to furnish and install Architectural Cast-in- place Concrete (Lithocrete® ) incorporating the patented Cast-in-place concrete (Lithocrete®) process as indicated on Drawings and as specified herein. B. Work included in this Section: 1. Installation of architectural concrete paving called Architectural Cast-in-place concrete (Lithocrete®) under U.S. Patents (# 4,748,788- # 6,033,146 - # 6,016,635 and U.S. Trademark #1,879,329, # 2,358,183 # 2,358,054). 2. Only experienced Architectural Cast-in-place Concrete installers, certified to install (Lithocrete®) are acceptable for this project. Acceptance of certification will be based on proof of certification, experience and approved samples and mockups to be provided within 30 days after Notice to proceed. If timeframe is exceeded, suitable certification/experience is not provided, or mockups are unacceptable - installer will not be eligible to install project. C. Work related in other Sections: 1. Section 02750 - Portland Cement Concrete Paving: Adjacent concrete paving. 2. Section 02810 - Irrigation System: Coordination of irrigation sleeve installation. 3. Section 02900 - Landscape Planting: Coordination of plant material placement. 4. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Installation of caulking. 1.3 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Federal, State and local laws and regulations governing this Work are hereby incorporated into and made part of this Section. When this Section calls for certain materials, workmanship, or a level of construction that exceeds the level of Federal, State, or local requirements, provisions of this Section take precedence. 1.4 APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. Specifications and recommended practices of American Concrete Institute (ACI), American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), The Uniform Building Code, under U.S. Patents (# 4,748,788- # 6,033,146 - # 6,016,635 and U.S. Trademark #1,879,329, # 2,358,183 # 2,358,054) referred to in this Specification with their individual designations are to be considered part of this Specification. B. Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures - Thirteenth Edition; Portland cement Association. 1.5 QUALITY CONTROL A. Quality control to be maintained by certified & licensed installers of Lithocrete® throughout duration of project. B. Paving Subcontractor Qualifications: provide evidence to indicate successful experience in providing Lithocrete® similar to that specified herein and demonstrate successful experience C. As part of the bid submittal the General Contractor shall submit background information/qualifications on his Architectural Cast-in-place Contractor certified for Lithocrete® installation. This information shall provide evidence to indicate successful experience in providing concrete work identical to that specified herein. A listing of projects shall be provided and shall be reviewed an approved as comparable projects to the specified work by the Ow ~r or Architect prior to award of bid. Failure to provide this information or the submittal of incomplete or inaccu, information shall give cause to reject the entire bid as non responsive and incomplete. The submittal shall provide Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Lithocrete Cast-in-Place Concrete Specifications 03330 -1 the Owner and Architect with evidence of successful experience in Lithocrete® similar to that specified herein and can demonstrate successful experience through past project documentation and references. D. Demonstration of experience: provide a minimum of five (5) projects of installed Lithocrete architectural cast-in- place concrete totaling at least 10,000 square feet with a reference list of each containing address of installation, contact person and phone number of project's architect or owner's representation. Minimum size of each individual installation shall be 800 square feet. Provide two (2) color photos, 8" x 10" size, of each installation listed above representing the installation. Photo #1 shall show the approximate size of the installation. Photo #2 shall be taken approximately 2 to 3 feet from the paving service. See submittals portion of this section for additional information. E. Supervision: On site superintendent must have a minimum of 10 years experience installing Architectural Cast-in- place concrete. See submittals portion of this section for additional information. F. Slip Resistance: provide a finish with a slip resistance of equal or greater than 0.65 when tested by the owner in accordance with ASTM F 489 1.6 SITE INSPECTION A. Verify conditions at site that affect work of this Section. B. Take field measurements as required. C. Report major discrepancies between Drawings and field dimensions to Owner's Authorized Representative prior to commencing work. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit no later than 30 days after contract award all items required in this section. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings for reinforcing steel and accessories in accordance with ACI standards. 2. Architectural Cast-in-Place Jointing and Pour Sequence Plan - submit blueprints indicating the following: a. Proposed layout of contraction, construction and isolation joints. Clearly delineate the three different joint types. b. Layout of paving types as indicated in drawings. Give overall dimensions and location of each different type of Architectural Cast-in-place concrete. c. Concrete pours sequence. Indicate sequence of pour installation. C. Statement of Mix Design: Submit (1) copy of Statement of Mix Design prepared by batch plant servicing Project for each load delivered to Project. Statement of Mix Design to contain following information: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of batch plant preparing statement of mix design. 2. Date of mix design. 3. Project location. 4. Contractor requesting load delivery. 5. Mix design number. 6. Integral color used. 7. Gradations for sand and aggregate. 8. Material weights, specific gravity, and absolute volumes. 9. Basis of testing, i.e. UBC 2605 D4 and Title 24 2604 D4. 10. Water/cement ratio. 11. PSI rating. 12. Signature of testing laboratory manager. 13. Signed stamp from registered Project structural engineer or architect. D. Submit evidence of Licensed/certified quality control procedures and experience. Installer qualifications for experience, demonstration of square footage installed, number of projects, and contact information to verify experience; evidence of supervisor experience, and slip resistance as indicated in Quality Control section of this specification. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Lithocrete Cast-in-Place Concrete Specifications 03330 - 2 E. Lithocrete® Surface-Seeded Aggregate (extra stock): 1. One 1-pound sample of each Lithocrete® aggregate specified. F. Washed Concrete Sand (extra stock): 1. One 50-pound sealed bag of washed concrete sand similar to type used during installation of Lithocrete®. 1.8 SUBSTITUTIONS A. None allowed unless approved in writing by Owner's Authorized Representative. 1.9 TESTING A. A testing agency may be designated by Owner or Owner's Authorized Representative. Testing personnel to meet ASTM E329 requirements. 1.10 MOCK-UPS A. Prior to construction, provide (1) 4-foot x 4-foot x 4-inch sample of each Lithocrete® paving type specified on Drawings. B. Ensure that each mock-up contains joint types specified on project, i.e. construction, contraction, and isolation. C. Locate mock-ups in a conveniently accessible and protected place. Approved mock-ups will be standard for future Lithocrete® installation review. D. Remove mock-ups from site upon completion of Work and approval by Owner's Authorized Representative. 1.11 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Keep Work area clean, and in a safe and workmanlike condition so that rubbish, waste and debris do not interfere with work of other trades. 1.12 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Store materials in a dry and protected location. Protect reinforcing steel and dowels from rusting, deformation, staining, and moisture damage. B. Keep Lithocrete® aggregate dry at all times prior to installation. 1.13 COORDINATION A. Notify Owner's Authorized Representative and contractors performing work related to installation of Contractor's Work in ample time, so as to allow sufficient time for them to perform their portion of work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PORTLAND CEMENT A. Type I, IA, II, IIA, III, IIIA, IV, and V cements, to conform to ASTM C150. B. Use same brand of cement from single source throughout entire project. C. Refer to Drawings for cement type specified. 2.2 WASHED CONCRETE SAND A. Clean, hard, and durable washed concrete sand, conforming to ASTM C33. B. Use same sand from single source throughout entire project. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Lithocrete Cast-in-Place Concrete Specifications 03330 - 3 2.3 COURSE AGGREGATE A. Clean, hard, and durable coarse aggregate, conforming to ASTM C33. B. Use same aggregate from single source throughout entire project. 2 * LITHOCRETE® SURFACE-SEEDED AGGREGATE A. Refer to Drawings for specified Lithocrete® surface-seeded aggregate type, size, color, and distribution percentage. B. Use same Lithocrete® surface-seeded aggregate from same source for each paving type specified throughout entire project. 2.5 WATER A. Free from deleterious materials such as oils, acids, and organic matter. 2.6 ADMIXTURES A. Integral Concrete Coloring Admixture: Refer to Drawings for color type and manufacturer. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. L.M. Scofield; (800)800-9900. b. Colorfull by Admixtures, Inc.; (626)357-3263. c. QC; (800)453-8213. d. Davis Color (323) 269-7311. e. Solomon Colors (800) 624-0261 B. Air Entrainment Admixtures: Conforming to ASTM C260. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Grace Construction Products; Daravair®, (800) 433-0020 or www.qraceconstruction.com/concrete/air entraining.htmlffdaravair. b. Master Builders, Inc.; Micro-Air®, (800) 628-9990 or www.masterbuilders.com/MB/pub/Product.asp?TypeCat=2&ParentlD=78&ProductlD=22. C. Water Reducing Admixtures: Conforming to ASTM C494, Type A. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Grace Construction Products; WRDA® (800) 433-0020 www.graceconstruction.com/concrete/water reducers.html#wrda. b. Master Builders, Inc.; Micro-Air® (800) 628-9990 or www.masterbuilders.com. D. Shrinkage Reducing Admixtures: Conforming to ASTM C157. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Grace Construction Products; Eclipse® (800) 433-0020 or www.graceconstruction.com/concrete/shrinkage reducers.html#eclipse. b. Eclipse" Shrinkage Reducing Admixture is a liquid admixture which dramatically reduces concrete shrinkage and curling due to drying. 2.7 READY MIXED CONCRETE A. Batched mixed and transported in accordance with ASTM C94 - "Specifications for Ready Mixed Concrete." 2.8 REINFORCING A. Reinforcing Steel: Conforming to ASTM A615, clean and free of rust, dirt, grease or oils. B. Tie Wire: 16-gauge plain cold-drawn steel conforming to ASTM A82, clean, and free of rust, dirt, grease or oils. C. Supports for Reinforcement: 1. Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs, spacers and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars in place. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Lithocrete Cast-in-Place Concrete Specifications 03330 - 4 D. Polypropylene Fiber Reinforcement: 100% virgin multifilament polypropylene fibers, complying with ASTM C 1116 -Type III. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Fibermesh; Fibermix Stealth®-1/4" long (423) 892-8080 or www.fibermesh.com/family/stealth.htm. b. Grace Construction Products; MicroFiber™ (800) 433-0020 or www.graceconstruction.com/concrete/fibers.html 2. Application Rate: 1/2 lb./cy of mix. 2.9 ISOLATION JOINT MATERIALS A. Refer to Section 07900 - Joint Sealers for isolation joint construction. 2.10 CONSTRUCTION JOINT DOWELS A. Construct Diamond Dowel Construction joints at modules not larger than 20'-0" x 20'-0". B. Dowel schedule to match rebar schedule and at a minimum spacing of 24-30"o.c. C. 1/4-inch-thick diamond shaped load plate, free of dirt, grease, and oils. 2.11 FLY ASH A. ASTMC618-TypeF. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SUBGRADE A. Subgrade to meet requirements of project's soils report. B. Ensure that a minimum 2-inch layer of graded washed concrete sand compacted to 95 percent relr' -> compaction is placed over subgrade prior to placing concrete. C. Screed sand to a smooth plane. D. Ensure that utilities, including irrigation lines are buried and compacted below bottom of sand layer. E. Keep sand damp prior to placing concrete. 3.2 FORMING A. Be responsible for design and engineering of form work as well as its construction. B. Ensure that Work conforms to recommended practice for concrete form work (ACI 347), latest edition. C. Do not exceed 20-feet by 20-feet in a formed construction area. D. Ensure that form lumber is new #2 or better grade wood. Do not use used form lumber. E. Perform form layout with a digital electronic transit for line layout accuracy. F. Allow forms to remain in place long enough to allow concrete to set properly. Remove forms when appropriate. 3.3 DESIGN OF MIXES AND PROPORTIONING A. Proportion and mix of cement, aggregate, admixture and water to attain required plasticity and strength in accordance with current edition of ACI Manual of Concrete Practice and PCA "Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures." Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Lithocrete Cast-in-Place Concrete Specifications 03330 - 5 B. Concrete mixtures to be designed by an approved commercial testing laboratory, using approved materials to obtain specified minimum compressive strength. C. Concrete Mix Criteria: 1. Slump: minimum of 4 inch, max 5-inch, with a 1/2-inch slump differential between successive batches. Obtain approval from Owner's Authorized Representative if slump is outside these parameters. 2. Minimum PSI Rating at 28 days: 3,000. 3. Cement quantity per yard of mix: a. Minimum: 6 sacks. b. Maximum: /sacks. 4. Water/cement ratio: 0.55-0.65. 5. Sand: 50% of total mix. 6. Coarse aggregates to be a blend of 1" to 3/8". 7. Admixtures: a. Air entrainment: Per local standards b. Shrinkage Reducing: Do not exceed 2% by weight of cement. 8. Fly ash: ASTM C618 - Type F. 9. Non-Chloride Accelerators: Do not use corrosive accelerators such as calcium chloride. 10. Concrete Delivery: Use of concrete loads exceeding 90 minutes from time of batch plant must be approved by Owner's Authorized Representative. 11. Ensure that batch plant guarantees single source supply for cement, sand, and aggregate for the entire project. D. Custom Architectural Cast-in-Place Concrete sample mixes are based on custom sample #09-041 a-sd. The custom mix design involves one Architectural Cast-in-place Lithocrete finishes as indicated in Drawings, involving custom color integral color concrete additives and aggregates seeded into the mix. Exact match to this referee sample is required. 3.4 LITHOCRETE® SURFACE-SEEDED AGGREGATE INSTALLTION A. Architectural Cast-in-place concrete Lithocrete® is a patented Architectural Cast-in-place concrete process. Installation of Lithocrete® surface-seeded aggregate must be performed by a licensed Lithocrete® installer only. B. For certified Lithocrete® installers, contact Lithocrete® at 800-899-9921. C. Lithocrete® is to be installed in accordance under U.S. Patents (# 4,748,788- # 6,033,146 - # 6,016,635 and U.S. Trademark #1,879,329, # 2,358,183 # 2,358,054) - applicable to Lithocrete® product. D. Lithocrete® process incorporates use of following patented products: a. Lithocrete® Conditioner™. b. Lithocrete® Etch Retarder®. c. Lithoseal™ paving sealer. 3.5 JOINTING A. Refer to ACI 302 "Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction" for work under this section. B. Construction and Contraction Joints: 1. Sawcut construction and contraction joints in locations indicated on Drawings. 2. Perform jointing with a new diamond tip circular saw. 3. Joint Width: Per Drawings. Do not exceed 3/16-inch in width. 4. Depth of sawcuts: 1/4th depth of slab. b. Decorative Sawcut Joints: Per Drawings. 5. Sawcut joints in a straight line with no overcutting. 6. Use a hand tool to sawcut up to vertical edges such as walls, steps, curbs and columns. No cutting into vertical surfaces will be allowed. C. Isolation Joint Caulking: 1. Install isolation joint caulking to be installed under Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Lithocrete Cast-in-Place Concrete Specifications 03330 - 6 3.6 CURING A. After Lithocrete is placed, cure concrete for a minimum of seven (7) days (or longer) without foot traffic and a minimum of thirty (30) days or longer without vehicular traffic for all Architectural Cast-in-place areas. Contractor shall verify these suggested time frames and shall coordinate this schedule with other related construction. 3.7 SEALING A. Seal surface of paving using Lithocrete® Sealer. B. Follow Lithocrete® Sealer directions when applying this product (sealer must be applied in 3 to 6 coats). C. Application of hydrolyzed alkali silica solution. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Lithocrete Cast-in-Place Concrete Specifications 03330 - 7 CARLSBAD JOINT FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY REQUIRED ARCHITECTECTURAL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SUB-CONSULTANT INFORMATION The proper installation of specialty concrete finishes such as Lithocrete is critical to the success of the project. The bidder, 3r the bidder's subcontractor, shall have five (5) or more Lithocrete® projects installed. Minimum size of individual installations shall be 800 square feet. I. LICENSED LITHOCRETE INSTALLER • Contractor: Project Manager/Foreman:_ Phone Number: II. COMPARABLE PROJECT LIST (PROVIDE MINIMUM OF 5) 1. Project Name: Address: Name of Contact:_ Phone Number: 2. Project Name: Address: Name of Contact:_ Phone Number: 3. Project Name: Address: Name of Contact:_ Phone Number: 4. Project Name: Address: Name of Contact:_ Phone Number: 5. Project Name: Address: Name of Contact:_ Phone Number: Provide two (2) color photos, 8"x10" in size, of each installation listed above. Photo #1 shall show the approximate size of the installation. Photo #2 shall be taken approximately 2 to 3 feet from the respective paving surface. Photos shall clearly show the detail associated with the Lithocrete® finish or the photo(s) will be rejected. The bidder must submit the above information along with the color photos with the bid. Failure to submit the information and photos shall be considered a non-responsive bid and therefore the bidder shall be considered non-responsive. Signature of Bidder Date Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Lithocrete Cast-in-Place Concrete Specifications 03330 - 8 SECTION 03335 ARCHITECTURAL HD CONCRETE SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes cleaning, preparation, application of HD Concrete, sawcuts, sealing, application of maintenance coat, and protection. This work shall include providing and applying the special concrete with HD Concrete in accordance with the provision of the plan documents and other sections of the Contract Documents. B. Concrete must be cured to a minimum of 28 days prior to HD System. C. Related documents: The conditions of the Contract apply to this section as fully as if repeated herein. D. General Contractor is to coordinate with HD contractor before any concrete is poured that is going to receive the HD System. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit proposed construction material and MSDS sheets for material to be used for HD Concrete. B. Submit evidence of certified quality control procedures and experience. Installer qualifications for experience, demonstration of square footage installed, number of projects, and contact information to verify experience as indicated in Quality Control section of this specification. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality standards: The standards named herein are specified to establish standards of quality, performance and compliance with the design concrete, which is to duplicate the color of the approved "referee sample". B. As part of the bid submittal the General Contractor shall submit background information/qualifications on his HD installer. This information shall provide evidence to indicate successful experience with HD Concrete Flooring System. The Installer having experience with that system shall supply the product and work. A listing of projects shall be provided and reviewed. Failure to provide this information or the submittal of incomplete or inaccurate information shall give cause to reject the entire bid as non responsive and incomplete. The submittal shall provide the Owner and Architect with evidence of successful experience in HD Concrete Flooring System and can demonstrate that experience through past project documentation and references per the following. C. Demonstration of experience: 1. Successfully completed not less than 5 comparable projects using this system. 2. Provide a list of projects (5) with address of installation, the date of the installation, the point of contact for the project and their phone number. 3. Concrete company to have been in business for 10 years or more. Provide three (3) references with phone numbers. D. Personnel qualifications: Engage experienced personnel who have completed in the last five (5) years at least three (2) completed installations using this application material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, of which one will serve as Lead Mechanic. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Architectural HD Concrete System Specifications 03335 -1 C. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each color, type, and variety and joint materials from a single source with resources to provide products and materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying work. D. Field Constructed Mock-Up: Prior to the installation of any HD, erect mock-ups for each type and pattern of concrete required to verify selections made under sample submittals. Build mock-ups to comply with the following requirements, using materials and same base construction including special features for expansion joints, construction joints, surface finishes, textures, colors and contiguous work as indicated for final work. 1. Field Quality Control submittals as specified in Part 3 of this Section. 2. Locate mock-ups on site in location and size indicated or if not indicated, as directed by Owners Authorized Representative. 3. Notify Owner's Representative one (1) week in advance of the dates and times when mock-ups will be erected. 4. Demonstrate quality and range of aesthetic effects and workmanship that will be produced in final unit of work and accurately match pre-bid "referee sample". 5. Obtain Owner's Authorized Representative acceptance of mock-ups before start of work. 6. If directed remove mock-ups from project site PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Special surface colors shall be performed using approved colors suitable for the purpose intended and applied in a manner consistent with the design intent of the project. B. The color agent shall be compatible color finish for application on new or existing concrete. C. All material shall be furnished, prepared, applied, cured and stored according to Product Manufacturer directions specified for use intended as specific herein, with special attention given to recommended temperature range for penetrating color mix. PART 3 EXECUTIONS 3.1 PREPARATION A. Preparation: Clean concrete to ensure the surface is free of all latency, dirt, dust, grease, paint and any foreign material prior to the color application in accordance with the color manufacturer's recommendations. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Apply material approved by architect for color effects in accordance with architectural drawings and manufacturer guidelines. B. Match Sample # • 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refer to Contract Conditions for responsibilities for arranging, supervising, and payment of Field Quality Control Requirements. B. Field Tests TBD C. Field Inspections TBD D. Manufacturer's Field Services (by Contractor) Technical representative from manufacturer shall provide the following field services during installation 1. Perform pre-installation examination and acceptance of substrate and surface preparation for each stage. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Architectural HD Concrete System Specifications 03335 - 2 2. Be present at initial start-up for each process. Confirm application rates and techniques. 3.5 MAINTENANCE SURFACER A. Floors should be maintained by sweeping. Spills should be cleaned when they occur and dirt rinsed or mopped off with Neutral Cleaner and Water. Heavily soiled areas may be wet-cleaned by mopping or by scrubbing with a rotary floor machine equipped with a red or white twister pad. 3.6 CLEAN UP A. During the progress and at the completion of the work, remove all trash, debris, etc. from the project site and leave the site clean and in an orderly condition. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect applied colors from adverse climatic conditions during application and curing. B. All special finishes of concrete surfaces shall be protected until final acceptance of the project. C. Do not tape directly on HP Concrete System. D. Provide floor care manual 3.8 WARRANTY A. Industry Standard 1 year from substantial completion date. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Architectural HD Concrete System Specifications 03335 - 3 CARLSBAD JOINT FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY REQUIRED HD CONCRETE FLOORING SUB-CONSULTANT INFORMATION The proper installation of specialty concrete finishes such as HD Concrete Flooring is critical to the success of the project. The bidder, or the bidder's subcontractor, shall have five (5) or more HD Concrete Flooring projects installed. Minimum size of individual installations shall be 800 square feet. I. LICENSED HD CONCRETE FLOORING INSTALLER • Contractor: Project Manager/Foreman:_ Phone Number: II. COMPARABLE PROJECT LIST (PROVIDE MINIMUM OF 5) 1. Project Name: Address: ____ Name of Contact:_ Phone Number: 2. Project Name: Address: Name of Contact:. Phone Number: 3. Project Name: Address: Name of Contact:. Phone Number: 4. Project Name: Address: Name of Contact: Phone Number: 5. Project Name: Address: Name of Contact:.. Phone Number: Provide two (2) color photos, 8"x10" in size, of each installation listed above. Photo #1 shall show the approximate size of the installation. Photo #2 shall be taken approximately 2 to 3 feet from the respective paving surface. Photos shall clearly show the detail associated with the HDCF finish or the photo(s) will be rejected. The bidder must submit the above information along with the color photos with the bid. Failure to submit the information and photos shall be considered a non-responsive bid and therefore the bidder shall be considered non-responsive. Signature of Bidder Date Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Architectural HD Concrete System Specifications 03335 - 4 SECTION 12490 WINDOW TREATMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sunscreen roller shades. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and grounds for mounting roller shades and accessories. B. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Coordination with gypsum board assemblies for installation of shade pockets, closures and related accessories. C. Section 09510 - Acoustical Ceilings: Coordination with acoustical ceiling systems for installation of shade pockets, closures and related accessories. D. Division 16 - Electrical: Electric service for motor controls. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM G 21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi. B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. C. NFPA 701 - Fire Tests for Flame-Resistant Textiles and Films. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Styles, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profiles, features, finishes and operating instructions. 3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 4. Mounting details and installation methods. 5. Typical wiring diagrams including integration of motor controllers with building management system, audiovisual and lighting control systems as applicable.. C. Shop Drawings: Plans, elevations, sections, product details, installation details, operational clearances, wiring diagrams and relationship to adjacent work. 1. Prepare shop drawings on Autocad or Microstation format using base sheets provided electronically by the Architect. D. Window Treatment Schedule: For all roller shades. Use same room designations as indicated on the Drawings and include opening sizes and key to typical mounting details. E. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, one set of shade cloth options and aluminum finish color samples representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Window Treatments Specifications 12490 -1 F. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, one complete set of shade components, unassembled, demonstrating compliance with specified requirements. Shadecloth sample and aluminum finish sample as selected. Mark face of material to indicate interior faces. G. Maintenance Data: Methods for maintaining roller shades, precautions regarding cleaning materials and methods, instructions for operating hardware and controls. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Obtain roller shades through one source from a single manufacturer with a minimum of twenty years experience in manufacturing products comparable to those specified in this section. B. Installer Qualifications: Installer trained and certified by the manufacturer with a minimum of ten years experience in installing products comparable to those specified in this section. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Passes NFPA 701 small and large-scale vertical burn. Materials tested shall be identical to products proposed for use. D. Electrical Components: NFPA Article 100 listed and labeled by either UL or ETL or other testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, marked for intended use, and tested as a system. Individual testing of components will not be acceptable in lieu of system testing. E. Anti-Microbial Characteristics: 'No Growth' per ASTM G 21 results for fungi ATCC9642, ATCC 9644, ATCC9645. F. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up (manual shades only) of one roller shade assembly for evaluation of mounting, appearance and accessories. 1. Locate mock-up in window designated by Architect. 2. Do not proceed with remaining work until, mock-up is accepted by Architect. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver shades in factory-labeled packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, fire-test-response characteristics, and location of installation using same room designations indicated on Drawings and in the Window Treatment Schedule. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Install roller shades after finish work including painting is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Roller Shade Hardware and Chain Warranty: Manufacturer's standard non-depreciating twenty-five year limited warranty. B. Standard Shadecloth: Manufacturer's standard twenty-five year warranty. C. Roller Shade Installation: One year from date of Substantial Completion, not including scaffolding, lifts or other means to reach inaccessible areas. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Window Treatments Specifications 12490-2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: MechoShade Systems, Inc., which is located at: 42-03 35th St. ; Long Island City. NY 11101: Tel:626-369-7777:Fax: 626-369-1015 Email:carlosh@mechoshade.com ; Web: www.mechoshade.com B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 ROLLER SHADE TYPES A. Manually Operated Shades: 1. Mounting: Surface mounted with fascia. 2. Configuration: Single solar shadecloth. 3. Solar Shadecloths: a. Fabric: ThermoVeil 0900, 0-1 percent visually translucent extra-dense linear weave pattern. b. Color: 903 Grey. 2.3 SHADE CLOTH A. Visually Transparent Shadecloth: MechoShade Systems, Inc., ThermoVeil series, single thickness non-raveling 0.030-inch (0.762 mm) thick vinyl fabric, woven from 0.018-inch (0.457 mm) diameter extruded vinyl yarn comprising of 21 percent polyester and 79 percent reinforced vinyl. 2.4 SHADE BAND A. Shade Bands: Construction of shade band includes the fabric, the hem weight, hem-pocket, shade roller tube, and the attachment of the shade band to the roller tube. Sewn hems and open hem pockets are not acceptable. 1. Hem Pockets and Hem Weights: Fabric hem pocket with RF-welded seams (including welded ends) and concealed hem weights. Hem weights shall be of appropriate size and weight for shade band. Hem weight shall be continuous inside a sealed hem pocket. Hem pocket construction and hem weights shall be similar, for all shades within one room. 2. Shade Band and Shade Roller Attachment: a. Use extruded aluminum shade roller tube of a diameter and wall thickness required to support shade fabric without excessive deflection. Roller tubes less than 1.55 inch (39.37 mm) in diameter for manual shades, and less than 2.55 inches (64.77 mm) for motorize shades are not acceptable. b. Provide for positive mechanical engagement with drive / brake mechanism. c. Provide for positive mechanical attachment of shade band to roller tube; shade band shall be made removable / replaceable with a "snap-on" snap-off' spline mounting, without having to remove shade roller from shade brackets. d. Mounting spline shall not require use of adhesives, adhesive tapes, staples, and/or rivets. e. Any method of attaching shade band to roller tube that requires the use of: adhesive, adhesive tapes, staples, and/or rivets are not acceptable. 2.5 SHADE FABRICATION A. Fabricate units to completely fill existing openings from head to sill and jamb-to-jamb, unless specifically indicated otherwise. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Window Treatments Specifications 12490 - 3 B. Provide battens in standard shades as required to assure proper tracking and uniform rolling of the shadebands. Contractor shall be responsible for assuring the width-to-height (W:H) ratios shall not exceed manufacturer's standards or, in absence of such standards, shall be responsible for establishing appropriate standards to assure proper tracking and rolling of the shadecloth within specified standards. Battens shall be roll-formed stainless steel or tempered steel, as required. C. For railroaded shadebands, provide seams in railroaded multi-width shadebands as required to meet size requirements and in accordance with seam alignment as acceptable to Architect. Seams shall be properly located. Furnish battens in place of plain seams when the width, height, or weight of the shade exceeds manufacturer's standards. In absence of such standards, assure proper use of seams or battens as required to, and assure the proper tracking of the railroaded multi-width shadebands. D. Provide battens for railroaded shades when width-to-height (W:H) ratios meet or exceed manufacturer's standards. In absence of manufacturer's standards, be responsible for proper use and placement of battens to assure proper tracking and roll of shadebands. 2.6 COMPONENTS A. Access and Material Requirements: 1. Provide shade hardware allowing for the removal of shade roller tube from brackets without removing hardware from opening and without requiring end or center supports to be removed. 2. Provide shade hardware that allows for removal and re-mounting of the shade bands without having to remove the shade tube, drive or operating support brackets. 3. Use only Delrin engineered plastics by DuPont for all plastic components of shade hardware. Styrene based plastics, and /or polyester, or reinforced polyester will not be acceptable. B. Manual Operated Chain Drive Hardware and Brackets: 1. Provide for universal, regular and offset drive capacity, allowing drive chain to fall at front, rear or non-offset for all shade drive end brackets. Universal offset shall be adjustable for future change. 2. Provide hardware capable for installation of a removable fascia, for both regular and/or reverse roll, which shall be installed without exposed fastening devices of any kind. 3. Provide shade hardware system that allows for removable regular and/or reverse roll fascias to be mounted continuously across two or more shade bands without requiring exposed fasteners of any kind. 4. Provide shade hardware system that allows for operation of multiple shade bands (multi-banded shades) by a single chain operator, subject to manufacturer's design criteria. Connectors shall be offset to assure alignment from the first to the last shade band. 5. Provide shade hardware system that allows multi-banded manually operated shades to be capable of smooth operation when the axis is offset a maximum of 6 degrees on each side of the plane perpendicular to the radial line of the curve, for a 12 degrees total offset. 6. Provide positive mechanical engagement of drive mechanism to shade roller tube. Friction fit connectors for drive mechanism connection to shade roller tube are not acceptable 7. Provide shade hardware constructed of minimum 1/8-inch (3.18 mm) thick plated steel or heavier as required to support 150 percent of the full weight of each shade. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Window Treatments Specifications 12490-4 8. Drive Bracket / Brake Assembly: a. MechoShade Drive Bracket model M5 shall be fully integrated with all MechoShade accessories, including, but not limited to: SnapLoc fascia, room darkening side / sill channels, center supports and connectors for multi-banded shades. b. M5 drive sprocket and brake assembly shall rotate and be supported on a welded 3/8 inch (9.525 mm) steel pin. c. The brake shall be an over-running clutch design which disengages to 90 percent during the raising and lowering of a shade. The brake shall withstand a pull force of 50 Ibs. (22 kg) in the stopped position. d. The braking mechanism shall be applied to an oil-impregnated hub on to which the brake system is mounted. The oil impregnated hub design includes an articulated brake assembly, which assures a smooth, non-jerky operation in raising and lowering the shades. The assembly shall be permanently lubricated. Products that require externally applied lubrication and or not permanently lubricated are not acceptable. e. The entire M5 assembly shall be fully mounted on the steel support bracket, and fully independent of the shade tube assembly, which may be removed and reinstalled without effecting the roller shade limit adjustments. f. Drive Chain: #10 qualified stainless steel chain rated to 90 Ib. (41 kg) minimum breaking strength. Nickel plate chain shall not be accepted. 2.7 ACCESSORIES A. Fascia: 1. Continuous removable extruded aluminum fascia that attaches to shade mounting brackets without the use of adhesives, magnetic strips, or exposed fasteners. 2. Fascia shall be able to be installed across two or more shade bands in one piece. 3. Fascia shall fully conceal brackets, shade roller and fabric on the tube. 4. Provide bracket / fascia end caps where mounting conditions expose outside of roller shade brackets. 5. Notching of Fascia for manual chain shall not be acceptable. B. End Caps: 1. Provide matching color end caps at shades where exposed ends are visible. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install roller shades level, plumb, square, and true according to manufacturer's written instructions, and located so shade band is not closer than 2 inches (50 mm) to interior face of glass. Allow proper clearances for window operation hardware. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Window Treatments Specifications 12490-5 B. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range. C. Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. D. Engage Installer to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate and maintain roller shade systems. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Window Treatments S pecifications 12490 - 6 \\ rrmt ingroup creating environments people enjoy" 232 Avenida Fabncante, Suite 112 San demente, CA 92672 f: (949) 361-79501 F: (949) 361-79551 mwjimdesign.cixn CARLSBAD FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY ADDENDUM 2 EXHIBIT AD02-C-1 Sheet No. By Checked Date Job No. Scale 13 (C-6) JSB JLH 03/03/10 1107570 1"=30' DEMOLITION NOTES ]} REMOVE EXISTING C&G 2} REMOVE AND REPLACE EXISTING SIGN ^otTs^efiS^e"^ RELOCATE STREET LIGHT PER IMPROVEMENT PLAN CONSTRUCTION NOTES © CONSTRUCT 6" "TYPE G" CURB AND GUTTER PER CITY \ 2) INSTALL STREET LIGHT PER CITY OF SAN DIEGO STD. \ DWG. SDE-101 , USE ANCHOR BASE FOUNDATION, LEGEND \ -v CONCRETE DRIVEWAY (SPECS. AND PRELIMINARY SECTION PER STD DWG G-14A. FINAL RECOMMENDATION TO BE DETERMINED IN FIELD BY SOILS ENGINEER)1 5 j" CONCRETE OVER \ 6" CLASS I! A.B. MINIMUM SECTION } SAWCUT AND JOIN LINE (REPLACE PAVEMENT SECTION IN KIND BETWEEN PROPOSED DRIVEWAY IMPROVEMENTS) rrmdesigngroup creating environments people enjoy" 232 Averada Fabncanle. Suite 112 San Oemente, CA 92672 P.- (949) 361-79501 F: (949) 361-79551 wnw.rmKtesi9n.com ACalrlom* Cvpontim |VFcta Munt^onmi. ArclvlMtfCllHO) JcnyilOMl. PE *3CG56.lSttZ7E|JrtF«tH.lARBU CARLSBAD FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY ADDENDUM 2 EXHIBIT AD02-C-2 Sheet No. By Checked Dale Job No. Scale 17(C-10) JSB JLH 03/03/10 1107570 WA rrmcJesfgngroup creating environments people enjoy" 232 Avenida Fabrirante, Suite 112 San Ctemente, CA 92672 P: (949) 361-79501F: (949) 361-7955 ] www.rrmdesign.com | VMM Uurtcfumrj. Aidtol IC110901 Jeny IMBd. PE HSeto. LS162761M F*fbv.LAI?M4 CARLSBAD FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY ADDENDUM 2 EXHIBIT AD02-A-01 Sheet No. By A-l.l MH Checked Dale DI 03/05/10 Job No. Scale _ 1107570 rrmdesigngroup creating environments people enjoy51" 232 Avenlda Fabricate. Suite 112 San Clememe, CA 92672 P: (949) 361-79501F: (949) 361-79551 wwwjmxtesign.coni CARLSBAD FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY ADDENDUM 2 EXHIBIT AD02-A-02 Sheet No. By A-l.l MH Checked Date DI 03/05/10 Job No. Scale _ 1107570 l/16"=r-0" rrmaesigngroup creating environments people enjoy" 232Aveolda Fabtlcanle, Suite 112 San Clemente, CA 92672 P: (949) 361-79501F: (949) 361-79551 wmi.rrmdesign.coin A Ciifoitia Copeafen I Vaa Mortgmrr. Mtea ICtXBO I Jmy HMa4 P£ IV3S6. LS IKtTt I Jet Fabu, LA 1944 CARLSBAD FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY ADDENDUM 2 EXHIBIT AD02-A-03 Sheet No. By A-l.l MH Checked Date DI 03/05/10 Job No. Scale _ 1107570 rrmaesigngroup creating environments people enjoy5"1 232 Avenids Fabflcsnte. Suite 112 San Ctemente, CA 92672 P: (949) 361-79501F: (949) 361-7955 j wmumidea9i.com A CaHowa Copttlfcn t Vtew Uan^Dmrr. A»d*ed »C 110501 JMJ MtfMI, PE rtBBSS. 15 K^B | Jrt F«tw. LA C28M CARLSBAD FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY ADDENDUM 2 EXHIBIT AD02-A-04 Sheet No. By — A-l.l MH Checked Date DI 03/05/10 Job No. Scale _ 1107570 l/16"=r-0" rrnrii igroup creating environments people enjoy5"1 232 Avenkte Fabrtante, Suite 112 San demenle. CA 92672 P-. (949) 361-79601F: (949) 361-79561 www.mndesign.coni CARLSBAD FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY ADDENDUM 2 EXHIBIT AD02-A-05 Sheet No. By A-1.1 MH Checked Date DI 03/05/10 Job No. Scale _ 1107570 rrmr|oci IUC3I]sgroup creating environments people enjoy"1 232 Averida Fabricante. Suite 112 San Cternenle, CA 92672 P: (949) 361-79501F: (949) 361-79551 *ww/rmdesign.com CARLSBAD FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY ADDENDUM 2 EXHIBIT AD02-A-06 Sheet No. By A-l.l MH Checked Date DI 03/05/10 Job No. 1107570 Scale 1/16"=1'-0" rrmdf group creating environments people enjoy*1 232 Avenlda Fadricante, Suite 112 San Ctemenle.CA 92672 P: (949) 361-79501F: (949) 361-7355 j wsiw.rmidesign.com IK|Jn,l*JaU.PfBi3»L5«2re|Jrtfrt».L«K»u CARLSBAD FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY ADDENDUM 2 EXHIBIT AD02-A-07 Sheet No. By A-l.l Checked Dale Job No. Scale _ MH DI 03/05/10 1107570 igroup creating environments people enjoy" 232 AvenidaFabiicante. Suite 112 San Ctemente. CA 92672 P: (949) 361-79501F: (949) 361-79551 vmw.rnmlesi9n.com CARLSBAD FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY ADDENDUM 2 EXHIBIT AD02-A-08 Sheet No. By A-l.l MH Checked Date DI 03/05/10 Job No. Scale _ 1107570 CAR CMU CT CTB FRP GBP1 GBP2 GBP3 PL RB SCON SS ST VCT ZC LEGEND CARPET TILE CMU BLOCK CERAMIC TILE CERAMIC TILE BASE FIBER REINFORCED PANEL WAINSCOT GYPSUM BOARD, PAINT COLOR A0158 "QUIET HIDEAWAY"- f81YY 81/016 GYPSUM BOARD, PAINT COLOR A2011 "VEIL"- fOQNN 53/000 GYPSUM BOARD, PAINT COLOR A1294 "BERKELEY BLUE"- |30BG 16/133 PLASTIC PANELS RUBBER BASE SEALED CONCRETE SOLID SURFACE STAIR STRINGER VINYL COMPOSITION TILE ZINC PANELING rrma ngroup creating environments people enjoy"1 232 Avenida Fabrieante, Suite 112 San Clemenle, CA 92672 P: (949) 361-7950 1 F: (949) 381-7955 1 vww.irmdesign.com A Cattnfc Coparton }\fcw McrtBWfnr. tarttod K1 IdaO 1 Jen> »idi«l. Pt I36BB, LS MZM | Jrt FMtMi. LA «W CARLSBAD FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY ADDENDUM 2 EXHIBIT AD02-A-09 By A-S-2.13 MH Checked Date DI 03/05/10 Job No.1107570 NTS LEGEND CONCRETE BLOCK, COLOR 2 - SLATE4 METAL PANEL ZINC METAL PANEL PLASTIC WALL PANEL LATH AND PLASTER PERFERATED METAL rrrri!group creating environments people enjoy"" 232 AvenkJa Fabricate. Suite 112 San Ctemenle, CA 92672 P: (949) 361-79501 F: (949) 361-7955 |w*wjrradesign.iMm CARLSBAD FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY ADDENDUM 1 EXHIBIT AD02-A-10 Sheet No. By A-S-5.2 MH Checked Date DI 03/05/10 Job No. Scale _ 1107570 A( DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULE DOOR MARK 1 ^-^is-~*.,3 4 'J— ^~- 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 H 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 -^»^~ 51 52 53 54 — 35-~- 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 SIZE WD 6'-0" -&-£',3-0"s'-o1"-T=tr.V-o" 5'-8" 3'-0" 3-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 2'-6' 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-CT JS'-O" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 4'-0" 3--D11 3'-D" 3'-0" 0 -6 B'-4" 3'-0" 3'-0" 6-0" 14'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 9'-4" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" ^X^S^s 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" -5~fl~- 5'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3'-0" 3-0"3'-o" 4'-0" 7'-0" 7'-0" HGT 7'-10" MAIL SF -ikJJ*J~^S£--x. 7'-10" 7-10"T>nr 7'- 10" 7-10- 7'-10" 7'-10" 7'-10" 7'-10" 7'-10" 7'-10" 7'-io" 7'-10" 7'-10" 7'-10" 7'-10" 7'-10" 7'- 10" 7'- 10" 7'- 10" 7'-10" 7'-10" 7'- 10" 7'-10" 7'- 10" 7'- 10" 7'- 10" 7'- 10" B'-O" 7'-10" ?'-10" 7'-10" 7'-10" B'-O" 7'-10" 3'-10" 3'-10" B'-O" 3'- 10" 3'- 10" 7'- 10" 7'-10" 7'- 10" T-10" 7'-10" 7'-10"r-io" 7'- 10*" 7'-10" 7'-10" 7'-10"-r^ttrr- 10" 7'-10" 7-10" 7-10" 7-10" 7-10" 7'-10" 6'-0" 6'-0" 8'-0" 8'-0" HM HM^sr^ SF HU HM HM HM HM SF HM HM HM SF HM SF HM HM HM HM SF SF HM .SF SF SF HM HM STL HM HM HM HM STL HM HU HM STL HM HM HM HM HM HM HM HM. HM ^—M^~ ^ HM HM HM HM -"•Hfr-"' HM HM HM HM HM HM HM STL STL STL STL GLAZING T ~-xy — ^--v^-^y •^^^rv^=^CP"A-- l?£— —-- — — T -- — -- T__ — -- T A — l& — f T T - ( — A! - M — — — —— — — ' — — — -- — — — — — —— — -^ — v~«— ^ — ^ T T T T-^~^^> -- — — -- — — — — -- — — TYPE A -~,^-&-^- B B ^fc^B^^ B B B B C B B B C B C B B B ^J&^-* B B , ' "^ ^.JX^ B B j ~^-~r^~ B E D B B D E B B B F B B B B B B B B B —^»~^- E B B B'— "tr-~ D B B B B B B G G E E FRAME MAIL SF ^-St-~- HM HM-~sr~ SF HM HM HM HM HM SF HM HM HM SF- HM SF HM HM HM HM SF SF HM SF SF SF HM HM STL HM HM HM HM STL HM HM HM STL HM HM HM HM HM HM HM HM HM -^^bM-^- HM HM HM HM Htf*-' HM HU HM HM HU HM HM STL STL STL STL DETAIL HEAD H/A-S-8.3 AtfcMif32/A-S-8.3 41/A-S-8.3 •5T/fr=$=8^ 31/A-S-8.3 31/A-S-8.4 H/A-S-8.2 21/A-S-8.2 12/A-S-8.2 12/A-S-8.2 21/A-S-8.3 12/A-S-8.2 12/A-S-8.2 12/A-S-8.2 51/A-S-8.3 127A-S-8.2 51/A-S-8.3 21/A-S-8.2 31/A-S-8.4 22/A-S-8.2 31/A-S-8.2 41/A-S-8.3 31/A-S-8.3 31/A-S-8.4 31/A-S-8.3 21/A-S-8.3 21/A-S-8.3 12/A-S-8.2 43/A-S-8.3 21/A-S-8.4 42/A-S-8.2 33/A-S-8.2 11/A-S-8.2 33/A-S-8.2 11/A-S-8.4 33/A-S-8.2 43/A-S-8.2 43/A-S-8.2 24/A-S-8.2 43/A-S-8.2 43/A-S-8.2 23/A-S-8.2 23/A-S-8.2 32/A-S-8.2 32/A-S-8.2 32/A-S-8.2 32/A-S-8.2 32/A-S-8.2-w^s^&s. 12/A-S-8.2 12/A-S-B.2 12/A-S-B.2 12/A-S-8.2 T2>r<S-&2- 12/A-S-8.2 12/A-S-8.2 12/A-S-8.2 12/A-S-8.2 12/A-S-8.2 12/A-S-8.2 12/A-S-8.2 — — SEE MANF. SEE MANF. JAMB 1 l/A-S-8.3 -NUA^AXs 32/A-S-8.3 41/A-S-8.3 "5V?PS^W 31/A-S-8.3 31/A-S-8.4 11/A-S-8.2 21/A-S-8.2 12/A-S-8.2 12/A-S-8.2 22/A-S-8.3 12.13/A-S-8.2 12/A-S-8.2 12.13/A-S-8.2 51/A-S-8.3 12/A-S-8.2 51/A-S-8.3 21/A-S-8.2 31.32/A-S-8.4 22/A-S-8.2 31/A-S-8.2 41/A-S-B.3 31/A-S-8.3 3U2/A-S-8.4 11.31/A-S-8.3 22/A-S-8.3 22/A-S-8.3 12/A-S-8.2 44/A-S-8.3 22/A-S-8.4 42/A-S-8.2 33/A-S-8.2 11/A-S-8.2 33/A-S-8.2 12/A-S-8.4 33/A-S-8.2 43/A-S-8.2 43/A-S-8.2 34/A-S-8.2 43/A-S-8.2 43/A-S-8.2 23/A-S-8.2 23/A-S-8.2 32/A-S-8.2 32/A-S-8.2 32/A-S-8.2 32/A-S-8.2 32/A-S-8.2 ^4*/A^8r2^ 12/A-S-8.2 12/A-S-8.2 12/A-S-8.2 12/A-S-8.2^•tT/s^er?- 12/A-S-8.2 12.I3/A-S-8.2 12.13/A-S-8.2 12/A-S-8.2 12/A-S-8.2 12/A-S-8.2 12/A-S-8.2 51,52/A-U 24/A-1.2 SEE MANF. SEE MANF. SILL 12/A-S-8.3 12/A-S-8.3 tf/Adh!Ll 73/A-S-8.3 33/A-S-8.3 23/A-S-8.3 23/A-S-8.3 23/A-S-8.3 23/A-S-8.3 23/A-S-8.3 23/A-S-8.3 12/A-S-8.3 23/A-S-8.3 23/A-S-8.3 23/A-S-8.3 33/A-S-8.3 33/A-S-8.3 33/A-S-8.3 23/A-S-8.3 23/A-S-8.3 23/A-S-8.3 23/A-S-8.3 23/A-S-8.3 23/A-S-8.3 23/A-S-8.3 12/A-S-8.3 12/A-S-8.3 12/A-S-8.3 23/A-S-8.3 12/A-S-8.3 13/A-S-8.3 23/A-S-8.3 13/A-S-8.3 23/A-S-8.3 13/A-S-8.3 13/A-S-8.3 13/A-S-8.3 13/A-S-8.3 13/A-S-8.3 23/A-S-8.3 13/A-S-8.3 I3/A-S-8.3 J3/A-S-8.3 13/A-S-8.3 13/A-S-8.3 I3/A-S-8.3 I3/A-S-8.3 I3/A-S-8.3 13/A-S-8.3 23/A-S-8.3 WA-S-8.3 C3/A-S-8.3 <53/A-S-8. 33/A-S-8. 33/A-S-8. 33/A-S-8. 33/A-S-8. 33/A-S-8. 33/A-S-8.; 33/A-S-8.; 33/A-S-8. 33/A-S-8. — —SEE MANF. S££ MANF. HARDWARE SET NO SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. . SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. SEE SPECS. 11 12 — -- NOTES 2,4,5,6,7,12 2,4,5,6,7,12 8,9 8.10 2,6,7 9,10 8,9,12 12 9,10,12 12 — 2,3,4,5,6,7 1 1 1 2,6,7 -- — — 2,6,7 — 12— — 2,6,7 2,3,4,5,6,7,12 1 1 3,5 3,5,8,9,12— 9,10,11,12 8,9— 8.9 — 12 — — 11 — — — — — —— — _._ 10.11 2,3.4,5,6,7,8,9,10 2,3,4.5,6,7,8,9,10 2,3,4,5,6,7.8,9,10 2,3,4.5,6,7.8.9.10 8,9,10 8,9,10 8.9.10 8,9.10 8,9.10 8.9,10 3,5,8.9,10 3,5 3 12 8 8 , B28 rrmrlacigngroiin HI1 1 1 1 1 --,-5 v,- w ' IS* ; *ft« WUf*/ MH creating environments people enjoy51" 232 AvenidaFaMcante, Suite 112 San Oemenle, CA 92672 P-. (949) 361-7950 1 F: (949) 361-7955 1 www.trindesi8n.com A QHoo* Caponier [Vtoor MODVMMy. Att**«J ICI109D | Jny IfchMj. PE I36M6. LS 18276 1 Jdl fata, IA I2B44 CARLSBAD FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY ADDENDUM 2 EXHIBIT AD02-A- 11 .STi^/Afo A-S-8.1 »v MH Checked DI Date 03/05/10 JnhNn 1107570 .•frflfe NTS CA 1 E) PAC BELL VAULT 2) 4"C., PROVIDE NOTE/jPROVIDE (2) NEW 4'C., FOR SAFETY CENTER INTERCONNECTIONS, WITH CABUNGS. SEE NOTE AUTO EXTRICATION AREA2) 4"C.. FOR TELEPHONE SERVICE 1) 3"C., FOR CATV SERVICE 2) 4'C,. FOR SAFETY CENTFJ? INTERCONNECTIONS, WITH CABUNGS. SEE NQTE/^ r~s\ RODfO/ DRILL GROUNDS —POWER FCR GATE OPENER. TYP 2. r- CANOPIED [ PARKING] T M A D 'STRUCTURAL TA\/i/-vn0 -MECHANICAL TAYLOR &ELECTRICAL • ••GAINES 800 North Ferrari Lane, Suite 100 Ontario, California 91764 Phone: 909.477.6915 Fax: 909.477.6916 www.ttgcorp.com Project No. 2008.040.00 rrmdesigngroup creating environments people enjoy™ 232 AvenkfaFabricarte, Suite 112 San Ctemente, CA 82S72 P: (949) 381-79501F: (949) 381-79551 vnm.nndesign.coin CARLSBAD FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY ADDENDUM 2 EXHIBIT AD02-E-01 Sheet No. By E-1.2 AS Checked Date MD 03/02/2010 Job No.. Scale — 1107570 NTS — POWER FOR GATE OPENER. TYP 2. CONNECTIONS » INSIDE TELl/TJATA (PROVIDE KEY NOTES <7> (1) 2" CONDUIT FIRE ALARM, (l) 2" CONDUIT SPARE FOR FIREv ALARM.A<8> FEEDERS MSB-2, 5. 8 AND 9. CENTER INTERCONNECTIONS. TWISTED PAIR FOR PHONE AN! ilOra T M A D 'STRUCTURAL mmm TAYLOR & '. • ••GAINES -CIVIL 800 North Ferrari Lane, Suite 100 Ontario, California 91764 Phone: 909.477.6915 Fax: 909.477.6916 www.ttgcorp-com Project No. 2008.040.00 rrmdesigngroup creating environments people enjoy" 232 AvenWaFabriante, Suite 112 San Clemente, CA 92672 P-. (949) 361-79501F: (949) 36 V78551 www.mnilesign.ooni uKlim | JnylkM Kami, ISJKM | J*FW«. lAIZW CARLSBAD FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY ADDENDUM 2 EXHIBIT AD02-E-02 Sheet No. By E-12 AS Checked Date MD 03/02/2010 Job No. Scale _ 1107570 NTS CUL-DE-SAC TRAINING 3ED BURN RESIDENTIAL BED BURN -COMMERCIAL >/ (E) PAC BELL VAULT IRRIGAT1C /DATA TER ,„ 2) 4"C., APPROX.-^280 LF BETWEEN VAULTS \\& (E) SAFETY CENTERPHONE/DATA ROOM.PROVIDE CABLINGS. SEE \ JMP -STUB-OUTS FOR FUTURE ADMINISTRATION BUILDING T M A D -STRUCTURAL . .ELECTRICAL !£•§! GAINES 'CIVIL 800 North Ferrari Lane, Suite 100 Ontario, California 91764 Phone: 909.477.691 5 Fax: 909.477.6916 www.ttgcorp.com Project No. 2008.040.00 rrmdesigngroup creating environments people enjoy"" 232 AvenMaRftricante. Suite 112 San Ctem6rte,CA 92872 P: (349) 361-79501F: (949) 361-78551 wmuimdesglLCom CARLSBAD FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY ADDENDUM 2 EXHIBIT AD02-E-03 Sheet No.. By E-1.2 AS Checked Date MD 03/02/2010 Job No. Scale _ 1107570 NTS =. tdb. Ji^d -DATA OUTLET FOR WIRELESS AP. VERIFY EXACT LOCATION IN THE FIELD (PROVIDE CABLING HOMERUN TO TEL/DATA ROOM 107 VIA J-HOOK SYSTEM, TYPICAL) SS//SSS/SSS//S///S///////S/////////, RANGE MASTER'S OFFICE GENERAL STORAGE YSS/S/SSSS/SSSSSSSSSSSSS/SS/SSS/SSSSSSSSSS. rATV TFPMIMAI GAINES 800 North Ferrari Lane, Suite 100 Ontario, California 91764 Phone: 909.477.6915 Fax: 909.477.6916 www.ttgcorp.com Project No. 2008.040.00 FIRST FLOOR SIGNAL PLAN rrmdesigngroup creating environments people enjoy"" 232AytnkteFabncante,SuKe112 San Ctemente.CA 92672 P: (949) 351-79601F: (949) 361-7955|www.rrmbesigaxjjm CARLSBAD FIRST RESPONDER TRAJMNG FACILITY ADDENDUM 2 EXHIBIT AD02-E-04 Sheet No.. By E-S-4.1 AS Checked Date MD 02/22/2010 Job No. Scale _ 1107570 STORAGE -TELEPHONEJIINALBACKBOARD PRISM c G MOUNTED OUTLET FOR SS AP. VERiP ACT\ LOCATION D. HALLWAYrnn EQUIPMENT "MTTC", SEE 2/E-S-4.1 •//S////SSS//SSS/S//S//fj'S/S/SSJS///SS///Sl'/, CHECK- GATHERING SPACE DATA OUTLET FOR WIRELESS Aft, VERI EXACT LOCATtek IN THE FIELD.UP TO FUTURE 777/X///////S/S///S RANGE CONTROL ROOM 118 WEAPONS CLEANING AREA ' 119 ' PROVIDE 3/4" C. STUB-UP TNSfoE "FIRST FLOOR"CELlKG SPACE WITH CABLING(S), HOMERUN TO TEL /DATA ROOM, #107 VIA J-HOOK SYSTEM. mmm GAINES -CIVIL 800 North Ferrari Lane, Suite 100 Ontario, California 91764 Phone: 909.477.6915 Fax: 909.477.6916 www.ttgcorp.com Project No. 2008.040.00" N Lie. E16934 Exp.jb30-2011 IRST FLOOR SIGNAL PLAN rrmdesigngroup creating environments people enjoy" 232AvenidaFabricate.Suite 112 SanaenHite.CA92672 P: (949) 36W9501F: (M9) 361-79561 www.rnmJesign.com CARLSBAD FRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY ADDENDUM 2 EXHIBIT AD02-E-05 Sheet No.. By E-S-4.1 AS Checked MD natf, 02/22/2010 JhfcAfo. 1107570 P.O. SPECIALTY VEHICLE PARKING P.O. SPECIALTY VEHICLE PARKING P.O. SPECIALTY VEHICLE PARKING E.O. SPECIALTY VEHICLE PARKING MOUNTED—'FOR AP. VERIFY IN CEILINGDATA OUT! WIRELESS EXACT THE FIELD CEILINGDATA WIRELESS EXACT LET FOR AP. VERIFY IN T M A D mmm GAINES 800 North Ferrari Lane, Suite 100 Ontario, California 91764 Phone: 909.477.6915 Fax: 909.477.6916 www.ttgcorp.com Project No. 2008.040.00=IRST FLOOR SIGNAL PLAN rrmdesigngroup creating environments people enjoy" 232AwsiicJaFatxicai)te,SuJe112 San Qemaile.CA 92672 P: (949) 36V79SO) F: (949) 361-79551 «wwjm)ctesigacotti CARLSBAD FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY ADDENDUM 2 EXHIBIT AD02-E-06 Sheet -No. E-S-4.1 Sy _ AS_ Checked 02/22/2010 Job No. 1107570 1/8"=1'-0" T FOR WIRELESS AP. EXACT LOCATION IN THE FIE DIVISIBLE TRAINING CLASSROOM 201 CEILING SPEAKER FOR PROJECTION SYSTEM, TYPICAL 1C., DOWN TO 8 x8 x4 , WP PDATA OUTLET FOR WIRELESS VERIFY EXACT LOCATION E16934 6-30-2011 T M A D TAYLOR & GAINES 800 North Ferrari Lane, Suite 100 Ontario, California 91764 Phone: 909.477.6915 Fax: 909.477.6916 www.ttgcorp.com Project No. 2008.040.00 COND FLOOR SIGNAL PLAN rrmdesigngroup creating environments people enjoy" 232A*r*la Fabricate, Suite 112 San Ctetnenle. CA 92672 ft (949) 361-79501F: (949) 361-79551 w*wjmxieslgn.com CARLSBAD FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY ADDENDUM 2 EXHIBIT AD02-E-07 Sheet No. By E-S-4.3 AS Checked Dale MD 02/22/2010 Job No. Scale _ 1107570 Citv of Carlsbad Public Works - Contract Administration March 10, 2010 ADDENDUM NO. 3 RE: JOINT FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY, BiD NO. PWS10-31UTIL Please include this addendum in the Request for Bid package you have for the above project: This page—receipt acknowledged—must be attached to your bid when it is submitted. KEVIN DAVIS Sr. Contract Administrator ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF ADDENDUM NO. 3 Signature ADDENDUM NO. 3 CARLSBAD JOINT FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY CONTRACT NO. 3686 CONTRACTOR'S PROPOSAL The project specifications are written to outline the minimum performance standards of noted products and equipment. Inasmuch, the electrical requirements within the commercial and residential fire training structures can vary between fire training equipment providers. To avoid the potential conflicts arising from the installation, coordination and electrical infrastructure requirements necessary for the provision of the fire training equipment identified within the drawings and specifications within the commercial and residential training structures, general contractors shall carry a $5,000.00 bid allowance in the Contractor's Proposal. Include an allowance of five thousand dollars ($5,000) within the lump sum of Bid Item A-14 to cover costs to address possible additions/modifications to the electrical scope of work for possible electrical additions/modifications within the fire training structures. Once the successful fire training equipment provider completes shop drawings reflecting all of the electrical requirements for their fire training systems this allowance would be applied, if needed, towards any additional/modified electrical work needed not shown in the plans and specifications. SPECIFICATIONS 1. Page 58. GENERAL PROVISIONS. Section 2-3.2 Additional Responsibility. Reference is made to Addendum No. 1, Specifications, Item 3. In the second paragraph, the last sentence delete the words "...and distribution system, and concrete paving.", and substitute the following: "...and distribution system, concrete paving and elevator." 2. Section 02792, SYNTHETIC GRASS A. This section has been added to the specifications. 3. Section 04200, CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. This section has been updated per the following changes: • Section 3.9.A has been updated to say "Sandblast for textural effects at all exposed concrete masonry surfaces." • Section 3.9.B has been updated to say "Apply sandblasting to precision concrete masonry walls as demonstrated on approved samples per section 3.7 and in uniform and consistent texture per Article 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE under section B.1 .c. 4. Section 08305. SPECIAL DOORS A. Part 2 - Products, has been updated to accommodate a change in acceptable manufacturers for the doors and blast resistant material. 5. Section 08520. ALUMINUM WINDOWS A. This section has been updated to call out "(Building 'S' Only)" below the heading for this specification. 6. Section 08525. ALUMINUM SLIDING WINDOWS FOR TRAINING BUILDINGS (BUILDING "R" ONLY) A. This section has been added to the specifications. 7. Section 08710. FINISH DOOR HARDWARE & SCHEDULE A. The following door hardware section has been updated: • Heading P015 (1) SL DOOR C33 TRAINING / CLOSET (1) SL DOOR C35 TRAINING / CLOSET Each Assembly to have: (1) SET TRACK & HARDWARE C-500 72 IN (2 DR) KNC (2) EA DOOR PULL 8111-5 626 IVE (4) EA DOOR STOP CAS-1 HEAVY DUTY KNC (1) EA FASCIA C-130 KNC (4) EA GUIDE C-913 KNC (6) FT GUIDE CHANNEL C-914 KNC • Manufacturers and their abbreviations used in this schedule: - KNC K.N. Crowder Mfg. Inc. - IVE H.B. Ives 8. Section 09900. PAINTS AND COATINGS A. The following changes were made to this specification: • Part 1 - General - Section 1.01: Item "I" was removed as there will be no anti- graffiti coating applied to the exterior of the building. • Part 2 - Products - Section 2.03 - Paint Systems - Exterior, was added to the specifications. - Section 2.04 - Paint Systems - Interior, was added to the specifications. - Section 2.05 - Accessory Materials, was added to the specifications. 9. Section 09901, PAINTING AND COATING WATER PIPING SYSTEM A. Section 2.3.A has been revised to say: • General: The Contractor shall paint all exposed steelwork, exposed pipework, fittings, all non-factory applied mechanical equipment, pumps and motors with this coating system. All metalwork previously given a shop prime coat approved by the Owner's Representative shall be touched up as required in the field with Tnemec Series 4 Versare Primer or equal. 10.Section 14600, WALL MOUNTED JIB CRANE A. Section 2.01 .A has been updated to call out a jib crane with a 16 foot span. NOT 10 feet. CONSTRUCTION PLANS 1. Sheet C-5 A. Per Exhibit AD03-L-01., the clouded areas indicate the locations of existing boulders to be relocated. Refer to sheet C-5 which shows dashed outlined edges indicating boulder groupings. Sizes vary throughout. 2. Sheet A-S-7.3 A. Per Exhibit AD03-A-01, the pistol locker has been properly located on the wall. GENERAL QUESTIONS 1. Q: Polyguard issued a substitution request for their line of products. A: Review of the various submitted documents provided the material data information that the substitution of the Polyguard product is an acceptable alternate. Recommend the Polyguard Undersea! UNDERSLAB be installed under the floor slabs at the shooting ranges and elevator pit (doc#1). Recommend the Polyguard Underseal BLINDSIDE be installed at the elevator pit walls (doc#2). Recommend the Polyguard PG 650 Sheet Waterproofing at the shooting range masonry wall conditions. 2. Q: On page C-1 of the plans, the "Masonry Retaining Wall" item has 1,200 SF listed as its quantity. Page A-1.1, note 04810.A shows significantly more 6' masonry site wall. Are these quantities accurate for bidding purposes? A: The quantities indicated on C-1 and amended under Addendum #1 are accurate. Quantities as shown on the plans are mainly for the City of Carlsbad's use. It is the contractor's responsibility to make their own take offs for bidding purposes. The 6' masonry walls shown on A-1.1 are not retaining walls-; rather they act as perimeter security walls for the training grounds. The quantity for those perimeter walls should be taken as a separate number for bidding purposes. See Exhibits AD02-A-01 through AD02-A-08 from Addendum #2 for the lengths of the perimeter walls. 3. Q: On page S-S-2.1, between grid lines 4 and 6, and grid lines A and C, there are 12" by 12" pilasters called out. Is there a detail for these pilasters? A: These two pilasters are thickened sections of wall with typical vertical wall steel (#4 at each outside corner). This is not specifically detailed. 4. Q: Detail 5 on page S-6.5 calls for a "4" High 'BB' Unit at Top of Wall." It is shown as CMU, but is this calling out for a CIP bond beam? A: The "BB" reference refers to a typical CMU bond beam unit, not a CIP concrete section. 5. Q: Detail 11c/S-8.3 calls for "LTP A # OC." What is the spacing of this LTP? A: LTP spacing at 16" o.c. 6. Q: Sheet A-S-8.2, Detail 44. Please clarify the bullet resistance level for the fiberglass armor. A: Refer to specification section 08305 - Special Doors, Part 2 - Products. Sections 2.01.A - 2.01.C indicate the appropriate bullet resistance level . per door. 7. Q: Spec 11890-3, 2.01 MATERIALS, 2-Physical Requirements: Item d, "fire prevention" material. What is the specification for the fire prevention treatment on the bullet trap rubber material? Please confirm you are looking for a verifiable Class-Afire prevention material to be installed within the bullet trap. Otherwise, please provide the level of the fire prevention materials to be used for this project. A: There is not a fire prevention criteria required for the granular fill. Granular fill, as supplied by manufacturers equal to the Basis of Design (Range Systems) are acceptable. Manufacturers equal to Range Systems include Action Target, Meggitt Defense Systems and Super Trap (non- GelCore fill) 8. Q: Sheets E-S-4.1 and E-S-4.3: Note I calls for a media link controller in multiple places throughout these sheets. Please clarify the purpose and quantity of the media link controller as there is no mention of these in the specs. Notes 2, 3, and 4 call for other plates with inputs. Please clarify what these inputs are for. A: Note #1 on sheets E-S-4.1 and E-S-4.3 refer to Sheet E-0.8 for this Audio / Video system media link controller. Please see E-0.8 for block diagram and products specifications. Typical for notes 2, 3, and 4. Contractor is to provide conduit system with cables as indicated on the block diagram. The Audio / Video system equipment shall be owner furnished, contractor installed. Contractor to verify equipment supplied by the owner. 9. Q: General Note #2 on Sheet A-S-4.2 states that the roofing products are based on systems manufactured by GAP. Spec Section 07510 Item 2.01 states that the acceptable manufacturer is Tremco Roofing. Please clarify that the specifications are correct or please provide a new roofing specification. A: The GAP System added as response to permit process requirement. Project roofing is governed by the criteria as defined by the GAP system. Systems by Tremco Roofing that meet or exceed the criteria will be considered. Substitution request must be submitted for consideration in compliance with requirements of Section 01130-Substitutions within the time frame noted. 10.Q: Sheet L-2.0 - The Hardscape legend states that the boulders should be relocated from existing locations on site. The plans do not specify the location of where the various boulder sizes are located on the existing site or the quantity available onsite; therefore, making it difficult to quantify. Can a stated allowance be stipulated for all bidders for boulder work? If so, please provide amount. A: Per Exhibit AD03-L-01, the clouded areas indicate the locations of existing boulders to be relocated. Refer to sheet C-5 which shows dashed outlined edges indicating boulder groupings. Sizes vary throughout. 11 .Q: Sheet L-2.0 - There is no specification for provided for the Artificial Turf. Please provide product required. A: Refer to specification section 02792 - Synthetic Grass. 12. Q: Sheet L-2.0 - Please provide supplier for the Turf (Sod). A: The following business has been identified to provide turf for this project: • West Coast Turf 1365 Descanso Avenue San Marcos, CA 92069-1305 (760)591-4326 www.westcoastturf.com 13.Q: What type of sod is being used for this project? A: Sod Type: Tall Fescue Marathon II 14.Q: What type of artificial sod? A: Refer to specification section 02792 - Synthetic Grass. 15.Q: What type of cobble pavers? A: Refer to specification section 02783 - Concrete Pavers. 16.Q: Are the root barriers 24" wide? And are they by 5' or 10'? A: The root barrier size must be determined by the contractor and is indicated on Sheet L-2.2, Detail D, which states: Root control barrier install length shall be equal to two (2) times diameter of rootball. 17.Q: What are the sizes of the relocated trees? A: The sizes of trees to be relocated vary. In general the sizes range from 4" caliper to 8" caliper. 18.Q: Details 52 and 54 on Sheet A-S-9.2 refer to the roof sheathing being fire treated. This is the only reference in the plans. Is it the intent to have fire treated roof sheathing on the entire project, just Bldg S, or is it a generic note that does not apply? A: The fire retardant sheathing applies to the entire roof area over the second flooring of the "S" building. 19.Q: The finish plans show the resilient flooring as VCT (Vinyl Composition Tile) with rubber base, but the specifications only call out self coved sheet vinyl with heat welded seams. Please clarify floor finish for rooms: 107, 110, 118, 119, 202, 204 and 205. A: The Armstrong Medintech Sheet Vinyl should be used in all rooms that indicate a resilient flooring material per the finished schedule. At those locations the specified rubber base should be used, NOT a coved base of the sheet vinyl. 20. Q: Spec Section 09650 makes reference to the stairs having resilient flooring, although, the finish plans do not show this type of flooring. Please confirm that resilient flooring is not required in the stairwells. A: Resilient flooring is not used at any of the stair locations. 21. Q: The finish plans show "SCON" finish at the stair landings. Please clarify if the "SCON" finish is required on the intermediate stair landings, treads, and risers. A: The pre-cast treads do not require a sealed concrete finish, but any poured concrete landing does. 22. Q: Sheet E-0.7 - Please clarify the primary and secondary configuration. Secondary calls out, "2 sets of 4" conduit with 3-0 600 KCMIL conductors. Provide (1)4" C.O. & (1) 2" C.O.". Is this a total of three (3) - 4" and one (1) - 2"? Is there a SDG&E plan? A: For the Primary, contractor to provide 2-4" conduits and 1-2" conduit. For the Secondary, contractor to provide 3- 4" conduits and 1-2" conduit. Currently there are no SDG&E plans. 23. Q: Sheet E-0.21 - Panel HVAC is shown as a 480v 3p 3w panel, but shows 2 ea 30A 1P and 2 ea 20A 1P breakers. 1P breakers cannot be used on panels with no neutral. Should these be 1 ea 30A 2P and 1 ea 20A 2P breakers, or should the panel be 277/480V 3p 4w? A: Breakers should be 1-2P30AT and 1-2P20AT. IWH loads on circuits # 30 and 32 should be transferred to panel "LTG" circuits #17 and 19 respectively. Provide 1-each 1P30AT breakers at these locations. 24. Q: Sheet E-S-2.1 - Room 123, fixture labeled type 'G', but symbol appears to be type 'C', which would be more appropriate for the room function. Please confirm fixture type required for this room. A: Light Fixture in Room 123 shall be type "C". 25. Q: Sheet E-S-2.1 - Room 130, please provide what circuit the 2 type W light fixtures are on. A: The 3 light fixture type "W" in room 130 shall be connected and controlled by circuit "9b4". 26.Q: Sheet E-S-2.1 - At the south side of Stair 126, there are 11 Type V fixtures called out; however, there are only 8 shown on the drawing. Please advise. A: There are only 8 Type "V" light fixtures at the south side of stair 126 . 27. Q: Sheet E-S-2.2 - At the north side of the building, there are 10 Type M fixtures called out; however, the plan shows 13. Please verify that all 13 are type M or provide fixture type of the other 3 fixtures. A: There should be 13 Type "M" light fixtures at the north side of the building . 28. Q: Sheet A-1.1 shows a CMU wall around the north and west side of the project with a reference to Details 51&51/A-1.2. There are 2 types of site walls shown and the site plan does not identify the start and stop points of the different site walls. Please provide clarification. A: Refer to Exhibits AD02-A-01 through AD02-A-08 for further information concerning the perimeter site walls. 29. Q: Section 16750: The specification calls for ADC Krone cabling and hardware only. We request that the city consider other manufacturers as well. The Leviton/Superior Essex system is well known for superior quality as well as performance. Because Leviton/Superior Essex can perform at or above anything that ADC Krone can, we request that the city consider opening their bids up to competitive material. A: Per direction from the City of Carlsbad IT department, the only acceptable type of cabling for the First Responder facility is Krone. No other manufacturers will be considered. 30. Q: The following Stanley Track hardware is discontinued and is no longer available. Please provide new product / manufacturer. 8 ea Stanley Box Track XY641 EG 6 ea Stanley Fascia BP250N TOP & SIDES-Cut to Length 4 ea Stanley Heavy Duty Handle CD482 4 ea Stanley Roller STAYSP2560 8 ea Stanley Track Hanger BBXY2650 EG 2 ea Stanley Track SP2551 A: See revised specification section 08710 - Finish Door Hardware & Schedule. 31. Q: Division 17 "audiovisual systems" section 1.09 C.1 requires for the contractors engineer to be a university graduate in electrical, electronic or physics. Will the city accept an engineer with years of industry work experience and a degree in business administration? A: The use of an engineer with years of industry work experience is acceptable. 32. Q: Sheet A-C-5.2 calls for 08520 Aluminum Windows. However the window schedule on sheet A-C-8.2 calls for hollow metal frames. Please clarify. A: The door schedule per sheet A-C-8.1 is accurate and should be followed. Section 08520 - Aluminum Windows has been updated to reference that it only applies to Building 'S'. Refer to section 08525 - Aluminum Sliding Windows for Training Buildings (Building "R" Only) for further clarification. 33.Q: Spec 07140, 2.2, indicates a waterproof membrane under "exterior concrete below grade slab on grade". Where does this apply? A: Approximately 40' at the end of the 100-yard shooting range is below the finished grade and requires this application. Refer to sheet A-S-5.1 and detail 2 on sheet A-S-6.3, which shows this condition. 34.Q: Spec 03300, 2.2.N., mentions fiber reinforcement in concrete slabs but there is no call for it in the mix designs at 2.1.A or structural plan notes. Is fiber required? If so, please specify which mix(es). A: The structural drawings do not indicate any fiber reinforcement for the concrete to be used for the buildings. There is no need to apply the specification section, mentioned in the contractor's e-mail, to the building concrete. 35. Q: Sheet P1-1: Site Gas Plan shows 4" Gas going to building P-C-2.1 and Bldg P-R-2.1. Sheet P-C-2.1 view 1 shows 6" HPG going to the building. Sheet P-R-2.1 view 1 shows 5" HPG going to the building. Please advise to the proper size. A: The gas lines to the Commercial and Residential burn prop buildings should be 4-inch as shown on sheet P-1.1. 36.Q: Wall Mounted Jib Crane - Spec Section 14600, Item 2.02.B.1.C. states that the hoist should have a 40 fpm trolley speed which would indicate that it is powered, where item h of the same sections states that the trolley should be mounted so the operator can move loads by pushing on the load, indicating that it is a manual push trolley. Please clarify which hoist is required. A: The jib crane has a motorized hoist as referenced in section 2.02.B.1. It is NOT a manual hoist. Additionally, the length of the jib crane noted in section 2.01 .A has been changed from 10' to 16'. Refer to detail 24/A-T- 9.3 for further clarification. 37. Q: Vinyl Art Work - Elevations on Sheet A-S-7.1 call out for Dual Glass panels with In-laid graphic display art. Spec Section 12100 1.01.A.2 states that products supplied in this section are to be installed by others. Spec Section 12100 2.02D states that Owner to provide imagery for artwork. Please clarify GC's scope of work for the art work. Should an allowance for art work be carried in the bid? A: The GC's scope of work is to provide all items listed under "Part 2 - Products" of specification 12100 - Vinyl Art Work. Refer to detail 51/A-S- 9.2 for clarification concerning mounting the displays. When the artwork is ready for installation, the Owner will provide to the GC a digital file of the art work that can be printed and installed by the GC's subcontractor. 38.Q: Pistol Lockers - The interior elevation key notes call out note 10500.B - Pistol locker; however, the elevations do not show the location. Please clarify. A: Refer to Exhibit AD03-A-01, which shows where the pistol locker should be located on the wall. 39. Q: The Armory/Secured Weapons Storage Room 106 calls out Keynote 11.15 on sheet B-S-2.1. Keynote 11.15 is an item that is Weapons Storage. There are no elevations of this room to identify what size units are required for weapons storage. The specification for the Shooting Range Equipment does not indicate the "weapons storage". The Pistol lockers specified in Spec Section 10500 are wall mounted type in lieu of a standalone cabinet. Please specify what product to use for Keynote 11.15 A: The weapon storage indicated on sheet B-S-2.1 is included in a separate FF+E budget through the City of Carlsbad. The City of Carlsbad will purchase this equipment once the project is complete. The pistol locker identified in Hallway 113 by keynote 10500.B should be bid on as part of the Building "S". 40. Q: Spec 04200, 3.7, indicates mock-ups for different sandblast textures on masonry. We did not see sandblasting called for on plans. Please advise. A: Refer to updated specification section 04200 - Concrete Masonry Units. Section 3.9.A has been updated to say "Sandblast for textural effects at all exposed concrete masonry surfaces." Section 3.9.B has been updated to say "Apply sandblasting to precision concrete masonry walls as demonstrated on approved samples per section 3.7 and in uniform and consistent texture per Article 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE under section 41. Q: What areas of the buildings should have the wet pipe fire sprinkler systems, dry pipe fire sprinkler systems or the clean agent fire extinguishing system? A: All of Building "S" will use a wet pipe fire sprinkler system. Buildings "C" and "R" will utilize a dry standpipe system. The only exception is the use of a "Fire Sprinkler Prop" in Building "C" as shown in detail 34/A-T-9.1. A clean agent fire extinguishing system has NOT been specified at this facility. 42. Q: The Rifle Ranges have ceiling reflective guards that are suspended below the hard lid ceilings. They are about 4'xO, hanging at a slight angle. In our opinion they will obstruct the water flow from the fire sprinklers and should have sprinklers below them. What about the danger from bullets? How do we protect these sprinklers? A: The shooting ranges will utilize a wet pipe system and as such, will require the sprinkler heads to be hidden behind the protective baffles. As the fire sprinkler system is a deferred submittal item, we will wait until it has been submitted to thoroughly review it for conformance. 43. Q: Specification Section 09901 - Painting and Coating Water Piping: 2.3 - Metal, Interior and Exterior, Normal Exposure includes all exposed steelwork, non-galvanized handrails, door, door frames and window sashes. Is this correct? This specification includes several alternates. Please clarify alternates. In general is this specification section for factory applied coatings to piping and mechanical equipment? A: Section 2.3.A has been revised to say: • General: The Contractor shall paint all exposed steelwork, exposed pipework, fittings, all non-factory applied mechanical equipment, pumps and motors with this coating system. All metalwork previously given a shop prime coat approved by the Owner's Representative shall be touched up as required in the field with Tnemec Series 4 Versare Primer or equal. 44. Q: Addendum 2 has added two decorative concrete specifications that asks for installer information to be submitted with our bid. To our knowledge there is only one licensed Lithocrete installer in San Diego: T.B. Penick. Shaw & Sons is the only other licensed Lithocrete installer in this area, but they are in Orange Co. and geographic licensing restrictions may preclude them from bidding. Furthermore, after a search of the internet for the HD Concrete System we came up with one company in Texas that may have pioneered the process. It is possible that T.B. Penick might be the only qualified installer in San Diego, but we will have to do some checking to verify. What is the color and/or finish desired for this application? Has a mock-up already been submitted for approval by the architect that other bidders need to see in order to price this work? Given that Penick is one of the pre-qualified General Contractors bidding the project, this appears to be a conflict of interest if they are the only qualified source for these installations in the San Diego area. Please provide a list of acceptable qualified installers. A: The decorative concrete specifications that were added during Addendum #2 utilized T.B. Penick as a basis of design. It is the responsibility of the General Contractor to find a manufacturer or installer that can meet the design intent in accordance with the requirements defined in Section 01130 - Substitution Requests. Mock-ups will be required for the Architects review in processing any substitution. 45. Q: Sheet S-5.3 details 6 and 12. These details are for the arch. Screen wall that will go in later on in the project. The details should have a sleeve or and embed. They currently show the vertical member of the screen getting embedded in concrete. A: It is the General Contractor's methods and means of constructing the building to determine the installing of the screen wall system and the timing of its' installation. 46. Q: What is the specific concrete finish required on the exposed concrete walls? A: Provide a smooth parge coat finish on all exposed concrete faces. 47. Q: Openings C24, C42, R2: Reference Detail 41/A-T-8.1 - are these openings standard HM doors x HM Frames? Or Tactical Breach Training Doors? These openings have a elevation type "H", and shows a Deadbolt prop door, do these openings need a forcible entry door assembly like detail 44/A-T-8.1 A: Per the door schedules on A-C-8.1 and A-R-8.1, doors C24, C42 and R2 are hollow metal doors and have hollow metal frames. It is noted on the door schedules to refer to detail 41/A-T-8.1 for further information. 48. Q: Opening #40 type "F" - "Manual Droptrac Single Slide Right with Wall Guide System" - Chase doors has excluded the ballistic protection on this opening. Chase also said this type of door has never been used with Ballistic protection attached to it, and will void the warranty. Is there a manufacturer that will quote the ballistic protection? A: Refer to the revised section, Part 2 - Products, in specification 08305 - Special Doors for more information concerning acceptable manufacturers. 49. Q: No manufacturer is provided for the Acoustical Blast resistant/FRP doors S32 & S50. Please provide manufacturer. A: Refer to the revised section, Part 2 - Products, in specification 08305 - Special Doors for more information concerning acceptable manufacturers. 50. Q: Is the CMU sand blast on all exposed faces of CMU on the buildings or just exterior walls? A: Yes. All exposed CMU surfaces shall receive a sand blasted finish. 51. Q: Are the site CMU fence walls sand blasted? If so, on one side or both? A: Yes. Both sides of the CMU perimeter site wall should be provided with a sand blasted finish. 52. Q: What color is the CMU at the site fence walls? A: The CMU perimeter site wall shall be "Concrete Block, Color 2 - Slate". 53. Q: Is there a plan with more detail showing the site wall at the perimeter of the property? For example: Top of wall and top of footing elevations. How much of the wall has the metal screening? A: Refer to Exhibits AD02-A-01 through AD02-A-08 from Addendum #2 for further clarification concerning the perimeter site wall. The top of wall and top of footings are based on the final grading plan as shown on C-6. It is the General Contractor's responsibility to determine these heights. 54. Q: Who is furnishing the 2" rigid insulation behind the 4" CMU veneer? A: It is the General Contractor's methods and means of constructing the building to determine who will be furnishing the rigid insulation. 55. Q: Who is installing this insulation? A: It is the General Contractor's methods and means of constructing the building to determine who will be installing the insulation. 56. Q: Can a fine grout be used in the 4" veneer? 3/8" pea-gravel pump mix would be difficult to pump into such a small core. A: For bidding purposes, bid per plans and specifications. 57. Q: In Addendum #2, Section 03330 Lithocrete Cast-in-Place Concrete was included. Does the "Required Architectural Cast-in-Place Concrete Sub- Consultant Information" (see page 8) and the color photos (also page 8) need to be included at the time of bid submission? A: For the purposes of bidding, this information is not required at this time. 58. Q: Can a fine grout be used in the 4" veneer? 3/8" pea-gravel pump mix would be difficult to pump into such a small core. A: For the purposes of bidding, this information is not required at this time. 59. Q: Sheet E-0.9: Detail 5 shows encasement for multi duct runs. Do we need encasement for all underground conduits or do the single or power conduit for the site lighting, gate control and miscellaneous branch circuits require encasement? Do under slab conduits require encasement or is sand acceptable? A: Per specifications and contract drawings, all power and low voltage distribution and utility service underground conduits shall be concrete encased. For single power conduit for site lighting and gate control circuits, sand cushion is acceptable except at underneath driveways and parking lots where concrete encasement is required. For conduit under building slab, sand cushion is acceptable. SECTION 02792 SYNTHETIC GRASS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK: A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and tools necessary for the complete installation of the synthetic grass turf field as indicated on the plans and as specified herein. The installation of all materials shall be performed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions and in accordance with all approved shop drawings. B. Perimeter edge details required for the system shall be as detailed and recommended by the Manufacturer, and as approved by the Construction Manager. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS "Greenbook" Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction - 300-1 Clearing and Grubbing "Greenbook" Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction - 300-2 Unclassified Excavation "Greenbook" Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction - 301 - Treated Soil, Subgrade Preparation, and Placement of Base Materials 1.03 REFERENCES A. FM P7825 - Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; current edition. B. ASTM Standard Test Methods: 1. D1577 - Standard Test Method for Linear Density of Textile Fiber 2. D5848 - Standard Test Method for Mass Per Unit Area of Pile Yarn Floor Covering 3. Standard Test Method for Testing Pile Yarn Floor Covering Construction 4. D1335 - Standard Test Method for Tuft Bind of Pile Yarn Floor Coverings 5. D1682 - Standard Method of Test for Breaking Load and Elongation of Textile Fabrics 6. D5034 - Standard Test Method of Breaking Strength and Elongation of Textile Fabrics (Grab Test) 7. F1015 - Standard Test Method for Relative Abrasiveness of Synthetic Turf Playing Surfaces 8. D4491 - Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity 9. D2859 - Standard Test Method for Ignition Characteristics of Finished Textile Floor Covering 10. Standard Test Method for Shock-Absorbing Properties of Playing Surfaces. 11. D1557 - Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Synthetic Grass Specifications 02792-1 1.04SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit: 1. Shop Drawings, indicating: a. Roll/Seaming Layout b. Methods of attachment, field openings and perimeter conditions. 2. Turf Manufacturer's literature with verification of fiber manufacturer's name, type of fiber and composition of fiber. Fiber shall be extruded through a spinneret and the cross-section of the fiber shall include a central rib or spine and arched profile to provide superior fiber memory. 3. Certified copies of independent (third-party) laboratory reports on ASTM tests as follows: a. Pile Height, Face or pile weight & Total Fabric Weight, ASTM D418 or D5848 b. Primary & Secondary Backing Weights, ASTM D418 or D5848 c. Grab Tear Strength, ASTM D1682 or D5034 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. 'Series Two Monofilament Synthetic Grass System1 1. Manufacturer: FieldTurf International Inc. 2. Telephone: (707) 586-8873. B. 'Nature's Blend' 1. Manufacturer: TigerTurf 2. Contact: Anthony Martin, Grass Creations. (559)784-3320. C. Approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION: 3.01 EXECUTION A. The installation shall be performed in full compliance with approved Shop Drawings. B. Only trained technicians, skilled in the installation of athletic caliber synthetic turf systems working under the direct supervision of the approved installer/manufacturer supervisors, shall undertake any cutting, sewing, gluing, shearing, topdressing or brushing operations. C. The designated Supervisory personnel on the project must be certified, in writing by the Turf Manufacturer, as competent in the installation of this material, including sewing seams and proper installation of the infill mixture. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify that all sub-base, drainage and leveling is complete prior to installation. B. The surface to receive the synthetic turf must be inspected by the Installer, and prior to the beginning of installation, the Installer must accept the sub-base in writing. The acceptance will depend on the owner providing the installer with test results indicating that compaction, planarity and permeability are in compliance with the synthetic turf manufacturer's specifications. The surface must be perfectly clean as installation commences and shall be maintained in that condition throughout the process. Acceptance shall be for tolerance to grade (1/4 inch in 10 feet in all directions). Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Synthetic Grass Specifications 02792-2 Installer shall be responsible for verifying the planarity of the base only; in no way will installer be responsible for compaction, permeability or other facets of base design, materials or construction. C. The compaction of the aggregate base shall be 95%, according to the Modified Proctor procedure (ASTM D1557), and the surface tolerance shall not exceed 0-1/4 inch over 10 feet and O-Yz" from design grade. All must be verified by means of ASTM testing and surveys to the satisfaction of the turf contractor. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF TURF SYSTEM A. Install in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. The Turf Contractor shall strictly adhere to the installation procedures outlined under this section. Any variance from these requirements must be accepted, in writing, by the onsite representative of the Manufacturer/Installer, and submitted to the Construction Manager, verifying that the changes do not in any way affect the warranty or performance of the system. Infill materials shall be approved by the Manufacturer and installed in accordance with the Manufacturer's standard procedures. B. The carpet rolls are to be installed directly over the properly prepared aggregate base or shock pad. Extreme care should be taken to avoid disturbing the aggregate base or damaging the pad, both in regard to compaction and planarity. It is suggested that a 2-5 ton static roller be placed on site and made available to repair and properly compact any disturbed areas of the aggregate base. C. Carpet shall be delivered in 15-foot wide rolls. No seams are permissible in areas less than 15 feet wide unless unavoidable. D. Gluing of fabric rolls shall not be acceptable, except in the following cases: 1. To repair problem areas. 2. Corner completions. E. All seams shall be sewn using double bagger stitches and polyester thread or adhered using seaming tape and high grade adhesive (per the manufacturer's standard procedures). Seams shall be flat, tight, and permanent with no separation or fraying. F. Infill materials shall be applied in thin lifts. The turf shall be brushed as the mixture is applied. The infill material shall be installed to a depth determined by the Manufacturer or 1.75 inch within the fiber matrix. The mix shall be uniform and even in thickness to assure proper playing characteristics. G. The infill materials shall be installed to fill the voids between the fibers and allow the fibers to remain vertical and non-directional. The infill installation consists of a base layer of sand followed by a homogenous mixture of the sand and the cryogenically processed rubber. A final application of specifically sized cryogenically processed rubber completes the system. The infill shall be installed to the depth of 1-1/4". The infill shall be placed so that there is a void of %" to the top of the fibers. Infill density shall consist of no less than 6 pounds of sand (and no more than 7 pounds of sand) and at least 3 pounds of rubber granules per square foot. A pure layer of rubber shall be placed as the final lift of the fill, to minimize sand coming in contact with players. H. Synthetic turf shall be attached to the perimeter edge detail in accordance with the Manufacturer's standard procedures. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Synthetic Grass Specifications 02792-3 3.04 CLEANING RECOMMENDATIONS A. Protect installed synthetic grass from subsequent construction operations. B. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor surface. C. Contractor shall provide the labor, supplies, and equipment as necessary for final cleaning of surfaces and installed items. D. All usable remnants of new material shall become the property of the owner. E. The Contractor shall keep the area clean throughout the project and clear of debris. F. Surfaces, recesses, enclosures, etc., shall be cleaned as necessary to leave the work area in a clean, immaculate condition, ready for immediate occupancy and use by the Construction Manager. 3.05 MAINTENANCE & WARRANTY A. Prior to Final Acceptance, the Contractor shall submit to the Construction Manager: 1. Three (3) copies of Maintenance Manuals, which will include all necessary instructions for the proper care and preventive maintenance of the turf system, including painting and markings. 2. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of seams, drains or other pertinent information. 3. Warranty: a. Submit Manufacturer Warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with Manufacturer and Insurance Carrier.. Submit information confirming that 3rd Party Insurance Policy, non-cancelable and pre-paid, is in effect covering this installation, and underwritten by an AM Best "A+" (or better) Rated Insurance Carrier. Insurance carrier must confirm that the policy is in force and premiums paid. The manufacturer's warranty shall include general wear and damage caused from UV degradation. Must have a 3rd party insured, non-prorated and NON-CANCELEABLE warranty pre-paid for 8 years from no lower than an 'A+1 rated insurance company listed in the A.M. Best Key Rating Guide The policy must include a minimum annual aggregate of $10,000,000 per year and be based on claims arising from fields installed and completed only during the policy year. The policy must include an unlimited amount per claim up to the maximum aggregate. The policy cannot have any epidemic failure limitations or restrictions. The policy must not have any deductible and the coverage must be for labor, materials and any other costs to repair or replace each field per the warranty certificate. Upon completion of the field, the turf manufacturer will supply evidence that the policy is in effect, fully funded and that the installation is added to the policy upon completion and acceptance. Policy shall guarantee coverage of a minimum of $6.00 per square foot of turf installed. Any policy that includes self insured participation or deductible amounts shall be deemed non compliant. Policy must be in force at time of bid; insurance carrier must confirm that the policy is in force and premiums paid. b. The warranty shall specifically exclude vandalism and Acts of God beyond the control of the owner or the manufacturer. c. The turf contractor shall provide a warranty to the owner that covers defects in the installation workmanship, and further warrant that the installation was Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Synthetic Grass Specifications 02792-4 done in accordance with both the manufacturer's recommendations and any written directives of the manufacturer's onsite representative. d. All turf warranties shall be NON PRORATED and limited to repair or replacement of the affected areas, at the option of the manufacturer, and shall include all necessary materials, labor, transportation costs, etc. to complete said repairs. All warranties are contingent on the full payment by the owner of all pertinent invoices. e. Turf must maintain an ASTM 355 G-max of less than 175 for the life of the warranty. f. If a synthetic base drainage system is utilized, the manufacturer of that product must warranty their system for eight years for the repair and or replacement of the turf in the event that the synthetic base fails. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Synthetic Grass Specifications 02792-5 SECTION 08305 SPECIAL DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sliding door #40 between ranges as indicated on the drawings. 2. Pair of swinging doors #32 from 25 yard Range to Range Equipment Storage #127. 3. Single swinging door #50 from 100 yard Range to Storefront Prop. B. Related Documents: The Contract Documents, as defined in Section 01110 - Summary of Work, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional requirements and information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other Documents. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 9 Section "Fiber Reinforced Plastic Panel." 2. Division 9 Section "Paint." 3. Division 11 Section "Range Equipment - Limp Mass Barrier, etc." 4. Division 13 Section "Bullet Resistant Fiberglass" 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Install per manufacturer instructions, and as specified herein. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's technical product data and rough-in diagrams and details. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver products in manufacturers original packages, clearly marked with brand name and model number. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Guarantee against defects in material and workmanship for period as prescribed in manufacturer's standard Warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Horizontal Sliding Ballistically Improved Door #40: Unit shall be single panel, suspended on heavy duty track. Door shall be 2-3/4" thickness. Door shall be custom size 8'-0" wide x 9'-4" tall, sufficient to completely cover masonry opening of 8'-0" tall by 8'-8" wide. Complete door assembly, including suspension system, jamb casing, perimeter sound gasketing seals, and interior sound board insulation to maximum STC rating available per Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility SPECIAL DOORS Specifications 08305 -1 manufacturers standards. Provide UL 752 Level-2 Bullet Resistance. Blast Certification and Forced Entry Resistance not required. Door shall be solid face, no glazing, equal to model "USSD 4000", as manufactured by United States Bullet Proofing, Inc., Upper Marlboro, MD 20774 (800-363-8328), with manual sliding operation system. On 100-yard range face of door, apply a vinyl J-mould to encase the following assembly: layer of 1 Ib. / SF limp mass barrier shall be adhered to door. Staple a layer of resin paper over limp mass. Mechanically fasten another layer of 1 Ib. / SF limp mass barrier over resin paper. Ensure vinyl J-mould trim completely surrounds this assembly. After this is in place, adhere facing of fiberglass reinforced plastic panel (FRP - color to be selected from standard colors) over previously-detailed assembly, and trim with additional J-rnould as detailed. B. Insulated Hollow Metal Ballistically Improved Doors (Pair) #32 and Frame: Door to be exterior grade, 2-3/4" thick, insulated, Heavy Duty. Blast Certification and Forced Entry Resistance not required. Door shall be solid face, no glazing, equal to model "USSD 4000", as manufactured by United States Bullet Proofing, Inc., Upper Marlboro, MD 20774 (800-363-8328). Continuous heavy duty pin and barrel piano hinge, rated for 900 Ibs. per door. Custom size door and frame per door schedule. Interior sound board insulation to maximum STC rating available per manufacturers standards. Door shall be UL 752 Level- 2 Bullet Resistant. Coordinate bevel and hardware to assure tight fit & smooth operation. Hardware Set to be coordinate with building hardware specifications 2 ea. Continuous Hinge - Heavy Duty (rated for 900 Ibs. each) - Pemko #SPBFMHD 1 ea. Lever Lockset Classroom Function (Keyed and type per building hardware specification - adapted for additional thickness) - Schlage L9070T 17A x 630 "Thick Door" 1 ea. External Closer - LCN 4011 x 689 (Pull side) 1 set Perimeter Sound Gasketing - NGP 131N 1 ea. %" thick x 6" wide Solid Stainless Steel Threshold with edges beveled on angle and countersunk stainless screw attachments 2 ea. Automatic Acoustical Door Bottom - NGP 423N 1 ea. Astragal - NGP 148NGKB 2 ea. Surface Bolts - Ives #SB360 x 626, 12" bottom, 24" top 1 ea. Spring-loaded dustproof receivers - Ives DP1 x 626 C. Insulated Hollow Metal Ballistically Improved Door #50 and Frame: Door to be exterior grade, 2-3/4" thick, insulated, Heavy Duty. Blast Certification and Forced Entry Resistance not required. Door shall be solid face, no glazing, equal to model "USSD 4000", as manufactured by United States Bullet Proofing, Inc., Upper Marlboro, MD 20774 (800-363- 8328). Continuous heavy duty pin and barrel piano hinge, rated for 900 Ibs. per door. Custom size door and frame per door schedule. Interior sound board insulation to maximum STC rating available per manufacturers standards. Provide internal 10 gauge back up plate inside each face of the door (8" tall by width of door) behind panic device. Door shall be UL 752 Level-4 Bullet Resistant. On exterior side, apply a vinyl J-mould to encase the following assembly: 1 layer of 1 Ib. / SF limp mass barrier shall be adhered to door. Staple a layer of resin paper over limp mass barrier. Mechanically fasten second Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility SPECIAL DOORS Specifications 08305 - 2 layer of 1 Ib. / SF limp mass barrier over resin paper. After this is in place, adhere facing of fiberglass reinforced plastic panel (FRP - color to be selected from standard colors) over previously-detailed assembly, and trim with additional vinyl J-mould as detailed. Coordinate bevel and hardware to assure tight fit & smooth operation. Hardware Set to be coordinated with building hardware specifications 1 ea. Continuous Hinge - Heavy Duty (rated for 900 Ibs. each) - Pemko SPBFMHD 2 ea. Von Duprin Guard-X Model 2670 exit alarm panic device (US26D) w/ rim cylinder (Keyed per building hardware specification). One unit will be installed and one unit will be provided to Owner for future use. 1 ea. External Closer - LCN 4011 x 689 (mount pull side) 1 set Perimeter Sound Gasketing - NGP 423N 1 ea. %" thick x 6" wide Solid Stainless Steel Threshold with edges beveled on angle and countersunk stainless screw attachments 1 ea. Automatic Acoustical Door Bottom - NGP 423N 1 ea. Position Switch in frame to relay door-ajar signal to Range Control Panel signal light. This switch should match the switch used for exterior doors behind bullet traps. 1 ea. Floor Stop - Ives FS18L x 626 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine areas to receive door and frame to insure work of preceding trades is completed. Check surfaces to see that they are plumb in place, free from grease, oil or other debris which would affect proper installation. Application constitutes acceptance of substrate conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with current printed manufacturer's recommendations. B. Sliding door - Prior to placing door onto track, install limp mass and resin paper material. Apply J-mould at door edges as detailed. Ensure sound seal around entire perimeter; sides, bottom & top. C. Hollow metal doors - Provide 4 jamb anchors per jamb. Grout frame solid. D. For ballistic doors, carefully install door / frame units to coordinate and accept hardware and cladding to provide minimum gaps and spaces between materials, while providing smooth door operation. Grout frame solid. Coordinate w/ range consultant prior to the installation of cladding. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility SPECIAL DOORS Specifications 08305 - 3 SECTION 08525 ALUMINUM SLIDING WINDOWS FOR TRAINING BUILDINGS (Building "R" Only) PART1-GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes work required for the installation of horizontal-sliding windows for fire training buildings. 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide aluminum windows capable of complying with performance requirements indicated, based on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those specified and that are of minimum test size required by AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2. B. Performance: Provide aluminum windows capable of withstanding the following; 1. Air Infiltration: When closed and locked, the test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E283 at a minimum frame size of 96" x 80" (HC). Air infiltration rate shall not exceed 0.30 cfm/ft of sash perimeter at a static air pressure differential of 1.57 psf. 2. Water Resistance: When closed and locked, the test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E547 and ASTM E331 at a minimum frame size of 96" x 80" (HC). There shall be no leakage as defined in test method at a static air pressure differential of 10 psf. 3. Uniform Load Deflection: When closed and locked, a minimum static air pressure difference of 55 psf shall be applied in the positive and negative direction in accordance with ASTM E330. There shall be no deflection in excess of L/175 of the span of any framing member. 4. Uniform Load Structural Test: When closed and locked, a minimum static air pressure difference of 82.5 psf shall be applied in the positive and negative direction in accordance with ASTM E330. The unit shall be evaluated after each load. C. Forced-Entry Resistance: Comply with Performance Level 10 requirements when tested according to ASTM F 588. D. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum windows, including anchorage, that accommodate thermal movements of units resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures without buckling, distortion, opening of joints, failure of joint sealants, damaging loads and stresses on glazing and connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on actual surface temperatures of materials due to solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1.03 Product Data: For each type of aluminum window indicated. A. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other Work, and operational clearances. 1. Include structural analysis data indicating structural test pressures and design pressures from basic wind speeds indicated and deflection limitations of glass framing systems, signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Aluminum Windows for Training Buildings Specifications 08525-1 B. Samples: For exposed finish. C. Product test reports. D. Maintenance data. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: An Installer experienced to perform work of this section who has specialized in the installation of work similar to that required for this project and who is acceptable to product manufacturer qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's products. B. Pre-installation Meetings: Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, substrate conditions, manufacturer's installation instructions, and manufacturer's warranty requirements Conference: Conduct conference at Project site with owner and architect. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer capable of providing field service representation during construction, approving acceptable installer and approving application method 1.05 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace aluminum windows that fail due to materials and workmanship within Two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Warranty Period for Metal Finishes: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Basis of Design for windows listed below. Substitutions subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Kawneer Company, Inc.: 555 Guthridge Court, Technology Park, Atlanta, Norcross GA 30092, Tele (770) 449-5555, FAX (770) 734-1560 2. Approved Equivalent 2.02 WINDOW SYSTEM A. The Basis of Design for the sliding window system listed below: 1. Kawneer Model 8400TL Isolock® 2.03 GLAZING A. Glazing Materials: Glazing for training windows shall be %" minimum thickness fixed aluminum panel set in aluminum window units. 2.04 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate horizontal sliding aluminum windows, in sizes indicated, that comply with requirements and that meet or exceed AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 performance requirements for Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Aluminum Windows for Training Buildings Specifications 08525-2 the following window type and performance class. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows. 1. Material Standard: ASTM B221, G.S. 10A-T5; 6063-T5 alloy and temper. 2. Frame Depth: Not less than 4" (101.6 mm). 3. Member Wall Thickness: Each master frame member shall have minimum wall thickness of 0.070" (1.78 mm) and shall provide structural strength to meet specified performance requirements. Each sash member shall have a minimum wall thickness of 0.080" (2.03 mm). All vertical sash members shall be tubular construction. Meeting rail shall have a continuous interlock with double weather stripping. 4. Dimensions: Reference to dimensions for wall thickness and other cross-sectional dimensions of window members are nominal and in compliance with ANSI H35.2-1990. B. Fabricate aluminum windows that are re-glazable without dismantling sash or ventilator framing. C. Thermal Barrier: 1. Frame thermal barrier shall be Kawneer Isolock® with a minimum of 5/16" (7.9) separation consisting of a two-part, chemically curing high density polyurethane which is mechanically and adhesively bonded to the aluminum. 2. Sash thermal barrier shall be Kawneer Isolock® with a minimum of 1/4" (6.4) separation consisting of a two-part, chemically curing high density polyurethane in conditioned thermal pockets which is mechanically and adhesively bonded to the aluminum. D. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to exterior. E. Provide water-shed members above side-hinged ventilators and similar lines of natural water penetration. F. Mullions: Shall be extruded aluminum of 60693-T5 allow. Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, matching window units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections, as indicated. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design loads of window units. G. Glazing Stops: Provide snap-on glazing stops coordinated with Division 8 Section "Glazing" and glazing system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match sash and ventilator frames. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Where exposed, shall be 300 Series, Stainless Steel. B. Perimeter Anchors: Aluminum. When steel anchors are used, provide insulation between steel material and aluminum material to prevent galvanic action. C. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard corrosion resistant hardware material compatible with aluminum. 1. Continuous Integral Pulls 2. Stainless Steel Ball Bearing Rollers 3. Stainless Steel Roller Track 4. Plunger Lock 2.06 FINISHES A. Fluropon® (70% PVDF), Finish complying with AAMA 2605. 1. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Aluminum Windows for Training Buildings Specifications 08525-3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction. B. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight construction. C. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture migrating within windows to the exterior. D. Metal Protection: Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials by complying with requirements specified in "Dissimilar Materials" Paragraph in Appendix B in AAMA/NWWDA 101/1.S.2. E. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. In addition, monitor window surfaces adjacent to and below exterior concrete and masonry surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, stains, or other contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written recommendations. F. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. G. Clean fixed aluminum panels installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. H. Remove and replace aluminum panels that have been scratched, dented, or damaged during construction period. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Remove and replace windows where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. B. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility Aluminum Windows for Training Buildings Specifications 08525-4 SECTION 09900 PAINTS AND COATINGS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 Work Included - Work includes, but is not necessarily limited to: A. Exterior and interior doors and frames B. Interior gypsum board walls, ceilings, and soffits C. Exposed piping and metal D. Exterior cement plaster at trim and accent colors of building. E. Exterior fascias F. Exterior eaves, soffits, and mechanical roof walls G. Exterior cement plaster eaves, soffits, and mechanical roof well walls. H. All other exterior and interior attachments and accessories adjacent to painted surfaces B. Field application of paints, stains, and other coatings. C. Scope: Finish all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and unless otherwise indicated, including the following: D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically so indicated; materials and products having factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished. 2. Items indicated to receive other finishes. 3. Items indicated to remain unfinished. 4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of equipment. 5. Floors, unless specifically so indicated. 6. Glass. 7. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Conform to ASTM D 16 for interpretation of terms used in this section. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition. B. ASTM D 16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications; 2007. C. ASTM D 4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and Wood-Base Materials; 1992 (Reapproved 2003). D. GreenSeal GS-11 - Paints; 1993. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on all finishing products, including VOC content. C. Samples: Submit three drawdown samples of selected colors for review. D. Certification: By manufacturer that all paints and coatings comply with VOC limits specified. E. Certification: By manufacturer that all paints and coatings do not contain any of the prohibited Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility PAINTS AND COATINGS Specifications 09900 -1 chemicals specified; GreenSeal GS-11 certification is not required but if provided shall constitute acceptable certification. F. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and coated surfaces. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified, with minimum three years documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified approved by manufacturer. 1.06 MOCK-UP A. See Section 01400 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock-up. B. Mock-up may remain as part of the work. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) and a maximum of 90 degrees F (32 degrees C), in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations. C. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) for interiors; 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish Finishes: 65 degrees F (18 degrees C) for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. F. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles (860 Ix) measured mid-height at substrate surface. 1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Section 01600 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. B. Supply 1 gallon (4 L) of each color; store where directed. C. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility PAINTS AND COATINGS Specifications 09900 - 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; no exceptions. B. Paints: 1. ICI Paints: www.icipaintsinna.com. C. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL A. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed coating. 1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. 2. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 3. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single production run. 4. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions. B. Primers: Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primer categorized as "best" by the manufacturer. C. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: 1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following: a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings. b. Architectural coatings VOC limits of State in which the project is located. 2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Colors: As indicated on drawings 1. Allow for minimum of three colors for each system, unless otherwise indicated, without additional cost to Owner. 2. In finished areas, finish pipes, ducts, conduit, and equipment the same color as the wall/ceiling they are mounted on/under. 3. In utility areas, finish equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed duct work in colors according to the color coding scheme indicated. 4. Color Schedules a. The Architect will prepare a color schedule with samples for guidance in painting after color selection from samples submitted. Interior Color: 1. GBP1-#81YY 81/016 Quiet Hideaway 2. GBP2 - # OONN 53/000 Veil 3. GBPS - # 30BG 16/133 Berkeley Blue Exterior Color: 1. EP1-# OONN 53/000 Veil 2. EP2 - # OONN 13/000 Obsidian Glass b. The Architect may select, allocate, and vary colors on different surfaces throughout the work, subject to the following: Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility PAINTS AND COATINGS Specifications 09900 - 3 1) Exterior Work: A maximum of five .(5) different colors will be used, with variations for trim, doors, miscellaneous work and metal work. 2) Interior Work: A maximum of six (6) different pigmented colors will be used, with variations for trim and wall surfaces and wainscots. 5. Paints at Wet Areas a. In toilet rooms and contiguous areas, add an approved fungicide to paints. b. For oil based paints, use 1% phenylmercuric or 4% tetrachlorophenol. c. For water emulsion and glue size surfaces, use 4% sodium tetrachlorophenate. 2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - EXTERIOR A. Water repellant coating at exposed Masonry/Concrete per Section 07190, Water Repellent Coating. B. Paint GE-OP-2L - Exterior Portland Cement Plaster/ Stucco, Opaque, Latex, 2 Coat: 1. One coat of latex primer sealer. 2. Flat: Two coats of latex. C. Paint ME-OP-3L - Ferrous Metals, Unprimed, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of latex primer. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel. D. Paint ME-OP-2L - Ferrous Metals, Primed, Latex, 2 Coat: 1. Touch-up with rust-inhibitive primer recommended by top coat manufacturer. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel. E. Paint MI-OP-3A - Steel Doors and Frames (all surfaces exposed to view): 1. One coat of latex primer. 2. Gloss: Two coats of latex enamel. 2.04 PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIOR A. Paint MI-OP-3L - Ferrous Metals, Unprimed, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of latex primer. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel. B. Paint MI-OP-2L - Ferrous Metals, Primed, Latex, 2 Coat: 1. Touch-up with latex primer. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel. C. Paint GI-OP-3L - Gypsum Board/Plaster, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of alkyd primer sealer. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel. 3. Flat: Two coats of latex enamel. D. Paint MI-OP-3A - Steel Doors and Frames (all surfaces exposed to view): 1. One coat of latex primer. 2. Gloss: Two coats of latex enamel. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Accessory Materials: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean-up materials required to achieve the finishes specified whether specifically indicated or not; commercial quality. B. Patching Material: Latex filler. C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility PAINTS AND COATINGS Specifications 09900 - 4 PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. D. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. E. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 2. Plaster and Stucco: 12 percent. 3. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent. 4. Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D 4442. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Remove or repair existing coatings that exhibit surface defects. D. Remove surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. E. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat. F. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. G. Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair. H. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer. I. Uncorroded Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand or power tool wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paint entire surface; spot prime after repairs. J. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item. K. Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Exterior Wood to Receive Opaque Finish: If final painting must be delayed more than 2 weeks after installation of woodwork, apply primer within 2 weeks and final coating within 4 weeks. Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility PAINTS AND COATINGS Specifications 09900 - 5 B. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied. D. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. E. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish. F. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat. G. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01400 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection. END OF SECTION Carlsbad Joint First Responders Training Facility PAINTS AND COATINGS Specifications ' 09900 - 6 ..J NOTE: CLOUDED AREAS INDICATE THE LOCATIONS OF EXISITING BOULDERS TO BE RELOCATED. REFER TO SHEET C-5 WHICH SHOWS DASHED OUTLINED EDGES INDICATING BOULDER GROUPINGS. SIZES VARY THROUGHOUT.. /~\ !fl'miflisj FIRST PtESKMOiO TDMMMi FACUTY 29« Oitoi Vtwj CmtMMd. C* KtMp HOWONTfiCOHmiLflJlN rrmdesigngroup creating environments people enjoy" 232 Avenida Fabricante, Suite 112 San Clemente, CA 92672 P: (949) 361-79501 f: (949) 361-79551 vmw.rrmdesign.com A Catfoow Cavonton! Vfctw Montgon«ry, AnMed «C110901 Jwiy MOne), PE KC895. LS «2761 JefT Fwtof, LA *28« CARLSBAD FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY ADDENDUM 3 EXHIBIT AD03-L-01 Sheet No c'5 D B.HANNEGANay Checked Date 03/09/10 Job No. Scale _ 1107570 NTS i— 10500.B rrmdesigngroup creating environments people enjoy" 232 Avenida Fabricante, Suite 112 San Clements, CA 92672 P: (949) 361-79501 f: (949) 361-79551 vnww.irmdesign.com A CajHonfe Copyalon | VUa Mowgwrwiy. Artfted K11090| J»y WdMel. PE *36895. LSI627B | Jeff Fortw,U«B« CARLSBAD FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY ADDENDUM 3 EXHIBIT AD03-A-01 A-S-7.3 MH Checked Date DI 03/09/10 Job No. Scale _ 1107570 Citv of Carlsbad Public Works - Contract Administration March 12, 2010 ADDENDUM NO. 4 RE: JOINT FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY, BID NO. PWS10-31UTIL Please include these addendum pages in the Notice to Bidders/Request for Bids you have for the above project. This page—receipt acknowledged—must be included in your bid when your bid is submitted. :EVIN L. DAVIS Sr. Contract Administrator ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF ADDENDUM NO. 4 Bidder's Signature 1635 Faraday Avenue • Carlsbad, CA 92008-7314 » (76O) 602-4677 • FAX (760) 602-8562 ADDENDUM NO. 4 CARLSBAD JOINT FIRST RESPONDER TRAINING FACILITY CONTRACT NO. 3686 SPECIFICATIONS 1. Page 28, GUIDE FOR COMPLETING THE "DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTORS" FORM. In the fifth paragraph under the title "INSTRUCTIONS" delete the last sentence beginning with the words" The explanation sheet shall clearly apprise the City ...", and substitute the following: "The explanation sheet shall clearly apprise the City of the specific facts that show the Bidder proposes to perform no less than twenty five percent (25%) of the work with its own forces." 2. Page 94. GENERAL PROVISIONS. Section 7-2.2 Laws. In the third paragraph delete the last sentence that reads " The Contractor shall not pay less than these rates." Reference is made to page 13 under the title "THE PAYMENT OF PREVAILING WAGES IS NOT REQUIRED". The Contractor shall reference the information provided on page 13 in preparing their bid. 3. Section 03330. LITHOCRETE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE A. Addendum #2 added this specification section. B. Addendum #3 general question #57 asked if the "Required Architectural Cast-in-place Concrete Sub-consultant Information" form and the color photos needed to be included at the time of bid submission. The answer was "For the purposes of bidding, this information is not required at this time". This answer is confirmed. C. The requirements of paragraphs 1.5.C and 1.5.D are hereby omitted. No "Required Architectural Cast-in-place Concrete Sub-consultant Information" form (03330-8) is required to be submitted before bid submission. D. Paragraph 1.8.A "Substitutions" is hereby omitted. Contractors shall be advised that any substitutions to the specified products shall be governed by specification section 01130 - Substitutions. 4. Section 03335. ARCHITECTURAL HP CONCRETE SYSTEM A. Addendum #2 added this specification section. B. The requirements of paragraphs 1.3.B and 1.3.C are hereby omitted. No "Required HD Concrete Flooring Sub-consultant Information" form (03335-4) is required to be submitted before bid submission. C. Contractors shall be advised that any substitutions to the specified products shall be governed by specification section 01130 - Substitutions. 5. Section 13000. INTERIOR STRUCTURAL FIRE TRAINERS A. The requirements listed in "Instructions" paragraph 1.04.B are hereby omitted as a requirement of submission for the products specified. Furthermore, the three attachments in the "References" paragraph 3,04; "Customer References", "Explanation Document" and "Alternative Document Sheet" are subsequently omitted as they are the forms and format of the requested information in paragraph 1.04.B. B. Contractors shall be advised that any substitutions to the specified products shall be governed by specification section 01130 - Substitutions. 6. Section 16640. CATHODIC PROTECTION BY SCARIFICIAL ANODES This section refers to buried water and recycled water metal piping such as copper service lines. The City's standard drawings applicable to the project include W-4, W-8, and W-25, which were included in the specifications.